JP7355166B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which a player is given a profit by shifting the gaming state to a special control state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined transition condition.

Specifically, pachinko machines have a configuration in which they enter a special control state when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, resulting in a winning result in an internal lottery, and A configuration is known in which a special control state is entered based on the arrival of a game ball into a game ball. When the state shifts to the special control state, for example, the opening and closing of a ball entry device provided in the gaming area is started, and game balls are paid out based on the ball entering the ball entry device (for example, (See Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-009055

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

In order to solve the above problem, the invention according to claim 1 provides an opportunity ball entry means that allows a game ball flowing down a game area to enter;
information acquisition means for acquiring opportunity information based on the game ball entering the opportunity ball entry means;
information storage means for storing the trigger information acquired by the information acquisition means;
a predetermined profit granting means for granting a predetermined profit to a player with at least one condition being the acquisition of the trigger information;
a measuring means for measuring a predetermined period of time based on the acquired trigger information;
A specific profit may be given to the player in a situation where the predetermined period is measured, or a specific profit is granted to the player in a situation where the predetermined period is measured than in a situation where the predetermined period is not measured. a specific profit granting means that makes it easier to be granted;
Equipped with
The specific profit granting means creates a situation in which it is possible to enter a game ball into a predetermined ball entry means as a grant of the specific profit,
This gaming machine is
A specific ball entry means provided so that whether or not the predetermined period is measured does not affect the frequency of entry of game balls;
means for providing a separate profit based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means, and providing the separate profit based on the game ball entering the specific ball entry means;
means for shifting the gaming state to a special gaming state advantageous to the player, with at least one condition being that the game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means;
Equipped with
The frequency of entry of game balls into the opportunity ball entry means is not affected by whether or not the predetermined period is being measured;
The measuring means is characterized in that it is configured to measure the predetermined period even in the special game state .

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view showing the main structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front view showing the structure of a game board. (a) It is a cross-sectional view of the special winning prize device and its surroundings when it is in a non-accepting state, and (b) It is a cross-sectional view of the special winning prize device and its surroundings when it is in an accepting state. (a), (b) It is explanatory drawing for explaining the display content on the display surface of a pattern display device. (a) to (j) are explanatory diagrams for explaining display contents on the display surface of the symbol display device. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters and various areas. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a low probability validity table for the first special symbol, (b) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a high probability validity table for the first special symbol, and (c) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a high probability validity table for the first special symbol. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the low probability probability table for the 2nd special symbol, (d) it is an explanatory diagram for explaining the high probability probability table for the 2nd special symbol, and (e) it is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot type table. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the main MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric control process performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the reservation information acquisition process performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows special figure fluctuation start processing performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows general electric power control processing performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the regular figure fluctuation start process performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the identification process of the common figure fluctuation period performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the normal pattern determination process performed by main side MPU. (a) to (e) are time charts showing the relationship between the display continuation period of the common figure display section and the acceptance state of the special prize winning device. It is a flowchart which shows the identification process of the regular pattern fluctuation period performed by the main side MPU in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view showing the composition of the game board in a 3rd embodiment. It is a front view showing the composition of the game board in a 4th embodiment. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters and various areas. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st general-purpose electric power control process performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd general electric power control process performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd general-purpose electric power control process performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 4th general-purpose electric power control process performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 4th normal figure fluctuation start process performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the identification process of the 4th regular figure fluctuation period performed by main side MPU. (a) to (f) are time charts showing the relationship between the display continuation period of the fourth general figure display section and the acceptance state of the special prize winning device. It is a top view which shows the structure of the disk member in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the identification process of the 4th common figure fluctuation period performed by the main side MPU in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd general electric power control process performed by main side MPU in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the identification process of the 3rd common figure fluctuation period performed by the main side MPU in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the identification process of the 4th common figure fluctuation period performed by the main side MPU in 9th Embodiment. It is a front view showing the composition of the game board in a 10th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st general-purpose electric power control process performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd general electric power control process performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd general-purpose electric power control process performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 4th general-purpose electric power control process performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the identification process of the 4th regular figure fluctuation period performed by main side MPU. (a) to (h) are time charts showing the relationship between the display duration period of the fourth general figure display section and the acceptance state of the special prize winning device. It is a front view showing the composition of the game board in an 11th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st general-purpose electric power control process performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd general electric power control process performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd general-purpose electric power control process performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 4th general-purpose electric power control process performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 4th normal figure fluctuation start process performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the identification process of the 4th regular figure fluctuation period performed by main side MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing adjustment processing executed by the main MPU. (a) to (j) are time charts showing jackpot conditions. It is a front view showing the composition of the game board in a 12th embodiment. (a) to (i) are time charts showing the flow of the game. It is a flowchart which shows general electric power control processing performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the regular figure fluctuation start process performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the normal pattern determination process performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the normal power disconnection process performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process during normal power outage performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the general telegraph notification process performed by the sound-light side MPU. (a), (b) It is explanatory drawing for explaining the content of the general telegram in a pattern display device. (a) to (i) are time charts for explaining the effects caused by the execution of general telegram notification on the symbol display device.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine"), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in FIG. 2, the structure within the gaming area PA of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main body 12 that is attached to the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable forward. have The outer frame 11 is constructed by connecting wooden boards on four sides, and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to island equipment. It should be noted that the outer frame 11 is not an essential component of the pachinko machine 10, and the outer frame 11 may be provided in an island facility of a game hall.

As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13. ing. An inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. Specifically, when viewed from the front, the inner frame 13 is rotatable forward with the left side being the rotation base end side and the right side being the rotation tip side.

A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation tip end when viewed from the front. Further, a back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable rearward with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation tip end when viewed from the front.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at its rotating tip, and the locking device has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 against the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. It also has a function of locking the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using an unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 provided in an exposed manner on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be explained.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the center of the resin base 21 . A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area PA formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21. Note that the game board 24 is not limited to being made of wood, and may be made of synthetic resin such as an acrylic board or a polycarbonate board.

The configuration of the game board 24 will be explained based on FIG. 3. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 24.

An inner rail part 25 and an outer rail part 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and the inner rail part 25 and the outer rail part 26 provide a guide means. The guide rail is configured as follows. A game ball fired from a game ball firing mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by a guide rail.

Incidentally, the game ball firing mechanism 27 includes a firing rail 27a that extends toward the guide rail, a ball feeding device 27b that supplies game balls stored in an upper tray 65a (described later) onto the firing rail 27a, and a ball feeding device 27b that supplies game balls stored in an upper tray 65a (described later) onto the firing rail 27a. The solenoid 27c is an electric actuator that fires the game balls supplied to the guide rail toward the guide rail. When the firing operation device (or operation handle) 28 provided on the front door frame 14 is rotated, the solenoid 27c is driven and controlled, and the game ball is fired.

The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings passing through it in the front and back direction. Each opening includes a general winning section 31, a first operating section 32, a second operating section 33, a through winning section 34, a special winning device 35, a special electric winning device 36, a variable display unit 37, a special drawing unit 38, and a general drawing unit. 39 etc. are provided respectively. A total of three general winning sections 31 are provided, and one section is provided for each of the other sections.

Even if a ball enters the through winning section 34, the payout of the game ball is not executed. On the other hand, if a ball enters any of the general winning section 31, first operating section 32, second operating section 33, special winning device 35, and special electric winning device 36, the number of gaming media available to the player will be reduced. A predetermined number of game balls are paid out in order to increase the number of game balls. Specifically, regarding the number of prize balls, when a ball enters the general prize winning section 31, ten game balls are paid out, and when a ball enters the first operating section 32, ten game balls are paid out. When three game balls are paid out and a ball enters the second operating section 33, one game ball is paid out, and when a ball enters the special winning device 35. In this case, the payout of 11 game balls is executed, and when a ball enters the special electric winning device 36, the payout of 15 game balls is executed.

Note that the number of prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the first operating section 32 and the second operating section 33 may have the same number of prize balls. Further, the number of prize balls of the special winning device 35 may be less than 11, or may be more than 11. Further, the number of prize balls of the special winning device 35 is not limited to a structure that is smaller than the number of prize balls of the special wire winning device 36, and the number of prize balls of the special winning device 35 and the number of prize balls of the special wire winning device 36 are different. The structure may be the same, or the number of prize balls of the special winning device 35 may be greater than the number of prize balls of the special electric winning device 36.

In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports are discharged from the gaming area PA through the out port 24a. Further, the game board 24 is provided with a large number of nails 24b for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the game balls, and is also provided with various members such as a windmill.

Here, entering the ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the manner in which the game ball is ejected from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also the manner in which the game ball is discharged from the game area PA after passing through the opening. It also includes a mode in which the fluid continues to flow down the gaming area PA without being discharged. However, in the following explanation, in order to clearly distinguish it from the game ball entering the out port 24a, the general winning part 31, the first operating part 32, the second operating part 33, the through winning part 34, and the special winning device will be used. 35 and special electric winning device 36 are also expressed as winning.

A variable display unit 37 is provided so as to include the central portion of the game area PA. Due to the peripheral portion of the variable display unit 37 protruding forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 24, an area is defined in which game balls fired into the game area PA can flow down. Specifically, in the gaming area PA, there is an upper area PA1 that is an area above a predetermined height position of the variable display unit 37, and an area that is continuous below the upper area PA1 and is higher than the variable display unit 37. A left area PA2 which is an area on the left, a right area PA3 which is continuous below the upper area PA1 and is an area to the right of the variable display unit 37, and each of the left area PA2 and the right area PA3. On the other hand, it is divided into a lower area PA4 that is continuous below the variable display unit 37 and is below the variable display unit 37.

When the player operates the firing operation device 28 with a rotation amount in the first range that is less than the reference rotation amount as the first firing operation, the game ball is positioned to the left of the horizontal center position in the upper area PA1. It starts flowing down. In this case, the game ball will flow down in the order of upper area PA1 → left area PA2 → lower area PA4. On the other hand, when the player operates the firing operation device 28 as a second firing operation with a rotation amount in the second range that is equal to or greater than the reference rotation amount, the player can move the firing operation device 28 to the right of the horizontal center position in the upper area PA1. The game ball begins to flow down. In this case, the game ball will flow down in the order of upper area PA1 → right area PA3 → lower area PA4. In other words, by adjusting the rotational operation amount of the firing operation device 28, the player can play the game so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2 of the left area PA2 and the right area PA3, and A game can be played as the game ball flows down PA3. Incidentally, when the firing operation device 28 is operated with the maximum amount of rotation, the game balls will flow down in the order of upper area PA1 → right area PA3 → lower area PA4.

The first actuating section 32 is installed in the lower area PA4. The first operating section 32 is opened upward, and no member such as an opening/closing member for preventing the game balls from entering the first operating section 32 is provided. In a situation where game balls are being shot in the same manner, the probability of winning a prize in the first operating section 32 is constant regardless of the game state. In other words, the first operating section 32 can always receive game balls flowing down the gaming area PA toward the first operating section 32.

The first operating section 32 is arranged directly below a stage 37a formed in the variable display unit 37. In addition, a pair of right and left introduction ports 37b are provided on the upper part of the variable display unit 37, and the variable display unit 37 is provided with a pair of introduction ports 37b for guiding the game balls that have entered the introduction ports 37b onto the stage 37a. A guide passage (not shown) is formed. The game balls that flowed onto the stage 37a through the guide path and are discharged from the lateral center of the stage 37a to the outside of the variable display unit 37 are more likely to win a prize in the first operating section 32. . The first operating section 32 is provided with a detection sensor (not shown), and a game ball that has won a prize in the first operating section 32 is detected by the detection sensor. The detection sensor is electrically connected to a main control device 70, which will be described later, and the main control device 70 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the first operating section 32 based on the received signal.

The position where the first actuating part 32 is provided in the lower area PA4 is a position where a game ball flowing down the left side area PA2 can enter, and a position where a game ball flowing down the right side area PA3 can enter. It is located. As a result, either when the firing operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2, or when the firing operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the right side area PA3. Even if there is, it is possible to win a prize in the first operating section 32. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and by providing a regulating nail or the like in the middle of the downstream area from the right side area PA3 toward the first actuating part 32, the firing operation device 28 can be configured such that the game ball flows down the right side area PA3. A configuration may also be adopted in which winnings to the first actuating section 32 are not possible when is being operated.

The second actuating part 33 is arranged in the right side area PA3. In other words, if the firing operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2, winning is not possible, and the second operating unit 33 operates the firing operation so that the game ball flows down the right side area PA3. Winning is possible when the device 28 is operated. The second operating section 33 is opened upward like the first operating section 32, and is not provided with a member such as an opening/closing member for preventing game balls from entering the second operating section 33. In a situation where game balls are being shot in the same manner, the probability of winning a prize in the second operating section 33 is constant regardless of the game state. In other words, the second operating section 33 can always receive game balls flowing down the gaming area PA toward the second operating section 33. The second operating section 33 is provided with a detection sensor (not shown), and the winning game ball in the second operating section 33 is detected by the detection sensor. The detection sensor is electrically connected to a main control device 70, which will be described later, and the main control device 70 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the second operating section 33 based on the received signal.

In the right side area PA3, nails 24b are arranged on the upstream side of the second actuating part 33 so as to guide the game balls flowing down the area on the upstream side towards the second actuating part 33, and other There is no ball entry area. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the right side area PA3 can easily enter the second operating section 33. Specifically, the probability that a game ball that flows into the right area PA3 enters the second operating section 33 is higher than the probability that a game ball that flows into the lower area PA4 enters the first operating section 32. As such, the second actuating portion 33 and the surrounding nails 24b are provided. However, not all of the game balls that have flowed into the right side area PA3 enter the second actuating section 33, and approximately one out of every predetermined number (for example, five) of the game balls that have flowed into the right side area PA3 enters the second operating section 33. The ball enters the second operating section 33.

The special prize winning device 35 is arranged in the left area PA2. In other words, the special winning device 35 cannot win a prize if the firing operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the right side area PA3, and the firing operation device 35 operates so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2. If 28 is operated, it is possible to win a prize. The special winning device 35 can be switched between a non-accepting state in which game balls cannot be entered and an accepting state in which game balls can be entered.

The configuration of the special prize winning device 35 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 4(a) and 4(b) in addition to FIG. 3. FIG. 4(a) is a cross-sectional view of the special winning device 35 and its surroundings when it is in a non-accepting state, and FIG. 4(b) is a cross-sectional view of the special winning device 35 and its surroundings when it is in an accepting state. It is.

As shown in FIG. 3, the special prize winning device 35 includes a base body 41 in which a discharge passage 42 for discharging game balls that have flowed in from the game area PA to the rear of the game board 24 is formed, and a game ball to the discharge passage 42. An opening/closing member 43 for preventing or allowing the inflow of balls is provided. The base body 41 is provided so as to protrude forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 24, as shown in FIGS. 4(a) and 4(b). The ball receiving surface 44, which forms the upper surface of the area of the base body 41 that protrudes forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 24, extends in the lateral direction, and its lateral dimension is equivalent to two game balls. As mentioned above, in more detail, it is about four game balls.

As shown in FIG. 4(b), on the left side of the ball receiving surface 44, an entrance portion 42a of the discharge passage 42 is formed to open upward. The entrance portion 42a has an opening area larger than one game ball but less than two game balls, and although it is possible for one game ball to enter the entrance portion 42a, It is not possible for a plurality of game balls to enter the entrance portion 42a at the same time.

As shown in FIG. 3, the discharge passage 42 is formed to extend vertically downward from the entrance part 42a, and the passage direction is directed toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10 at a midway position in the longitudinal direction of the base body 41. It has been changed along the way. The game ball entering the entrance part 42a is guided to the back side of the game board 24 by passing through the discharge passage 42, and after being guided to the back side of the game board 24, it is discharged downward. A detection sensor 45 is provided in the middle of the discharge passage 42 . The detection sensor 45 detects a game ball that has entered the discharge passage 42, that is, a game ball that has entered the special winning device 35. The detection sensor 45 is electrically connected to a main control device 70, which will be described later, and the main control device 70 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the special winning device 35 based on the received signal.

As shown in FIGS. 4(a) and 4(b), an opening/closing member 43 is provided to open and close the entrance portion 42a. The opening/closing member 43 is inserted into a through hole 46 formed to pass through the game board 24 in the front-back direction. By moving in the front-back direction along the through hole 46, the opening/closing member 43 faces the entire inlet portion 42a of the discharge passage 42 from above and opens the entrance portion 42a to the inlet portion 42a, as shown in FIG. 4(a). There is a non-accepting position that prevents game balls from entering, and a non-accepting position that prevents game balls from entering, and a position where the pachinko machine 10 is retracted from the blocking position to the rear so as not to face the entire entrance portion 42a, as shown in FIG. 4(b). It is possible to switch between the receiving position and the receiving position that allows the entry of game balls.

An opening/closing drive section 47 is provided on the back side of the game board 24 to move the opening/closing member 43. The opening/closing drive section 47 is electrically connected to a main control device 70, which will be described later. When the opening/closing drive section 47 is in the non-driven state, the opening/closing member 43 is placed in the non-receiving position by the biasing force of a biasing means such as a spring (not shown), and the opening/closing member 43 is placed in the non-receiving position when the opening/closing drive section 47 is in the driven state. is disposed at the receiving position by being displaced against the biasing force of the biasing means. A state in which the opening/closing member 43 is disposed in the non-accepting position is a non-accepting state of the special winning a prize device 35, and a state in which the opening/closing member 43 is disposed in the accepting position is an accepting state of the special winning a prize device 35.

The upper surface of the opening/closing member 43 is sloped downward toward the right as shown in FIG. Further, a region of the ball receiving surface 44 to the right of the opening/closing member 43 disposed at the non-receiving position also slopes downward toward the right. Further, an upright wall 48 is integrally formed at the upper left end of the base body 41 so as to stand upward from the ball receiving surface 44 . The upright wall 48 has a height that is equal to or more than one game ball, and specifically, has a height that is about two game balls. With the above configuration, when the opening/closing member 43 is placed in the non-receiving position as shown in FIG. and is guided to the right of the special winning device 35 by flowing down by its own weight along the upper surface of the opening/closing member 43 and the slope of the ball receiving surface 44. As shown in FIG. 3, the special prize winning device 35 is provided to the left from the left end of the variable display unit 37 at a distance of one game ball or more, so that the special prize winning device 35 is placed along the upper surface of the opening/closing member 43 and the slope of the ball receiving surface 44. The game balls guided to the right of the special winning device 35 flow downward through the space between the special winning device 35 and the variable display unit 37. As a result, the game ball that has reached the special winning device 35 but has not won a prize in the special winning device 35 continues to flow down the left area PA2 and the lower area PA4. Then, the game ball that continues to flow down can enter the first operating section 32.

A through winning section 34 is provided above the special winning device 35 in the left area PA2. In other words, the through winning section 34 cannot win if the firing operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, and the firing operation device 28 operates so that the game ball flows down the right area PA3. If 28 is operated, it is possible to win a prize. The through-winning portion 34 has a through-hole extending in the vertical direction, and when a game ball passes through this through-hole, a winning in the through-winning portion 34 occurs. Therefore, the game ball that has won in the through winning section 34 continues to flow down the gaming area PA. The through-winning section 34 is provided with a detection sensor (not shown), and the detection sensor detects the game ball that has won the through-winning section 34. The detection sensor is electrically connected to a main control device 70, which will be described later, and the main control device 70 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the through winning section 34 based on the received signal.

At a position vertically below the through winning section 34, there are an entrance part 42a of the discharge passage 42 in the special winning device 35 and an opening/closing member 43 arranged at the non-accepting position. In this case, the through winning part 34 is provided at a position spaced upward from the entrance part 42a of the discharge passage 42 and the opening/closing member 43 arranged at the non-accepting position, but in the area between them. A first guide region 49a is formed to reliably guide the game balls that have won in the through-winning portion 34 to the entrance portion 42a of the discharge passage 42 or the opening/closing member 43 disposed at the non-accepting position. The first guide region 49a can be formed in any manner, but in the present pachinko machine 10, the first guide region 49a is formed by arranging a plurality of nails 24b and the upright wall 48 of the special winning device 35. By forming the first guide region 49a, if the opening/closing member 43 is placed in the non-accepting position, the game ball that has won in the through winning section 34 will be reliably placed in the non-accepting position. If the game ball reaches the member 43 and the opening/closing member 43 is placed at the receiving position, the game ball that has won the through prize part 34 will surely enter the discharge passage 42.

In the left area PA2, a second guide area 49b is formed on the upstream side of the through winning part 34 to reliably guide the game balls flowing into the left area PA2 from the upper area PA1 to the through winning part 34. The second guide region 49b can be formed by any method, but in the present pachinko machine 10, the second guide region 49b is formed by arranging a plurality of nails 24b. Since the second guide area 49b is formed, the game balls flowing into the left side area PA2 reliably win in the through winning section 34. As described above, since the first guide area 49a is formed between the through-winning section 34 and the special winning device 35, the game ball that has won in the through-winning section 34 is reliably placed in the non-accepting position. It reaches the top of the opening/closing member 43 or the entrance portion 42a of the discharge passage 42.

Based on winning in the through winning section 34, the opening/closing member 43 of the special winning device 35 moves from the non-accepting position to the accepting position. Specifically, an internal lottery is held triggered by a winning in the through-winning section 34, and a general drawing unit 39 that is provided in the lower right corner of the gaming area PA, which is an area through which a game ball does not pass, displays a general drawing. In the section 39a, display continuation times including variable display of the picture are performed. Then, the result of the internal lottery is the winning of the acceptance execution state, a stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and after the continuous display on the ordinary figure display section 39a ends, the state shifts to the acceptance execution state. In the receiving execution state, the opening/closing member 43 is arranged at the receiving position in a predetermined manner. Only one type of acceptance execution state is prepared, and the number of times the opening/closing member 43 is placed in the acceptance position and the conditions for returning from the acceptance position to the non-acceptance position when the acceptance execution state is entered regardless of the gaming state. is constant. Specifically, when the acceptance execution state is entered, the opening/closing member 43 is placed in the acceptance position only once, and the upper limit number of game balls (specifically 10) on the general power side is placed in the special winning device 35. The position of the opening/closing member 43 is switched from the receiving position to the non-receiving position when one of the following conditions is satisfied: the ball enters the ball and the normal voltage side open duration period (specifically, 0.1 seconds) elapses. .

The ordinary figure display section 39a is constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner. In this case, although it is not possible to perform a complex display like the symbol display device 51 described later in the general figure display section 39a, it is possible to reduce the processing load for controlling the display of the general figure display section 39a. Become. However, the display device is not limited to this, and may be configured by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix display. In addition, the patterns displayed on the general drawing display section 39a include a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, or a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, or multiple types of colors. Possible configurations include a configuration where .

In the general drawing unit 39, a general drawing holding display section 39b is provided at a position adjacent to the general drawing display section 39a. Information corresponding to the number of game balls won in the through winning section 34 is held as normal game side holding information up to a maximum of 4, and the number of held balls is displayed by lighting the normal game ball holding display section 39b. . The display range of the ordinary symbol display section 39a is narrower than the display surface of a symbol display device 51, which will be described later. Furthermore, the display ranges of both the common symbol display section 39a and the common symbol pending display section 39b are also narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 51. Thereby, it becomes possible to increase the player's attention to the symbol display device 51 rather than the ordinary symbol display section 39a and the ordinary symbol pending display section 39b.

A plurality of types of display continuation periods are set for one display continuation time in the ordinary figure display section 39a. Specifically, three types are set: a first display duration period, a second display duration period, and a third display duration period. When the first display duration period is selected, this indicates whether or not the acceptance execution state will occur after the symbol is displayed for 0.05 seconds on the ordinary figure display section 39a and the display duration ends. The stop result will be displayed for 0.4 seconds. If the display is continued for a number of times corresponding to the occurrence of the acceptance execution state, the acceptance execution state is entered after the confirmation display ends, and the opening/closing member 43 is placed at the acceptance position. In this case, in the receiving execution state, the opening/closing member 43 is placed in the receiving position only once, and after 0.1 seconds have elapsed, the opening/closing member 43 is placed in the non-accepting position. Then, if a predetermined game ball wins in the through winning section 34 and the first display duration period is selected in a situation where the general figure side reservation information is not stored in a pending memory, the time when the winning in the through winning section 34 occurs. The opening/closing member 43 is placed in the accepting position when 0.45 seconds have elapsed since then, and the opening/closing member 43 is placed in the non-accepting position when 0.55 seconds have passed since the winning in the through winning section 34 occurred. Placed. On the other hand, the distance between the through-winning part 34 and the special winning device 35 is determined by the opening/closing member 43 or the discharge passage 42 in which the game ball won in the through-winning part 34 is placed in a non-accepting position in the special winning device 35. The minimum period required to reach the entrance portion 42a is 0.65 seconds, and the maximum period is 0.7 seconds. Therefore, when a predetermined game ball is won in the through winning section 34 and the first display duration period is selected in a situation where the general game side reservation information is not stored on hold, the special winning device 35 is assumed to be in the open execution state. Also, before the predetermined game ball reaches the position where it can enter the special winning device 35 (that is, the position where the opening/closing member 43 is opened/closed), the opening/closing member 43 is placed in the receiving position, and the opening/closing member 43 is Since the ball returns to the non-accepting position, the predetermined game ball will not enter the special winning device 35.

Here, the firing cycle of the game balls when the firing of the game balls is continued is 0.6 seconds. Therefore, when the game ball continues to be launched so as to flow down the left side area PA2, the game ball basically reaches the position of the through winning part 34 at a period of 0.6 seconds, and similarly the special winning device 35, the game ball reaches a position where it can enter the ball at a cycle of 0.6 seconds. Then, the game ball that was fired one before the predetermined game ball will enter the special winning device 35 between 0.05 seconds and 0.1 seconds after the predetermined game ball enters the through prize section 34. We will reach a position where it is possible. On the other hand, the opening/closing member 43 is placed at the receiving position at the timing when 0.45 seconds have passed since a predetermined game ball has won a prize in the through winning section 34. Therefore, even if the opening/closing member 43 is placed in the receiving position when a predetermined game ball enters the through winning section 34, the game ball that was fired one before the predetermined game ball will be placed in the predetermined position. No prizes will be won in the special prize winning device 35 in the acceptance execution state triggered by game balls. From the above, if the first display duration period is selected as the display duration period for one picture on the common figure display section 39a, a prize will basically not be awarded to the special prize winning device 35 even if the acceptance execution state is entered. do not.

The pending information on the common picture side cannot be used to start a new display continuation time on the common picture display section 39a, or when the special winning device 35 is in the acceptance execution state. In this case, when a game ball wins in the through winning section 34, it is stored on hold. In this case, when the first display continuation period is selected, if the acceptance execution state does not occur, the next display continuation time can be started after the display continuation time in the general figure display section 39a has started. Even if the acceptance execution state occurs, the period from the start of the display continuation time on the regular figure display section 39a until the acceptance execution state ends is 0.55 seconds. On the other hand, as mentioned above, the firing cycle of the game ball is 0.6 seconds, and basically the game ball reaches the position of the through winning part 34 at a cycle of 0.6 seconds. Therefore, regardless of whether the acceptance execution state does not occur or the acceptance execution state occurs, in the situation where the first display duration period is selected, the display continuation time on the general figure display section 39a is newly started. Since a winning of a game ball to the through winning section 34 does not occur in a situation where it is impossible to do so, the normal figure side reservation information is not acquired.

When the second display duration period is selected, a stop result indicating whether or not an acceptance execution state occurs after the display continuation period ends after the symbol is displayed in variable display on the ordinary figure display section 39a for 10 seconds. will be displayed for 0.4 seconds. If the display is continued for a number of times corresponding to the occurrence of the acceptance execution state, the acceptance execution state is entered after the confirmation display ends, and the opening/closing member 43 is placed at the acceptance position. The execution mode of this acceptance execution state is the same as when the first display duration period is selected. In this case, if a predetermined game ball wins in the through winning section 34 in a situation where the general figure side reservation information is not stored in a suspended state, at the timing when 10.4 seconds have elapsed from the time when the winning in the through winning section 34 occurred. The opening/closing member 43 is placed in the accepting position, and the opening/closing member 43 is placed in the non-accepting position at a timing when 10.5 seconds have elapsed from the time when a winning in the through winning section 34 occurs. On the other hand, as already explained, the period required for the winning game ball in the through-winning section 34 to reach the opening/closing member 43 or the entrance section 42a of the discharge passage 42 located in the non-accepting position in the special winning device 35. is 0.65 seconds to 0.7 seconds. Therefore, when a predetermined game ball wins in the through-winning section 34 and the second display duration period is selected in a situation where the normal game side reservation information is not stored on hold, the special winning device 35 is assumed to be in the open execution state. Also, since the opening/closing member 43 is placed at the receiving position after the predetermined game ball passes the position where the ball can enter the special winning device 35 (that is, the position where the opening/closing member 43 is opened/closed), the predetermined game The ball never enters the special winning device 35. On the other hand, the timing at which the game ball launched after the predetermined game ball reaches the position where it can enter the special winning device 35 is included in the period during which the opening/closing member 43 is placed at the receiving position. If so, the game ball will enter the special winning device 35.

In addition, the firing cycle of the game ball is 0.6 seconds as already explained, and when the game ball continues to be fired so as to flow down the left area PA2, it basically reaches the position of the through winning part 34. The game ball arrives at a period of 0.6 seconds. In this case, when the second display continuation period is selected, if the acceptance execution state does not occur, the next display continuation time can be started after the display continuation time in the general figure display section 39a has started. Even if the acceptance execution state occurs, the period from the start of the display continuation on the ordinary figure display section 39a to the end of the acceptance execution state will be 10.5 seconds. Therefore, regardless of whether the acceptance execution state does not occur or the acceptance execution state occurs, in a situation where the second display duration period is selected, the display continuation time on the general figure display section 39a is newly started. A winning of a game ball to the through winning section 34 will occur in a situation where it is impossible to do so, and the normal figure side reservation information will be acquired. In addition, if the game ball continues to be launched so as to flow down the left area PA2 in a situation where the second display duration period is selected, if the game ball continues to be launched so as to flow down the left area PA2, more than the standard number (specifically, 2 balls) will be held on the general game side. The information is held and stored, and more specifically, the upper limit number (specifically, 4 pieces) of general map side hold information is held and stored.

When the third display duration period is selected, this indicates whether or not the acceptance execution state will occur after the display duration period ends after the pattern is displayed fluctuating for 0.6 seconds on the ordinary figure display section 39a. The stop result will be displayed for 0.4 seconds. If the display is continued for a number of times corresponding to the occurrence of the acceptance execution state, the acceptance execution state is entered after the confirmation display ends, and the opening/closing member 43 is placed at the acceptance position. The execution mode of this acceptance execution state is the same as when the first display continuation period is selected and when the second display continuation period is selected. Then, when the third display duration period is selected, the opening/closing member 43 is placed in the receiving position at the timing when one second has elapsed after the start of the display duration on the general figure display section 39a, and the display duration is started. The opening/closing member 43 is placed in the non-receiving position at a timing when 1.1 seconds have elapsed from the time when the opening/closing member 43 was opened. On the other hand, as already explained, the period required for the winning game ball in the through-winning section 34 to reach the opening/closing member 43 or the entrance section 42a of the discharge passage 42 located in the non-accepting position in the special winning device 35. is 0.65 seconds to 0.7 seconds. Therefore, when a predetermined game ball enters the through winning section 34 and the third display duration period is selected, even if the special winning device 35 enters the open execution state, the predetermined gaming ball enters the special winning device 35. Since the opening/closing member 43 is placed at the receiving position after passing the position where the ball can enter (that is, the position where the opening/closing member 43 is opened/closed), the predetermined game ball will not enter the special winning device 35. . On the other hand, the timing at which the game ball launched after the predetermined game ball reaches the position where it can enter the special winning device 35 is included in the period during which the opening/closing member 43 is placed at the receiving position. If so, the game ball will enter the special winning device 35.

In addition, the firing cycle of the game ball is 0.6 seconds as already explained, and when the game ball continues to be fired so as to flow down the left area PA2, it basically reaches the position of the through winning part 34. The game ball arrives at a period of 0.6 seconds. In this case, when the third display continuation period is selected, if the acceptance execution state does not occur, the next display continuation time can be started after the display continuation time in the general figure display section 39a has started. Even if the acceptance execution state occurs, the period from the start of the display continuation on the regular figure display section 39a until the acceptance execution state ends is 1.1 seconds. Therefore, regardless of whether the acceptance execution state does not occur or the acceptance execution state occurs, in a situation where the third display duration period is selected, the display continuation time on the general map display section 39a is started anew. A winning of a game ball to the through winning section 34 will occur in a situation where it is impossible to do so, and the normal figure side reservation information will be acquired. In this case, the number of pieces of general map side reservation information acquired is basically one piece.

The third display continuation period is selected when the display continuation period of the display continuation time is determined in a situation where the standard number (specifically, two) or more pieces of general figure side pending information are stored. Therefore, a situation in which the third display duration period is selected occurs after the display continuation times according to the second display duration period have occurred. In addition, when the third display duration period is selected as described above, if the acceptance execution state does not occur, the next display duration time can be started after the display duration time in the general figure display section 39a has started. The period from the start of the display continuation on the regular figure display section 39a to the end of the acceptance execution state is 1.1 seconds even if the acceptance execution state occurs. In this case, the probability of winning the acceptance execution state in the internal lottery corresponding to the occurrence of the continuous display is set to a high probability, specifically 98%. Therefore, when a continuous display occurs, an acceptance execution state generally occurs. In addition, in a situation where the game ball continues to be launched so as to flow down the left side area PA2, basically one game ball is placed in the position where the ball can enter the special winning device 35 every 0.6 seconds, which is the game ball launch cycle. The game ball will arrive at a rate of , but depending on the manner in which the game ball flows down, an error of about 0.1 seconds may occur. Therefore, if the display continuation times in which the third display continuation period is selected are repeatedly selected, a prize will be won in the special prize winning device 35 with a probability of about 1/11. On the other hand, the number of game balls paid out when a winning occurs in the special winning device 35 is 11. Therefore, if the game ball continues to be launched so as to flow down the left area PA2 in a situation where the display continuation times that lead to the selection of the third display continuation period are repeatedly selected, the player's ball will be The number of balls held by the player is increased or decreased repeatedly by about 11 balls, and it is possible to prevent the number of balls held by the player from increasing or decreasing during the period in which the display continuation times in which the third display continuation period is selected are repeatedly selected.

When the first display duration period is selected, as described above, if the acceptance execution state does not occur, from the start of the display continuation time in the general figure display section 39a until the start of the next display continuation time is possible. The period is 0.45 seconds, and even if the acceptance execution state occurs, the period from the start of the display continuation time on the ordinary figure display section 39a until the acceptance execution state ends is 0.55 seconds. Therefore, regardless of whether the acceptance execution state does not occur or the acceptance execution state occurs, in the situation where the first display duration period is selected, the display continuation time in the general figure display section 39a is newly started. Since the winning of a game ball to the through winning section 34 basically does not occur in a situation where it is impossible to do so, the normal figure side reservation information is basically not acquired. However, depending on the manner in which the game ball flows down, an error of about 0.1 seconds may occur in the arrival period of the game ball to the through winning section 34. In this case, even if the first display duration period is selected, it is possible that the general figure side pending information is held and stored. However, in this case, the maximum number of pieces of general-purpose figure side pending information that can be held and stored is one, and two or more pieces of general-purpose figure side pending information are never stored on hold. On the other hand, as described above, the standard number of general map side reservation information, which is the standard for selecting the third display duration period, is not set to one, but is set to two, which is a predetermined plurality of pieces. This prevents a sudden transition from a situation where the first display duration is selected to a situation where the third display duration is selected, and causes a transition to a situation where the third display duration is selected. In order to achieve this, it is possible to configure a configuration in which it is necessary to generate a situation in which the second display duration period is selected.

A winning lottery is performed based on the occurrence of a winning in the first operating section 32, the second operating section 33, or the special winning device 35. When a winning lottery is held, a changing display of the symbols is performed in the special drawing unit 38, and finally a result corresponding to the result of the winning lottery is displayed.

Regarding the special figure unit 38, in detail, the special figure unit 38 is provided with a first special figure display section 38a and a second special figure display section 38b. In the first special figure display section 38a, a winning lottery is performed based on the occurrence of a winning in the first actuating section 32 or the special winning device 35, so that a changing display of symbols is performed, and finally the lottery results are displayed. The corresponding results will be displayed. In addition, in the second special figure display section 38b, a winning lottery is performed based on the occurrence of winning in the second operating section 33, and a variable display of symbols is performed, and the final result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. is displayed. The period from when the fluctuating display of a symbol is started on either the first special symbol display section 38a or the second special symbol display section 38b until the fluctuating display of the symbol is ended after displaying a predetermined result is one game round. equivalent to times.

The first special figure display section 38a and the second special figure display section 38b are constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner. In this case, it is impossible to perform a complicated display like the symbol display device 51 described later in the first special figure display part 38a and the second special figure display part 38b, but the first special figure display part 38a and the second special figure display part 38b It becomes possible to reduce the processing load for controlling the display of the special figure display section 38b. However, the display device is not limited to this, and may be configured by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix display. In addition, the designs displayed on the first special figure display section 38a and the second special figure display section 38b include a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are displayed, and a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed. Possible configurations include a configuration in which , or a configuration in which multiple types of colors are displayed.

In the special figure unit 38, a first special figure reservation display section 38c is provided at a position adjacent to the first special figure display section 38a. The number of winning game balls in the first operating section 32 or the special winning device 35 is reserved up to a maximum of four, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting the first special symbol reservation display section 38c. On the other hand, a special figure pending display section corresponding to the second special figure display section 38b is not provided. The number of game balls won in the second actuating section 33 is not stored pending storage unlike the first actuating section 32. In other words, if a winning occurs in the second operating section 33 in a situation where it is possible to start a game round, the game round on the second special figure display section 38b is executed, but it is not possible to start the game round. Even if a winning occurs in the second actuating section 33 in a situation where this is not possible, the reservation information that triggers the start of the game round will not be stored. However, even if a winning occurs in the second actuating section 33 in a situation where it is not possible to start a game round, the payout of game balls will be executed accordingly.

The display ranges of the first special figure display section 38a and the second special figure display section 38b are narrower than the display surface of a symbol display device 51, which will be described later. Further, the entire display range of the first special symbol display section 38a, the second special symbol display section 38b, and the first special symbol reservation display section 38c is also narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 51. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the symbol display device 51 rather than the first special symbol display section 38a, the second special symbol display section 38b, and the first special symbol reservation display section 38c.

When a variable display of symbols is performed on the first special symbol display section 38a or the second special symbol display section 38b, that is, when a game round is executed, the symbol display device 51 provided in the variable display unit 37 displays the symbols accordingly. A display effect is performed. In addition, the symbol display device 51 not only provides a display effect triggered by a winning to the first operating section 32, second operating section 33, or special winning device 35, but also an opening/closing execution mode that shifts after a jackpot result. There will also be displays inside. The symbol display device 51 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device to be described later. Note that the pattern display device 51 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display surface such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, and may also be a dot matrix display device. You can.

The contents of the display effect performed on the symbol display device 51 during execution of a game round will be explained with reference to FIG. 5. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the symbol display device 51 when a game round is executed.

As shown in FIG. 5A, on the display surface of the symbol display device 51, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are set as a plurality of display areas: an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is composed of main symbols and sub-symbols arranged in a predetermined order. That is, when a game round is executed, the entire display surface of the symbol display device 51 is used to display symbols in a variable manner.

FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the main symbols and sub-symbols that are variably displayed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3. As shown in Figures 6(a) to (j), the pattern, which is a type of pattern, consists of nine types of main patterns, each numbered ``1'' to ``9,'' and a shell-shaped pattern. It is composed of sub-designs. More specifically, nine types of character symbols such as octopuses are numbered from "1" to "9" to form the main symbol.

As shown in FIG. 5(b), in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols from "1" to "9" are arranged in descending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is placed between each main symbol. They are arranged one by one. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols from "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In other words, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and between the main symbol "9" and the main symbol "1". A main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged on the top, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and it is composed of 20 symbols. Then, on the display surface, the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a cyclically scrolling manner in a predetermined direction. The symbol display device 51 is configured to stop display three symbols for each symbol row Z1 to Z3, and as a result, a total of nine symbols (3×3) are stopped and displayed. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5(a), the symbol display device 51 is set with five effective lines, namely, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a lower right line L4, and an upper right line L5. There is.

When a variable display of symbols is performed on the symbol display device 51 based on winnings to the first operating section 32, the second operating section 33, or the special winning device 35, the symbols in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 are displayed periodically. The variable display starts scrolling in a predetermined direction. Then, basically, the display is switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of upper symbol row Z1 → lower symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2, and finally a state in which a predetermined symbol is displayed statically in each symbol row Z1 to Z3. It ends with. In addition, when the fluctuating display of symbols ends, if the result of the internal lottery is a high probability jackpot result described later, a combination of the same odd numbered symbols will be formed on any active line, and the result of the internal lottery will be If the result is a low-probability jackpot as described below, a combination of the same even symbols will be formed on any active line, and if the result of the internal lottery is a small hit as described later, it will be on any active line. A predetermined combination of symbols (for example, "3, 4, 1") that is not a combination of the same symbols and a combination of reach symbols is formed on the top.

In the configuration in which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 as described above, an expected performance is set as the display performance of the symbol display device 51 when a game round is executed. The expected performance is a display state that is made to make the player think that the fluctuating display state is likely to result in a jackpot, at a stage after the fluctuating display of symbols on the symbol display device 51 starts and before the stop result is derived and displayed. say. Two types of expected effects are set: a ready-to-reach display and a preview display for making players expect the occurrence of a ready-to-reach display or a jackpot result at a stage before the ready-to-reach display occurs.

In the reach display, the combination of reach symbols is displayed by stopping and displaying the same type of symbols for upper symbol row Z1 and lower symbol row Z3 among multiple symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and in that state, the remaining medium symbols A display state in which symbols are displayed in a variable manner is included in column Z2. In addition, while the combination of ready-to-reach symbols is displayed as described above, the remaining symbol rows are displayed with fluctuating symbols, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to create a ready-to-reach effect. , those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface after reducing or not displaying a combination of ready-to-reach symbols are included. If the game round results in a jackpot, the same type of symbol as the symbol forming the combination of reach symbols will be stopped and displayed on the reach line in the middle symbol row Z2, and if the game round does not result in a jackpot, the reach symbol will be displayed. A symbol of a different type from the symbols forming the combination is stopped and displayed on the reach line in the middle symbol row Z2.

The preview display may be performed in a situation where the symbols are being displayed in a variable manner in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 after the fluctuating display of symbols has started in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, or in some symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Z3 includes a mode in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a situation where symbols are variably displayed in a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3. It also includes a case in which the background screen is set in a predetermined form different from the previous form, and a case in which the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set in a predetermined form different from the previous form. Such a notice display can occur in any game round when a reach display is displayed or when a reach display is not performed, but it is higher when a reach display is performed than when a reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

When a jackpot result or a small win result is selected in the internal lottery executed based on winnings in the first actuator 32, the second actuator 33, or the special prize winning device 35, the game corresponding to the jackpot result or the small win result. After the cycle is completed, the mode shifts to opening/closing execution mode. In the opening/closing execution mode, it is possible to win a prize using the special electric prize winning device 36. As shown in FIG. 3, the special electric prize winning device 36 is provided at a position below the second operating section 33 in the right side area PA3. In other words, the special electric winning device 36 cannot win if the firing operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2, and the firing operation device 36 operates so that the game ball flows down the right side area PA3. If 28 is operated, it is possible to win a prize.

As shown in FIG. 3, the special electric winning device 36 is equipped with a grand prize opening 36a formed in a size that allows a game ball to pass through, and is in a closed state in which a game ball cannot pass through the special prize opening 36a. The special electric side opening/closing member 36b is provided to switch between the open state and the open state through which game balls can pass. The special electric side opening/closing member 36b is brought into an open state by being driven by the special electric drive section 36c through a link mechanism (not shown). The special electric winning device 36 is provided with a game ball passage such that the grand prize opening 36a serves as an entrance portion, and the gaming balls that flow into the gaming ball passage through the grand prize opening 36a are detected by a detection sensor (not shown). The detection sensor is electrically connected to a main control device 70, which will be described later, and the main control device 70 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the special electric winning device 36 based on the received signal.

The opening/closing execution mode includes a first opening/closing execution mode that occurs in response to a jackpot result, and a second opening/closing execution mode that occurs in response to a small winning result. The first opening/closing execution mode and the second opening/closing execution mode are different in the frequency of occurrence of winnings in the special electric winning device 36 from the time the opening/closing execution mode is started until the opening/closing execution mode is ended. Specifically, in the first opening/closing execution mode, a round game is executed a predetermined number of times (specifically, 16 times). A round game continues until either one of the following conditions is met: the number of times the special electric winning device 36 is opened and closed reaches the upper limit, and the predetermined upper limit number of game balls enters the prize in the special electric winning device 36. It's about games. In this pachinko machine 10, the special electric winning device 36 is opened and closed once in one round game, and the opening duration period in each round game is set to 29 seconds. Further, the upper limit number of prizes that can be won in the special electric prize winning device 36 in each round game is set to ten. In a situation where the firing operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball firing mechanism 27 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the gaming area PA every 0.6 seconds, so that the round game cannot be played. The opening duration period is set to be longer than the product of the game ball firing cycle and the upper limit number of balls for one round game. Therefore, it can be expected that more than the upper limit number of game balls will be won in the special electric winning device 36 in each round game.

On the other hand, in the second opening/closing execution mode, the round game is not set, the number of times the special electric winning device 36 is opened and closed is the upper limit, and the predetermined upper limit number of game balls enters the prize in the special electric winning device 36. The contract will be terminated based on the fulfillment of one of the following conditions: The number of opening and closing times of the special electric winning device 36 in the second opening/closing execution mode is set to three times with a predetermined interval period (for example, 1 second) in between, and the opening duration period in each opening period is set to 1 second. Further, the upper limit number in the second opening/closing execution mode is set to ten. In a situation where the firing operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball firing mechanism 27 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the gaming area PA every 0.6 seconds. The total open duration period of the special electric prize winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is set to a period shorter than the product of the game ball firing cycle and the upper limit number of the second opening/closing execution mode. Therefore, it cannot be expected that the upper limit number of game balls will be won in the special electric winning device 36 in the second opening/closing execution mode. However, in each opening of the special electric winning device 36 in the second opening/closing execution mode, you can expect to win one or two game balls, and if a prize to the special electric winning device 36 occurs, 15 game balls will be won. Since the payout is executed, the second opening/closing execution mode occurs, allowing the player to increase the number of balls he has.

A front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 in which the game board 24 configured as described above is attached to the resin base 21. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 has a window 61 formed therein so that almost the entire area of the gaming area PA can be viewed from the front. The window portion 61 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 62 is fitted therein. The window panel 62 is made of glass and is colorless and transparent, but is not limited to this, and may be made of synthetic resin to be colorless and transparent. It may be colored and transparent as long as it is visible.

A display light emitting section 63 is provided above the window section 61. Furthermore, a pair of left and right speaker sections 64 are provided to output sound effects and the like according to the gaming state. Further, below the window portion 61, an upper bulging portion 65 and a lower bulging portion 66, which bulge toward the front, are arranged vertically in parallel. An upper plate 65a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulge 65, and a lower plate 66a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulge 66. The upper tray 65a has the function of temporarily storing game balls put out by a payout device 85, which will be described later, and guiding them to the game ball firing mechanism 27 side while arranging them in a line. Further, the lower tray 66a has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 65a.

Next, the configuration of the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 2, a main control device 70 that controls the main control of the game is mounted on the back of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24). The main control device 70 includes a main control board 71 housed in a board box 70a. Note that the substrate box 70a may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of its opening, or may be provided with a trace structure for leaving a trace of its opening. Examples of such trace means include the configuration of a joint that connects the plurality of case bodies that make up the board box 70a inseparably and requires destruction of a predetermined part when separating them, and the adhesive layer that remains on the adhesive target when peeled off. A configuration is conceivable in which a seal that leaves a trace of being peeled off is pasted across the boundaries between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a configuration in which adhesive is applied to the boundaries between the plurality of case bodies constituting the board box 70a can be considered.

A back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main controller 70. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 81 made of transparent synthetic resin, and a dispensing mechanism section 82 and a control device assembly unit 83 are attached to the back pack 81.

The payout mechanism section 82 includes a tank 84 to which game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 85 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 84. The game balls put out by the payout device 85 are delivered to the upper tray 65a or the lower tray 66a through a payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 85. The dispensing mechanism section 82 is supplied with, for example, a main power source of 24 volts AC, and is equipped with a back pack board having a power switch for turning the power on and off.

The control device assembly unit 83 includes a payout control device 86 that has a function of controlling the payout device 85, and a predetermined amount of power required by various control devices, etc., is generated and outputted, and is also used to generate and output power when the player operates the firing operation device 28. A power supply/launch control device 87 is provided to control the launch of the game ball. The payout control device 86 and the power supply/launch control device 87 are arranged one on top of the other so that the payout control device 86 is located at the rear of the pachinko machine 10.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 70 includes a main control board 71 that controls the main control of the game. An MPU 72 is mounted on the main control board 71. The MPU 72 includes a ROM 73 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 72, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 73. A certain RAM 74, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, etc. are built-in. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 73 and RAM 74 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 72, and each may be integrated into separate chips. This also applies to the MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 70.

The MPU 72 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A power outage monitoring board 75 provided in the main control device 70 is connected to the input side of the MPU 72, and a payout control device 86 is also connected. A power supply/launch control device 87 having a function of supplying operating power is connected to the power outage monitoring board 75, and power is supplied to the MPU 72 via the power outage monitoring board 75.

Various sensors such as various winning prize detection sensors 32a, 33a, 34a, 36d, and 45 (hereinafter referred to as various prize winning detecting sensors 32a to 45) are connected to the input side of the MPU 72. The various winning detection sensors 32a to 45 include a detection sensor 32a provided in the first operating section 32, a detection sensor 33a provided in the second operating section 33, a detection sensor 34a provided in the through winning section 34, and a special winning detection sensor 34a provided in the through winning section 34. A detection sensor 45 provided in the device 35 and a detection sensor 36d provided in the special electric prize winning device 36 are included. In addition, a detection sensor provided in the general winning section 31 is also included. Based on the detection results of these various winning detection sensors 32a to 45, the MPU 72 determines the winning of each winning ball section. In addition, the MPU 72 executes various lotteries based on winnings to the first operating section 32, second operating section 33, and special winning device 35, and another lottery based on winnings to the through winning section 34. .

A power outage monitoring board 75, a payout control device 86, and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the output side of the MPU 72. For example, a prize ball command is output to the payout control device 86 based on the winning determination result in the winning ball entering section. When the payout control device 86 receives the prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 85 so that the number of game balls specified by the prize ball command is paid out. The sound emission control device 90 is mounted on the back of the symbol display device 51 together with a display control device 100 which will be described later. Various commands such as a variation command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the audio emission control device 90.

On the output side of the MPU 72, there are a special electric drive section 36c that opens and closes the special electric side opening/closing member 36b of the special electric winning device 36, an opening/closing drive section 47 that opens and closes the opening and closing member 43 of the special electric winning device 35, a special drawing unit 38, and A general drawing unit 39 is connected. By the way, the special figure unit 38 is provided with a first special figure display section 38a, a second special figure display section 38b, and a first special figure reservation display section 38c, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 72. has been done. Similarly, the general drawing unit 39 is provided with a general drawing display section 39a and a general drawing holding display section 39b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 72. The main control board 71 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 72 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

In other words, when the special winning device 35 is in the acceptance execution state, the MPU 72 outputs a drive signal to the opening/closing drive unit 47 so that the special winning device 35 is in the accepting state, and the conditions for returning to the non-accepting state are If this is established, the output of the drive signal is stopped and the special prize winning device 35 is returned to the non-accepting state. In addition, in the opening/closing execution mode, when the opening start condition for the special electric winning device 36 is satisfied, the MPU 72 sends a drive signal to the special electric drive unit 36c so that the special electric winning device 36 is in an open state in which game balls can be won. When the closing condition of the special electric winning device 36 is satisfied, the output of the drive signal is stopped and the special electric winning device 36 is brought into a closed state in which winning of game balls is not possible. Furthermore, in each game round and in the opening/closing execution mode, display control of the special figure unit 38 is executed in the MPU 72. In addition, when displaying the lottery result as to whether or not to put the special winning device 35 into the acceptance execution state, the MPU 72 executes display control of the general drawing unit 39.

The power outage monitoring board 75 relays between the main control board 71 and the power source/launch control device 87, and also monitors the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power source/launch control device 87. The payout control device 86 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 85 based on a prize ball command input from the MPU 72 of the main control device 70.

The power source/launch control device 87 is connected to a commercial power source (external power source) in, for example, an amusement hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, necessary operating power is generated for the main control board 71, payout control device 86, etc., and the generated operating power is supplied. Incidentally, the power supply/launch control device 87 is provided with a power supply unit for power outages such as a backup capacitor, and even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is OFF, the power supply unit for power outages supplies power from the main power supply unit. Memory retention power is supplied to the RAM 74 of the control device 70 and the payout control device 86. Further, the power source/launch control device 87 is responsible for controlling the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 27, and the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met.

The audio emission control device 90 includes an audio emission control board 91 on which an MPU 92 is mounted. The MPU 92 includes a ROM 93 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 92, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 93. It has a built-in RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc. The MPU 92 drives and controls the display light emitting section 63 and the speaker section 64 based on the command received from the main control device 70, and transmits the command to the display control device 100.

The display control device 100 includes a display control board 101 on which an MPU 102 is mounted. The MPU 102 includes a ROM 103 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 102, and a memory that temporarily stores various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 103. It has a built-in RAM 104, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc. The MPU 102 executes display control of the symbol display device 51 based on commands received from the audio emission control device 90.

In addition to the MPU 102, the display control board 101 is also equipped with a video display processor (VDP), a character ROM, a video RAM, and the like, although not shown. The VDP is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver built into the symbol display device 51. The VDP intervenes in the reading and writing of data in the video RAM, and also reads the image data to be stored in the video RAM from the character ROM at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 51. The character ROM serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 51. This character ROM stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table that is referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. The video RAM is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 51, and the display contents of the symbol display device 51 are changed based on rewriting the contents of the video RAM.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 72, ROM 73, and RAM 74 of the main control device 70 are referred to as the main side MPU 72, the main side ROM 73, and the main side RAM 74, and the MPU 92 of the audio and light emission control device 90 is referred to as the sound-light side MPU 92.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lottery drawings on the main side MPU 72>
Next, the electrical configuration for performing various lottery drawings in the main MPU 72 will be described using FIG. 8.

The main MPU 72 uses various counter information during the game to determine the winning lottery, display settings on the first special symbol display section 38a, display settings on the second special symbol display section 38b, and game repeat effects on the symbol display device 51. Settings, display settings on the common figure display section 39a, etc. are performed, and specifically, as shown in FIG. The type counter C2 used, the reach random number counter C3 used for the reach occurrence lottery when the winning variation occurs in the game repeat performance on the symbol display device 51, and the random number initial value counter used to set the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. CINI and a fluctuation type counter CS used to determine the duration of a game round are used. In addition, a general random number counter C4 is used to determine whether or not the special prize winning device 35 should be put into the acceptance execution state. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in the lottery counter area 111 of the main RAM 74.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which "1" is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is updated at short intervals. Each numerical value information of the winning random number counter C1, type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first special symbol provided in the main side RAM 74 when a winning occurs in the first operating section 32 or the special winning device 35. It is stored in area 112. In addition, each numerical information of the winning random number counter C1 and the type counter C2 is stored in the execution area 115 for the second special symbol provided in the main side RAM 74 when a winning occurs in the second operating section 33. .

The first special drawing area 112 includes a first area 113a, a second area 113b, a third area 113c, and a fourth area 113d. , the hit random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in any of the areas 113a to 113d as pending information on the first special drawing side. In this case, the first area 113a to the fourth area 113d are divided into the first area 113a → the second area 113b → the Each piece of numerical information is stored in chronological order from the third area 113c to the fourth area 113d. By providing the four areas 113a to 113d in this way, the winning history of game balls to the first actuating section 32 or the special winning device 35 can be held and stored up to a maximum of four. Note that the number that can be reserved and stored in the first special figure area 112 is not limited to four, but is arbitrary, and may be any other number such as two, three, or five or more. , may be singular. In the first special figure area 112, a first special figure execution area 114 is provided in addition to the first area 113a to fourth area 113d. The execution area 114 for the first special figure stores pending information of the object to be judged whether it is correct or not for the special figure, type judgment, etc. when starting the variable display of the pattern on the first special figure display section 38a. area. The reservation information stored in the first area 113a is shifted to the execution area 114 for the first special figure when the variable display of the first special figure display section 38a is started.

In the execution area 115 for the second special symbol, when a winning occurs in the second operating section 33 in a situation where it is possible to start a game round, a winning random number counter C1, a type counter C2, and a reach random number counter C3 are provided. Numerical information is stored as pending information on the second special figure side. Here, as already explained, the first special figure area 112 is provided with the first to fourth areas 113a to 113d, and even if it is impossible to start the game round, the first special figure side The configuration is such that the pending information on the second special figure side is stored on hold, whereas only the execution area 115 for the second special figure is provided for the pending information on the second special figure side. There is no area provided for holding and storing the data. This makes it possible to handle the presence or absence of reservation storage differently between the reservation information on the first special figure side and the reservation information on the second special figure side.

Information corresponding to the general random number counter C4 is stored in the general drawing holding area 116 provided in the main side RAM 74 when a winning to the through winning section 34 occurs. The general drawing reservation area 116 includes a first area 117a, a second area 117b, a third area 117c, and a fourth area 117d. The information is stored in any of the areas 117a to 117d as general map side pending information. In this case, in the first area 117a to the fourth area 117d, if winnings to the through winning section 34 occur multiple times in succession, the first area 117a → second area 117b → third area 117c → fourth area Numerical information is stored chronologically in the order of area 117d. By providing the four areas 117a to 117d in this manner, the winning history of game balls entered into the through winning section 34 can be stored in abeyance at a maximum of four. Note that the number that can be held and stored in the general drawing holding area 116 is not limited to four, but is arbitrary, and may be any other number such as two, three, or five or more; It may be. The ordinary figure holding area 116 is provided with an execution area 118 for ordinary figures. The ordinary figure execution area 118 is an area in which pending information about objects to be determined for guidance when starting variable display on the ordinary figure display section 39a is stored. Specifically, when starting the variable display of the general figure display section 39a, the ordinary figure side reservation information stored in the first area 117a of the ordinary figure holding area 116 is shifted to the ordinary figure execution area 118. Ru.

Each of the above counters will be explained in detail.

First, the standard random number counter C4 will be explained. The general random number counter C4 is configured to increment by 1 within the range of "0 to 99" and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The standard random number counter C4 is updated regularly, and at the timing when a game ball wins in the through winning section 34, the value of the standard random number counter C4 at that time is stored in the standard card holding area 116. Then, at a predetermined timing, an acceptance determination is made as to whether or not to control the special winning device 35 to an acceptance execution state based on the stored value of the general random number counter C4.

Next, the winning random number counter C1 will be explained. The winning random number counter C1 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 399, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. Note that the random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value=0 to 399). The winning random number counter C1 is updated regularly, and at the timing when the game ball enters the first operating unit 32 or the special winning device 35, the value of the winning random number counter C1 at that time is stored in the first special figure area 112, At the timing when the game ball enters the second operating unit 33 in a situation where it is possible to start a game round, the value of the winning random number counter C1 at that time is stored in the execution area 115 for the second special symbol. Then, a judgment is made using the stored value of the winning random number counter C1.

The value of the random number that becomes the winning result in the determination of success/failure is stored in the main side ROM 73 as a win/fail table. The success/failure table is provided corresponding to each of the reservation information on the first special figure side and the reservation information on the second special figure side. Further, in this pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode and a high probability mode are set as lottery modes in the winning/losing lottery means, and winning/losing tables are stored corresponding to each mode. In other words, the accuracy tables include a low accuracy accuracy table for the first special pattern, a high accuracy accuracy table for the first special pattern, a low accuracy accuracy table for the second special pattern, and a high accuracy accuracy table for the second special pattern. There are four types of success/failure tables. These validity tables will be explained. FIG. 9(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the low probability correctness table for the first special symbol, and FIG. 9(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the high probability correctness table for the first special symbol. FIG. 9(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the low probability correctness table for the second special symbol, and FIG. 9(d) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the low probability correctness table for the second special symbol. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 9(a), the low probability correctness table for the first special figure has two values of the winning random number counter C1 that result in a jackpot, and the other values of the winning random number counter C1 are set as misses. Responsive to results. If a jackpot result is selected in the win/fail judgment process, after the game round corresponding to the win/fail judgment process ends, the first opening/closing execution mode described above is executed, and a winning result is selected in the win/fail judgment process. In this case, the open/close execution mode will not occur. In addition, as shown in FIG. 9(b), in the high probability correctness table for the first special symbol, 150 values of the winning random number counter C1 that result in a jackpot are set, and other values of the winning random number counter C1 are set. corresponds to an outlier result. As a result, a jackpot result is more likely to occur in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, triggered by the reservation information on the first special symbol side.

As shown in FIG. 9(c), the low-probability correctness table for the second special figure has two values of the winning random number counter C1, which is the result of a jackpot, set in the same way as the low-probability correctness table for the first special figure. As shown in FIG. 9(d), the value of the winning random number counter C1, which is the jackpot result, is set to 150 in the high probability probability table for the second special symbol, as in the high probability probability table for the first special symbol. has been done. In other words, the probability of a jackpot result in the low probability mode is the same for the reservation information on the first special symbol side and the reservation information on the second special symbol side, and the probability of a jackpot result in the high probability mode is also the same for the reservation information on the first special symbol side. The reservation information on the side and the reservation information on the second special figure side are the same.

In both the low probability correctness table for the second special figure and the high probability correctness table for the second special figure, a small winning result is set in addition to the jackpot result, and the value of the hit random number counter C1 that becomes the small winning result. is 240, which is common to the low probability correctness table for the second special figure and the high probability correctness table for the second special figure. In other words, the probability of a jackpot result is different between the low probability mode and the high probability mode, whereas the probability of a small win result is common to the low probability mode and the high probability mode. When a small winning result is selected in the win/fail judgment process, the second opening/closing execution mode described above is executed after the game round corresponding to the win/fail judgment process ends. In addition, in the low-probability correctness table for the second special pattern and the high-probability correctness table for the second special pattern, the value of the hit random number counter C1 that does not correspond to either the jackpot result or the small win result is associated with the winning result. It is being

Since the win/fail table is set as described above, if the pending information on the first special drawing side becomes the target of the win/fail determination process, either the jackpot result or the lose result will be selected. When the pending information on the second special figure side becomes the object of the judgment process, not only the jackpot result and the miss result but also the small win result become the selection object. In this case, when the pending information on the second special drawing side is subject to the validity judgment process, the probability that the small hit result will be selected is that the jackpot result will be selected regardless of whether it is in the low probability mode or the high probability mode. higher than the probability of being In detail, the probability that this small winning result is selected is 1/2 or more. As a result, when the game ball is fired into the second actuating section 33 with the aim of winning a prize, a small winning result will occur with a high probability.

In addition, in the case where the pending information on the second special symbol side is subject to the validity determination process, a configuration may be adopted in which if a jackpot result is not obtained, a small win result is definitely or almost certainly selected. Further, even if the reservation information on the first special symbol side is subject to the validity determination process, a configuration may be adopted in which the small winning result can be selected.

The type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 29, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The type counter C2 is updated regularly, and at the timing when a game ball wins a prize in the first actuating unit 32 or the special winning device 35, the value of the type counter C2 at that time is stored in the first special symbol area 112, and the game round is updated. At the timing when the game ball enters the second operating unit 33 in a situation where it is possible to start the game, the value of the type counter C2 at that time is stored in the execution area 115 for the second special symbol. Then, the type of jackpot result is determined using the stored value of the type counter C2.

FIG. 9(e) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a jackpot type table used when determining the type of jackpot result for the type counter C2. In the jackpot type table, among the values of type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 19" correspond to low probability jackpot results, and "20 to 29" correspond to high probability jackpot results. There is. Both of these low-probability jackpot results and high-probability jackpot results serve as an opportunity to shift to the first opening/closing execution mode. In addition, in the case of a low probability jackpot result, after the first opening/closing execution mode ends, the low probability mode is set regardless of the type of winning/failure lottery mode before the start of the first opening/closing execution mode, and the high probability jackpot result In this case, after the first opening/closing execution mode ends, the high probability mode is set regardless of the type of win/fail lottery mode before the start of the first opening/closing execution mode.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be explained. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of, for example, "0" to "238", and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is updated regularly, and at the timing when the game ball wins the first actuating unit 32 or the special winning device 35, the value of the reach random number counter C3 at that time is stored in the first special figure area 112, At the timing when the game ball enters the second operating unit 33 in a situation where it is possible to start a game round, the value of the reach random number counter C3 at that time is stored in the execution area 115 for the second special symbol. When the game round corresponding to the losing result is executed, the presence or absence of execution of the reach display is determined using these stored values of the reach random number counter C3.

Next, the variation type counter CS will be explained. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 within the range of "0 to 198" and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used by the main MPU 72 to determine the duration of a game round.

<About various processes executed by the main MPU 72>
Next, various processes executed by the main MPU 72 to advance the game will be explained. The processing of the main MPU 72 can be roughly divided into main processing that is started upon power-on, and timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, every 4 msec).

<Main processing>
First, the main processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In the main process, first, a power-on wait process is executed (step S101). In the power-on wait process, the main process waits without proceeding to the next process until, for example, 1 sec has elapsed since the main process was started. Thereafter, access to the main RAM 74 is permitted (step S102), and the internal function registers of the main MPU 72 are set (step S103).

After that, it is determined whether the RAM erase button provided on the power supply/launch control device 87 is manually operated (step S104), and it is determined whether the power failure flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1". (Step S105). Also, a checksum calculation process is executed to calculate a checksum (step S106), and it is determined whether the checksum matches the checksum saved when the power was cut off, that is, the validity of the stored data is determined ( Step S107).

In this pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is to be initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when a gaming hall starts business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase button. Therefore, if the RAM erase button has been pressed, the process moves to step S108. Further, if the power cutoff occurrence information is not set, or if an abnormality in the stored data is confirmed by the checksum, the process similarly moves to step S108. In step S108, the main RAM 74 is cleared as initialization of the main RAM 74. After that, the process advances to step S109.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase button is not pressed, on condition that the power outage flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal, step S109 is executed without executing the process of step S108. Proceed to. In step S109, a power-on setting process is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main RAM 74, such as initializing a power outage flag, is set to an initial value. Further, a payout initialization command indicating that the RAM of the payout control device 86 should be initialized is transmitted to the payout control device 86.

Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining processing of steps S110 to S113. That is, although the main MPU 72 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing, there is a remaining time between one timer interrupt processing and the next timer interrupt processing. Although this remaining time will vary depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, the remaining process of steps S110 to S113 is repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this respect, it can be said that the remaining processing of steps S110 to S113 is non-regular processing that is executed non-regularly.

In the remaining processing, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit generation of timer interrupt processing (step S110). Further, a random number initial value update process is executed to update the random number initial value counter CINI (step S111), and a variation counter update process is executed to update the variation type counter CS (step S112). In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter in the main side RAM 74, the read numerical information is incremented by 1, and then the process of overwriting the counter from which it was read is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to "0" when it reaches the maximum value. Thereafter, an interrupt permission setting is performed to switch from a state in which generation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited to a state in which it is permitted (step S113). After executing the process in step S113, the process returns to step S110, and the processes in steps S110 to S113 are repeated.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, timer interrupt processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The timer interrupt process is activated repeatedly at a cycle of 4 msec.

First, a power outage information storage process is executed (step S201). In the power outage information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power outage signal corresponding to the occurrence of a power cutoff is received from the power outage monitoring board 75, and if the occurrence of a power outage is identified, a power outage process is executed.

After that, a lottery random number update process is executed (step S202). In the lottery random number update process, the winning random number counter C1, type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and standard random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information is sequentially read from the hit random number counter C1, the type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general random number counter C4, and after performing a process of adding 1 to each of the read numerical information, the reading is performed. Execute the process to overwrite the original counter. In this case, each counter value is cleared to "0" when it reaches the maximum value.

Thereafter, a random number initial value update process is executed as in step S111 (step S203), and a fluctuation counter update process is executed as in step S112 (step S204). After that, a game stop determination process is executed (step S205). In the game stop determination process, it is monitored whether or not the progress of the game should be stopped, and if the situation is such that the progress of the game should be stopped, the execution of the process for advancing the game is stopped. Thereafter, on condition that the progress of the game is not stopped (step S206: NO), the processing from step S207 onwards is executed.

In step S207, port output processing is executed. In the port output processing, if output information has been set in the previous timer interrupt processing, output corresponding to the output information is executed.

Thereafter, reading processing is executed (step S208). In the reading process, signals other than the power outage signal and winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

Thereafter, winning detection processing is executed (step S209). In the winning detection process, signals received from various winning detection sensors 32a to 45 are read, and the general winning section 31, first operating section 32, second operating section 33, through winning section 34, special winning device 35, and A process is executed to determine whether or not there is a prize in the special electric prize winning device 36.

Thereafter, a timer update process is executed to collectively update numerical information of multiple types of timer counters provided in the main side RAM 74 (step S210). In this case, the configuration is such that the timer counters that are updated by subtracting the stored numerical information are handled collectively, but both the subtraction-type timer counter update and the addition-type timer counter update are performed collectively. It may also be a configuration.

Thereafter, a fraud detection process is executed to monitor whether a predetermined event set as a monitoring target for fraud has occurred (step S211). In the fraud detection process, by monitoring the occurrence of multiple types of events and confirming that a predetermined event has occurred, settings for stopping the game are made in step S205 in the next timer interrupt process, An affirmative determination is made in step S206.

Thereafter, a firing control process for controlling the firing of game balls is executed (step S212). In a situation where the firing operation is continued with respect to the firing operation device 28, as already explained, one game ball is fired every 0.6 seconds so as to have a predetermined firing cycle.

After that, as an input state monitoring process, based on the information read in the reading process of step S208, the disconnection of each winning detection sensor 32a to 45 is confirmed, and the opening of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 is confirmed (step S213).

Thereafter, a special figure special electric control process is executed to control the execution of the game round in the first special figure display section 38a, the execution control of the game round in the second special figure display section 38b, and the execution control of the opening/closing execution mode ( Step S214). In addition, a general-purpose figure/general electric power control process is executed for controlling the display continuation times in the ordinary figure display section 39a and execution control of the acceptance execution state of the special prize winning device 35 (step S215).

After that, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S214 and S215, output information is set to reflect the increase or decrease in the number of reservation information on the first special symbol side in the first special symbol reservation display section 38c, and the setting of output information on the regular symbol side Output information is set to reflect the increase or decrease in the number of pending information on the general figure pending display section 39b (step S216). Also, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S214 to S215, output information is set for updating the display content of the first special figure display section 38a, and for updating the display content of the second special figure display section 38b. and setting of output information for updating the display contents of the ordinary figure display section 39a (step S216).

Thereafter, the content of the command and signal received from the payout control device 86 is confirmed, and a payout state reception process is executed to perform processing corresponding to the confirmation result (step S217). Further, a payout output process for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed (step S218). Further, an external information setting process is executed to control the start and end of output of an external signal according to the processing results of various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process (step S219). If an affirmative determination is made in step S206, or after executing the processes in steps S207 to S219, this timer interrupt process ends.

<Special figure special electric control processing>
Next, the special figure special electric control process executed in step S214 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 12.

In the special figure special electric train control process, first, a reservation information acquisition process is executed (step S301). FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the reservation information acquisition process. If a winning has occurred in the first actuating unit 32 or the special winning device 35 (step S401: YES), the first On the condition that the number of reserved information on the special figure side is less than the upper limit of four pieces (step S402: NO), storage processing in the first special figure area 112 is executed (step S403). In the storage process, numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first area 113a to fourth area 113d of the first special figure area 113 as pending information on the first special figure side. It is stored in the area where the reservation information on the special figure side is not stored in the area where the order of consumption is earlier. In addition, when the reservation information on the first special symbol side is acquired, the display contents of the first special symbol reservation display section 38c are updated in accordance with the increase in the number of reservation information on the first special symbol side. Configure the data to do so. Moreover, when the hold information on the first special figure side is acquired, a hold increase command is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 92. As a result, the image for informing the number of pending storages of the pending information on the first special symbol side in the symbol display device 51 is updated in correspondence with the new acquisition of the pending information on the first special symbol side.

If a negative determination is made in step S401, if an affirmative determination is made in step S402, or if the process of step S403 is executed, it is determined whether or not a winning has occurred in the second actuating section 33 (step S404). If an affirmative determination is made in step S404, the current state is that neither the game round nor the opening/closing execution mode is being executed (step S405: YES), and the process proceeds to the execution area 115 for the second special symbol. storage processing is executed (step S406). In the storage process, each numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 is stored in the execution area 115 for the second special symbol as pending information on the second special symbol side. In other words, the hold information on the second special figure side can be executed in any of the game times triggered by the hold information on the first special figure side, the game times triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side, and the opening/closing execution mode. be obtained only in situations where the As will be described in detail later, regarding the execution of the validity judgment process, in other words, regarding the execution of the game round, the reservation information on the second special symbol side is given priority over the reservation information on the first special symbol side as an execution trigger. , when the hold information on the second special figure side is stored in the execution area 115 for the second special figure, the validity judgment process triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side is immediately executed, and the hold information on the second special figure side is immediately executed. 2 A game round triggered by the reservation information on the special figure side is started. It should be noted that a second special symbol reservation display section for notifying the number of stored pieces of reservation information on the second special symbol side is not provided, and furthermore, the symbol display device 51 displays the reservation information on the second special symbol side. An image for notifying the number of reserved memories is not displayed.

Returning to the explanation of the special figure special electric line control process (FIG. 14), after executing the reservation information acquisition process in step S301, the special figure special electric line address table stored in the main side ROM 73 is read out (step S302). The start address of a program for executing the process corresponding to the numerical information of the special figure/special electric line counter is set in the special figure/special electric line address table. The special figure special electric line counter is a counter for specifying the processing content to be executed in the special figure special electric control process by the main side MPU 72.

The special figure special electric line counter can take values from "0" to "6", and each value from "0" to "6" corresponds to the start address SA0 to SA6 of each process (step S305 to step S311). ing. Specifically, when the value of the special figure special electric line counter is "0", the special figure fluctuation start process (step S305), which is the process for starting the production of the game reuse, is executed, and the special figure special electric line When the value of the counter is "1", the special figure fluctuation process (step S306), which is a process for advancing the performance of the game reuse, is executed, and when the value of the special figure special electric counter is "2", the special figure fluctuation process (step S306) is executed. In this case, the special figure confirmation process (step S307), which is the process for ending the production of the game reuse, is to be executed, and if the value of the special figure special electric counter is "3", the opening/closing execution mode is executed. The special train start process (step S308), which is the process for controlling the opening, is to be executed, and if the value of the special figure special train counter is "4", the When the special train open process (step S309) is executed, and the value of the special figure special train counter is "5", the special train closes which is a process for controlling the closed state of the special train winning device 36. The middle process (step S310) is to be executed, and if the value of the special figure special electric counter is "6", this is a process for controlling the ending of the opening/closing execution mode and the transition of the game state at the end of the opening/closing execution mode. The special call termination process (step S311) is to be executed.

In the special figure special electric line control process, after reading the special figure special electric line address table (step S302), the start address corresponding to the information of the special figure special electric line counter is acquired from the special figure special electric line address table (step S303), and the acquired The process jumps to the process indicated by the start address (step S304). Each process from step S305 to step S311 will be individually explained below.

<Special figure fluctuation start process>
First, the special symbol variation start process in step S305 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In the special figure fluctuation start process, on the condition that the reservation information on the first special figure side or the reservation information on the second special figure side is stored (step S501: YES), a data setting process is executed (step S502). . In the data setting process, if the reservation information on the second special symbol side is stored in the execution area 115 for the second special symbol, the reservation information on the second special symbol side is stored in the first special symbol area 112 before the reservation information on the second special symbol side. Regardless of whether or not the reservation information on the first special figure side acquired in do. As a result, it is possible to give priority to the hold information on the second special figure side as an opportunity to execute the validity judgment process over the hold information on the first special figure side, and it is also possible to give priority as an opportunity to execute the game round. Become. In addition, the hold information on the second special figure side stored in the execution area 115 for the second special figure is erased when the game round triggered by the hold information on the second special figure side ends.

On the other hand, in the data setting process, if the reservation information on the second special figure side is not stored in the execution area 115 for the second special figure, the data stored in the first area 113a of the first special figure area 112 is Move to the execution area 114 for the first special figure. After that, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first special figure area 112 is executed. This data shift processing is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 113a to 113d to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first area 113a, and also clears the data in the second area 113b→ Data in each area is shifted in the following order: first area 113a, third area 113c→second area 113b, fourth area 113d→third area 113c. In addition, in the data setting process, data is set so that the display contents of the first special symbol reservation display section 38c are updated in accordance with the current reduction in the number of reservation information on the first special symbol side. In the data setting process, a hold reduction command is sent to the audio-optical MPU 92. As a result, the image for informing the number of reserved stored information on the first special symbol side in the symbol display device 51 is updated in accordance with the decrease in the reserved information on the special symbol side.

After executing the data setting process, an appropriateness determination process is executed (step S503). In the validity determination process, a validity table (FIGS. 9(a) to 9(d)) corresponding to the combination of the type of pending information selected as a target for execution of the validity determination process in the data setting process and the current lottery mode. is read from the main side ROM 73. Then, the numerical information about the winning random number counter C1 in the pending information that is the subject of execution of the current validity judgment process is checked against the read validity table.

If the result of the success/failure determination process is a jackpot result (step S504: YES), a jackpot type determination process is executed (step S505). In the jackpot type determination process, the jackpot type table shown in FIG. 9(e) is read from the main ROM 73. In addition, if the hold information on the first special figure side is the trigger for the current game round, the numerical information about the type counter C2 stored in the execution area 114 for the first special figure is read out, and the second special figure side is read out. If the pending information on the side is the trigger for the current game round, numerical information about the type counter C2 stored in the execution area 115 for the second special symbol is read out. Then, it is determined whether the numerical information about the read type counter C2 corresponds to the numerical range of which type of jackpot result among the low-probability jackpot result and the high-probability jackpot result set in the above-mentioned jackpot type table. do.

After executing the jackpot type determination process, a flag in the main side RAM 74 corresponding to the type of jackpot result specified in the type determination process is set to "1" (step S506). Specifically, if it corresponds to a low-probability jackpot result, set the low-probability jackpot flag to "1", and if it corresponds to a high-probability jackpot result, set "1" to the high-probability jackpot flag. set. The state in which either the low probability jackpot flag or the high probability jackpot flag is set to "1" is cleared to "0" when the game state transition process is executed when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

Thereafter, a stop result setting process for jackpot results is executed (step S507). Specifically, information on the stop mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed in the current game round on the side that is the target of execution of the game round among the first special figure display section 38a and the second special figure display section 38b. is specified from the stop result table for jackpot results stored in advance in the main side ROM 73, and the specified information is stored in the main side RAM 74. In this stop result table for jackpot results, the types of stop modes of the symbols that are stopped and displayed on the first special figure display section 38a or the second special figure display section 38b are set differently for each type of jackpot result. In step S507, information on the pattern stop mode corresponding to the type of jackpot result specified in step S505 is stored in the main side RAM 74. Note that the pattern stopping manner may be set in one-to-one correspondence with each jackpot result, or a plurality of types of pattern stopping patterns may be set for at least some of the jackpot results. For jackpot results in which a plurality of types of pattern stopping modes are set, a method for selecting a stopping result is arbitrary, but for example, a structure may be adopted in which a stopping result is selected according to the value of the type counter C2.

If the result of the validity determination process is not a jackpot result (step S504: NO), it is determined whether the result of the validity determination process is a small win result (step S508). In this pachinko machine 10, as already explained, when the pending information on the first special figure side is subject to the validity determination process, the small winning result is not selected, and the pending information on the second special figure side is subject to the validation process. A small hit result may be selected when it is subject to determination processing. If the result of the win/fail determination process is a small win result (step S508: YES), the small win flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S509). Then, a stop result setting process for small winning results is executed (step S510). Specifically, information on the stop mode of the small winning result pattern that is finally stopped and displayed on the second special figure display section 38b in the current game round is read out from the main side ROM 73 and stored in the main side RAM 74. The information on the stop mode of the symbol selected in this case is different from the information on the mode of the symbol selected in the case of a jackpot result. Note that one type of pattern stopping mode may be set for a small winning result, or a plurality of types of pattern stopping modes may be set for a small winning result.

When the result of the win/fail determination process is neither a jackpot result nor a small win result (step S504 and step S508: NO), a stop result setting process for a miss result is executed (step S511). Specifically, of the first special figure display section 38a and the second special figure display section 38b, the side that is the target of execution of the game session is the one for the winning result that is finally stopped and displayed in the current game session. Information on the stop mode is read from the main side ROM 73 and stored in the main side RAM 74. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of a jackpot result and the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of a small win result.

After any one of the stop result setting processes is executed, a process for specifying the duration of the game round is executed (step S512). In the specific processing, if the hold information that triggered the start of the current game round is the hold information on the first special symbol side, it is first determined whether the current game round corresponds to the occurrence of a reach effect. . Specifically, if the current game round corresponds to a jackpot result, it is determined that a reach effect occurs. In addition, even if the current game round does not correspond to the jackpot result, the numerical information of the reach random number counter C3 in the pending information on the first special figure side, which is the target of the start of the current game round, indicates that the reach has occurred. If the numerical information corresponds to , it is determined that a reach effect occurs. When it is determined that a reach effect will occur, a variable display period table for reach generation is read from the main ROM 73, and the current numerical information of the variation type counter CS is compared with the read variable display period table to display a variable display. A period is determined, and information about the determined variable display period is set in a timer counter provided in the main side RAM 74. In addition, when it is determined that a reach effect does not occur, the variable display period table for non-reach effect is read out from the main side ROM 73, and the current numerical information of the variable type counter CS and the current value are compared to the read variable display period table. A variable display period is determined by comparing the combination of numbers of pending information on the first special figure side, and information on the determined variable display period is set in a timer counter provided in the main side RAM 74. When the variable display period table for reach generation is referenced, the variable display period corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS is selected regardless of the number of pending information on the first special drawing side, whereas when the reach occurrence is not When the occurrence variable period table is referred to, the larger the number of reservation information on the first special figure side, the shorter the variable display period is selected. The numerical information set in the timer counter is updated in the timer update process of step S210 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11). Incidentally, the variable display period that can be selected when the hold information on the first special figure side becomes an opportunity to start a game round is 1 second to 180 seconds.

In the process of specifying the duration of the game round, if the hold information that triggered the start of the current game round is the hold information on the second special drawing side, first the current win/fail lottery mode is changed to the high probability mode or the low probability mode. Determine which one it is. If the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode, the variable display period for reach occurrence will be set depending on whether the current game round corresponds to the occurrence of reach effect, as in the case of the pending information on the first special drawing side. Select either table or variable display period table for reach non-occurrence. If a reach effect occurs, the variable display period is determined by comparing the current numerical information of the variable type counter CS against the variable display period table for reach generation, and the information of the determined variable display period is transmitted to the main side. Set in the timer counter provided in the RAM 74. If reach effect does not occur, determine the variable display period by comparing the current numerical information of the variable type counter CS against the variable display period table for non-reach, and use the information of the determined variable display period as the main The timer counter provided in the side RAM 74 is set. Incidentally, in the case of the high probability mode, the variable display period that can be selected when the hold information on the second special figure side becomes an opportunity to start a game round is 1 second to 60 seconds. In this case, the longest variable display period that can be selected is shorter than the longest variable display period that can be selected when the hold information on the first special drawing side is triggered, and the average variable display period is also shorter than the longest variable display period that can be selected. It is shorter than the average variable display period that can be selected when the reservation information on the 1 special drawing side becomes a trigger.

On the other hand, if the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode, regardless of whether the game result of the current game is a jackpot result, a small win result, or a miss result, the value and fluctuation of the reach random number counter C3 A variable display period of 1200 seconds is selected regardless of the value of the type counter CS. This variable display period is longer than the longest variable display period that can be selected when triggered by reservation information on the first special drawing side, and furthermore, in high probability mode, when triggered by reservation information on the second special drawing side. longer than the longest variable display period that could be selected if In this way, by making the display period of changing game times triggered by the reservation information on the second special figure side in the low probability mode extremely long, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the second operating section 33 in the low probability mode. When a game is played with a purpose, it is possible to extremely reduce the efficiency of playing the game. As already explained, the second operating section 33 is not provided with an opening/closing member for preventing the game ball from entering. On the other hand, when the pending information on the second special drawing side is subject to the validity judgment process, not only the jackpot result may be selected, but also the small win result will be selected with a high probability; In this case, the second opening/closing execution mode occurs, and the number of balls held by the player increases based on the entry of game balls into the special electric winning device 36. In this case, in the low probability mode, as described above, when a game is played with the aim of hitting the game ball into the second operating section 33, the efficiency of playing the game is extremely reduced. Instead of aiming for the game ball to enter the second actuating part 33, the player aims for the game ball to enter the first actuating part 32, and uses the hold information on the first special drawing side as a trigger to achieve a high probability jackpot result. Therefore, after entering the high probability mode, it becomes possible to play a game in which the game ball aims to enter the second operating section 33.

In addition to or in place of the configuration of selecting the variable display period, for example, as a method for discouraging the player from aiming for the game ball to enter the second actuating section 33 in the low probability mode, for example, the low probability mode may be used. In the mode, when a firing operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the right side area PA3, a corresponding notification may be provided. Specifically, when a game ball enters the second operating section 33 in the low probability mode, at least one of the symbol display device 51, the display light emitting section 63, and the speaker section 64 is used to move the right side area. To enable a player to recognize that the firing of game balls toward PA3 is to be stopped. This configuration also makes it possible to dissuade the player from aiming for the game ball to enter the second operating section 33 in the low probability mode.

Incidentally, as a performance for the game, the first special figure display section 38a or the second special figure display section 38b displays a variable symbol and the symbol display device 51 displays a variable symbol, but each of these variable displays When the game is ended, the state in which the stop result of that game round is displayed is displayed for the final stop period. In this case, the information on the variable display period read out in step S512 is the period obtained by subtracting the final stop period from the duration of the game round. In other words, the duration of the game round is the sum of the variable display period and the final stop period.

Thereafter, a variation command and a type command corresponding to the results of the current validity determination process and type determination process, and the process result of step S512 are selected from the main ROM 73 (step S513). Then, the selected variation command and type command are transmitted to the audio-light side MPU 92 (step S514). The sound and light side MPU 92 executes control to cause the symbol display device 51, the display light emitting unit 63, and the speaker unit 64 to execute a game replay effect corresponding to the received variation command and type command. .

After that, variable display of symbols is started on the first special figure display section 38a and the second special figure display section 38b, which is the one to be executed in the current game round (step S515). The first special figure display part 38a and the second special figure display part 38a and the second special figure display part 38b serve as a table referred to by the main side MPU 72 when the first special figure display part 38a or the second special figure display part 38b displays a changing pattern. A variable display table for special symbols common to 38b is stored in the main side ROM 73 in advance. When a variable display of symbols is executed in the first special figure display section 38a or the second special figure display section 38b, the same variable display table is used regardless of the result of the validity judgment process and the result of the type judgment process. Ru. When the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the first special figure display section 38a or the second special figure display section 38b, the symbols are displayed in a predetermined pattern repeatedly. Control data for one round in the variable display of the picture according to the predetermined pattern is set. Therefore, when a variable display of symbols is performed in the first special figure display section 38a or the second special figure display section 38b, the variable display table for the special figure remains unchanged until the duration of the game round determined in step S512 has elapsed. It will be used repeatedly.

Thereafter, the value of the special figure special electric counter is incremented by 1 (step S516). When the special figure variation start process is executed, the value of the special figure special electric line counter is "0", so by adding 1, the value of the special figure special electric line counter becomes ``0'' corresponding to the process during special figure variation (step S306). 1".

<Processing during special figure fluctuation>
Next, the special figure fluctuation processing in step S306 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 12) will be explained.

In the special figure fluctuation processing, it is determined whether the timing is during the game and before the final stop display, and if it is before the final stop display, the special figure display parts 38a, 38b that are currently controlled A process for regularly changing the display mode of the picture is executed. This regular change continues until it is time to start the final stop display. Further, this regular change is performed in a fixed manner regardless of whether there is a winning result or not and whether or not a reach display occurs.

When it is time to display the final stop, in order to display the final stop result of the current game on the symbol display device 51, a final stop command is sent to the sound-light side MPU 92, and the current control target The display mode of the symbols in the special figure display sections 38a and 38b is set to be the display mode corresponding to the game result of the current game round. Further, information on the final stop period (0.5 sec) of the game round is read from the main side ROM 73 and set in the timer counter. Then, by adding 1 to the value of the special figure special electric counter, the value of the counter is updated from the value corresponding to the process during special figure variation to the value corresponding to the process during special figure confirmation (step S307).

<Special drawing confirmation process>
Next, the special figure confirmation process of step S307 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 12) will be explained.

In the special figure confirmation processing, if the final stop period of the current game round has not passed, the special figure confirmation process will end as is, and if the final stop period of the current game round has passed, If the result of the validity judgment that triggered this game round is a negative result, clear the value of the special figure special electric counter to "0", then end this special figure confirmation process, and set the trigger for this game round. If the result of the judgment is a jackpot result or a small win result, processing for transition to the opening/closing execution mode is executed.

In the process for transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode, information on an opening period (for example, 4 seconds) stored in advance in the main side ROM 73 is read out, and information on the opening time is set in a timer counter. Incidentally, the opening period is constant regardless of the type of game result that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. Further, an opening command is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 92. The opening command is a command for making the sound/light side MPU 92 recognize that it is the timing to start the performance for the opening/closing execution mode. The opening command also includes information indicating whether the game result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode is a jackpot result or a small win result. Therefore, the sound and light side MPU 92 can execute the effect of the opening/closing execution mode in a manner corresponding to the game result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode. Further, by incrementing the special figure special electric line counter by 1, the value of the counter is updated to one corresponding to the special electric line start process (step S308).

<Special call start process>
Next, the special train start process of step S308 in the special figure special train control process (FIG. 12) will be explained.

In the special electric start process, it is determined whether the opening period in the current opening/closing execution mode has elapsed or not, and if it has passed, whether the current opening/closing execution mode is the first opening/closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result or not. For example, "16" is set in a round counter provided in the main side RAM 74 as information on the number of round games. Further, "10" is set as information on the upper limit number of winnings in the winning counter provided in the main side RAM 74, and information corresponding to 29 seconds is set as information on the open duration period in the timer counter. On the other hand, if the current opening/closing execution mode is the second opening/closing execution mode triggered by the small winning result, "3" is set as information on the number of openings/closings of the special electric prize winning device 36 in the opening/closing number counter provided in the main side RAM 74. . Further, "10" is set as information on the upper limit number of winnings in the winning counter provided in the main side RAM 74, and information corresponding to 1 second is set as information on the open duration period in the timer counter. After performing these various settings, the special electric prize winning device 36 is opened. Further, a release command is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 92. Upon receiving the opening command, the sound/light side MPU 92 executes control for switching the performance in the opening/closing execution mode accordingly. After the special train winning device 36 is set in the open state, the value of the counter is updated to one corresponding to the special train opening process (step S309) by adding 1 to the special figure special train counter.

<Processing while special electric line is open>
Next, the special train opening process in step S309 in the special figure special train control process (FIG. 12) will be explained.

In the special electric current opening process, if it is in the first opening/closing execution mode, it is determined whether the termination condition of the first round game is satisfied, and if the termination condition is satisfied, the special electric prize winning device 36 is closed. At the same time, a closing command is sent to the sound-light side MPU 92. Also, it is determined whether the value of the round counter after subtracting 1 is "0", and if it is not "0", the timer counter corresponds to the closing period (specifically, 1 second). Set the information to be used. On the other hand, in the second opening/closing execution mode, it is determined whether one opening duration period has elapsed and whether the upper limit number of game balls have entered the special electric winning device 36, and if any of the conditions is met. If it is true, the special electric prize winning device 36 is brought into a closed state, and a closing command is sent to the sound-light side MPU 92. In addition, if the opening duration period has elapsed, check whether the value of the opening/closing number counter after subtracting 1 is "0" or not, and if a prize has been won in the special electric prize winning device 36, the number of prizes won. Determine whether the value of the winning counter after subtraction is "0" or not, and if neither is "0", set the timer counter to correspond to the closing period (specifically, 1 second). Set the information to be used. After performing these various settings, by incrementing the special figure special electric line counter by 1, the value of the counter is updated to one corresponding to the special electric line closed processing (step S310).

<Processing during special electric train closure>
Next, the special train closed processing in step S310 in the special train special train control process (FIG. 12) will be described.

In the special electric train closing process, it is determined whether the termination conditions for the current opening/closing execution mode are satisfied. Specifically, in the first opening/closing execution mode, it is determined whether the round counter is "0", and in the second opening/closing execution mode, it is determined whether the opening/closing number counter or the winning counter is "0". Determine whether it exists or not. If the conditions for ending the opening/closing execution mode are not met, the special electric prize winning device 36 is set to the open state on the condition that the closing period has elapsed, and in the case of the first opening/closing execution mode, the winning counter is The upper limit number is set and the open duration period is set to the timer counter, and if it is the second opening/closing execution mode, the open duration period is set to the timer counter. Further, a release command is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 92. Thereafter, by subtracting 1 from the special figure special electric line counter, the value of the counter is updated to one corresponding to the special electric line release process (step S309).

On the other hand, if the conditions for ending the current opening/closing execution mode are satisfied, an ending command is transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 92. The ending command is a command for making the sound and light side MPU 92 recognize that it is the timing to start the ending performance. The ending command also includes information indicating whether the game result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode is a jackpot result or a small win result. Therefore, the sound and light side MPU 92 can execute the ending effect in a manner corresponding to the game result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode. Further, the information on the ending period (for example, 6 seconds) stored in advance in the main side ROM 73 is read out, and the information on the ending time is set in the timer counter. Incidentally, the ending time is constant regardless of the type of game result that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. Thereafter, by adding 1 to the special figure special electric line counter, the value of the counter is updated to one corresponding to the special electric line end process (step S311).

<Special call termination process>
Next, the special train end process of step S311 in the special figure special train control process (FIG. 12) will be explained.

In the special call termination process, it is determined whether the ending period has elapsed or not, and if the ending period has elapsed, the content of the winning lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is used as the trigger for transitioning to the current opening/closing execution mode. The content is set to correspond to the type of jackpot result, and the special figure special electric counter is cleared to "0". In addition, if the trigger for switching to the opening/closing execution mode this time is a small winning result, the winning/losing lottery mode before the start of the opening/closing execution mode will be maintained as the winning/losing lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Make it.

<General purpose electric power control processing>
Next, the general electric power control process executed in step S215 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 15.

If a prize has been won in the through-winning section 34 (step S601: YES), the number of pieces of general-purpose drawing side reservation information stored in the first area 117a to fourth area 117d of the ordinary drawing holding area 116 is the upper limit number. On the condition that there are fewer than four pieces (step S602: NO), storage processing in the general drawing reservation area 116 is executed (step S603). In this storage process, the numerical information of the random number counter C4 is set as the general-purpose figure-side pending information, and among the areas in the first area 117a to fourth area 117d of the general-purpose figure holding area 116 where the general-purpose figure-side pending information is not stored. Store it in the area where it will be digested earlier. In addition, when the general figure side hold information is acquired, data settings are made so that the display contents of the general figure side hold display section 39b are updated in accordance with the current increase in the number of pieces of general figure side hold information. conduct.

If a negative determination is made in step S601, if an affirmative determination is made in step S602, or if the process of step S603 is executed, the general address table stored in the main side ROM 73 is read out (step S604). . The start address of a program for executing a process corresponding to the numerical information of the standard, standard, and general electricity counter is set in the standard, standard, and general electricity address table. The regular/universal electricity counter is a counter for specifying the processing content to be executed in the ordinary/universal electricity control process by the main side MPU 72.

The general electricity counter can take values from "0" to "3", and each value from "0" to "3" corresponds to the start address NA0 to NA3 of each process (step S607 to step S610). ing. Specifically, when the value of the general figure general electricity counter is "0," the ordinary figure fluctuation start process (step S607), which is a process for starting the display continuation times in the general figure display section 39a, is executed. Therefore, when the value of the general-purpose figure and general electricity counter is "1," the ordinary figure fluctuation process (step S608), which is a process for advancing the display continuation times in the ordinary figure display section 39a, is to be executed, and the ordinary figure is changed. When the value of the figure and general electric power counter is "2," the electrician and electric figure confirmation process (step S609), which is a process for ending the display continuation times in the electric figure display section 39a, is to be executed. When the value of the counter is "3", the ordinary power opening process (step S610), which is a process for controlling the acceptance execution state of the special prize winning device 35, is to be executed.

In the general-purpose electricity control process, after reading the general-purpose electricity address table (step S604), the start address corresponding to the information of the general-purpose electricity counter is acquired from the general-purpose electricity address table (step S605). , jumps to the process indicated by the acquired start address (step S606). Each process from step S607 to step S610 will be individually explained below.

<Public figure fluctuation start process>
First, the normal pattern fluctuation start process in step S607 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 16.

In the ordinary figure fluctuation start process, data setting processing is executed on the condition that ordinary figure side reservation information is stored (step S701: YES) (step S702). In the data setting process, the data stored in the first area 117a of the general figure holding area 116 is moved to the ordinary figure execution area 118. Thereafter, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the storage area of the general drawing holding area 116. This data shift process is a process that sequentially shifts the data stored in the first to fourth areas 117a to 117d to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first area 117a, and also The data in each area is shifted in the following order: first area 117a, third area 117c→second area 117b, fourth area 117d→third area 117c. Further, in the data setting process, data is set so that the display contents of the general figure reservation display section 39b are updated in accordance with the current reduction in the number of ordinary figure side reservation information.

After executing the data setting process, an acceptance determination process is executed (step S703). In the acceptance determination process, the acceptance determination table is read from the main side ROM 73, and the readout acceptance determination table is used to determine the general purpose random number counter C4 in the general purpose card side pending information that is the target of the current acceptance determination process. Match numerical information. In this case, as already explained, there is a 98% probability that the winning result will be accepted.

If the result of the acceptance determination process is an acceptance winning result (step S704: YES), a stop result setting process for the acceptance winning result is executed (step S705). Specifically, information regarding the stop mode of the accepted winning result pattern that is to be finally stopped and displayed in the current continuous display on the common figure display section 39a is read from the main side ROM 73 and stored in the main side RAM 74. Note that one type of pattern stopping mode may be set for the accepted winning result, or a plurality of types of stopping modes may be set for the accepted winning result.

If the result of the acceptance determination process is not an accepted winning result (step S704: NO), a stop result setting process for an unsuccessful result is executed (step S706). Specifically, information on the stop mode of the picture for the missed result that is to be finally stopped and displayed on the regular picture display section 39a during the current display continuation is read from the main side ROM 73 and stored in the main side RAM 74. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the accepted winning result.

After any one of the stop result setting processes is executed, a process for specifying a regular figure fluctuation period is executed (step S707). Thereafter, the variable display of the pattern on the ordinary figure display section 39a is started (step S708). A variable display table for ordinary figures is stored in advance in the main side ROM 73 as a table referred to by the main side MPU 72 when the symbols are displayed in a variable manner on the ordinary figure display section 39a. When a variable display of a pattern is executed in the ordinary figure display section 39a, the same variable display table is used regardless of the result of the acceptance determination process. When a variable display of a symbol is performed in the ordinary figure display section 39a, the variable display of a symbol according to a predetermined pattern is repeated. Control data for one revolution is set. Therefore, when a variable display of a symbol is performed in the ordinary figure display section 39a, the variable display table for ordinary figures is repeatedly used until immediately before final display is performed. After that, 1 is added to the value of the general electric power counter (step S709). As a result, the value of the regular map and power counter becomes "1" corresponding to the regular map changing process (step S608).

FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the process for specifying the regular pattern fluctuation period in step S707. First, it is determined whether or not the number of pieces of general figure side reservation information stored in the first area 117a to fourth area 117d of the ordinary figure holding area 116 is equal to or greater than the reference number (step S801). Specifically, the reference number is two.

When a negative determination is made in step S801, a lottery process for selecting a period is executed (step S802). In this lottery process, numerical information is acquired from a random number counter that is updated periodically (for example, every 4 milliseconds) in the main side RAM 74, and the acquired numerical information is stored in a period selection table stored in advance in the main side ROM 73. Verify against. The period selection table is set so that the selection result will be selected with a probability of 1/500.

If the result of the lottery process for period selection is not a selected winning result but a losing result (step S803: NO), the first display duration period is selected as the display duration period of the current display duration time (step S804). As already explained, the first display duration period is 0.45 seconds. If the result of the lottery process for period selection is a selection winning result (step S803: YES), the second display duration period is selected as the display duration period of the current display duration time (step S805). As already explained, the second display duration period is 10.4 seconds. In other words, if the number of pieces of general map side pending information is less than the standard number, the first display duration period will be selected unless a selection winning result is obtained in the lottery process for period selection, and the first display continuation period will be selected in the lottery process for period selection. If the selection result is a winning result, the second display duration period is selected. Since the probability of this selection winning result is 1/500, the probability of a jackpot result in the low probability mode (specifically has a probability lower than 1/200). However, this is not limited to this, and because the probability of a selected winning result is set to 1/100, etc., the probability of a selected winning result is determined by the reservation information on the first special drawing side or the second It may be configured such that the probability of a jackpot result is higher than the probability of a jackpot result (specifically 1/200) in a low probability mode triggered by reservation information on the special drawing side, and the probability of a selected winning result is set to 1/200. As a result, the probability of the selection winning result is increased by the probability of a jackpot result in the low probability mode (specifically, 1 /200) may have the same configuration.

On the other hand, if the number of pieces of general map side pending information is equal to or greater than the reference number, an affirmative determination is made in step S801, and the third display duration period is selected as the display duration period of the current display duration time (step S806). . In other words, when the number of pieces of general figure side pending information is equal to or greater than the reference number, the third display continuation period is reliably selected without executing the lottery process. As already explained, the third display duration period is 1 second.

When any one of the processes from step S804 to step S806 is executed, information on the display duration selected at any one of steps S804 to S806 is set in the general figure side timer counter of the main side RAM 74 (step S807). The numerical information set in the general map side timer counter is updated in the timer update process of step S210 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

<Processing during normal map fluctuation>
Next, the routine map fluctuation process in step S608 in the regular map/university electricity control process (FIG. 15) will be described.

In the regular figure fluctuation processing, it is determined whether the timing is during the display continuation cycle and before the final display. Specifically, when the value of the timer counter on the regular figure side that measures the display duration of the current display duration is 0.4 seconds remaining, it is determined that the timing is before final display. If the display is not yet finalized, a process for regularly changing the display mode of the picture in the ordinary picture display section 39a is executed. This regular change continues until it is time to start final display. Further, this regular change is performed in a fixed manner regardless of whether or not the result is an accepted winning result. Moreover, when the timing for final display has come, the display mode of the picture on the ordinary figure display section 39a is set to the display mode corresponding to the determination result of the current acceptance determination process. Then, by adding 1 to the value of the general map and general power counter, the value of the counter is updated from the value corresponding to the general map changing process to the one corresponding to the general map determining process.

<Public map confirmation process>
Next, the regular map confirmation process in step S609 in the regular map general electricity control process (FIG. 15) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 18.

By determining whether or not the value of the timer counter that measures the display duration of the current display duration is "0", the final display period of the current display duration (specifically, 0. 4 seconds) have elapsed (step S901). If the final display period has elapsed (step S901: YES), it is determined whether the result of the acceptance determination process in the current display continuation is an acceptance winning result (step S902). If it is not an accepted winning result (step S902: NO), after clearing the value of the general map general electricity counter to "0" (step S903), the present general public map confirmation process is ended.

If it is an accepted winning result (step S902: YES), "1" is set as information on the number of times the special prize winning device 35 is opened and closed in the normal power release counter provided in the main side RAM 74 (step S904). Further, "10" is set in the ordinary power winning counter provided in the main side RAM 74 as information on the upper limit number of winnings to the special winning device 35 in the current acceptance execution state (step S905). Further, information corresponding to 0.1 seconds is set in the timer counter on the regular figure side as information on the opening duration period of the special winning device 35 (step S906). In addition, by starting to output a drive signal to the opening/closing drive section 47, the special winning device 35 is placed in an accepting state (step S907). Thereafter, add 1 to the general electricity counter. As a result, the value of the general electricity counter becomes "3", which corresponds to the general electricity disconnection process (step S610).

<Processing during power outage>
Next, the general electric power opening process in step S610 in the general electric power control process (FIG. 15) will be explained.

In the normal electricity release process, when a winning is occurring in the special winning device 35, a value corresponding to the number of winnings is subtracted from the value of the general electricity winning counter in the main side RAM 74. When the value of the general power winning counter is "0", the value of the general power open counter in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0", and furthermore, by stopping the output of the drive signal to the opening/closing drive section 47. The special winning device 35 is placed in a non-accepting state. Then, the value of the general electricity counter is cleared to "0". Thereby, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the general-purpose figure and electric power control process becomes the general-purpose figure fluctuation start process (step S607). In addition, even if the value of the general electricity prize counter is not "0", if the value of the general electricity side timer counter in the main side RAM 74 is "0", the general electricity winning counter and the ordinary electricity prize counter in the main side RAM 74 are By clearing the value of the power release counter to "0" and further stopping the output of the drive signal to the opening/closing drive unit 47, the special winning device 35 is brought into a non-accepting state. Then, the value of the general electricity counter is cleared to "0". Thereby, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the general-purpose figure and electric power control process becomes the general-purpose figure fluctuation start process (step S607).

<Relationship between the display duration period of the common figure display section 39a and the acceptance state of the special prize winning device 35>
Next, the relationship between the display duration period of the common figure display section 39a and the acceptance state of the special prize winning device 35 will be explained with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 19(a) shows the period during which the game ball is passing through the through winning part 34, and FIG. 19(b) shows the period during which the game ball exists in the position where winning to the special winning device 35 is possible. FIG. 19(c) shows a period in which the display continuation is executed in the common figure display section 39a, FIG. 19(d) shows a period in which the special winning device 35 is in the acceptance state, and FIG. e) indicates the number of pending reservation information on the general map side.

As already explained, all the game balls that flow into the left area PA2 will enter the through winning section 34, and if the game balls continue to be launched so as to flow down the left side area PA2, the game balls will enter the through winning section 34. The game ball reaches the position at a cycle of 0.6 seconds. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 19(a), the timing of t1, the timing of t3, the timing of t6, the timing of t8, the timing of t10, the timing of t12, the timing of t14, the timing of t16, the timing of t19, and the timing of t22. A game ball will be won in the through winning section 34 in each case.

The through-winning section 34 has a through-hole, and by passing through the through-hole, a winning will occur in the through-winning section 34, and the game ball that has won the through-winning section 34 will flow down the gaming area PA as it is. continue. Then, the game ball that has won in the through winning section 34 reaches a position where it can be won in the special winning device 35 within a range of 0.65 seconds to 0.7 seconds after winning in the through winning section 34. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 19(b), the game ball that enters the through winning section 34 at the timing t1 reaches the position where it can enter the special winning device 35 at the timing t4, and at the timing t3. The game ball that entered the through prize section 34 reaches the position where it can enter the special prize device 35 at the timing t7, and the game ball that entered the through prize section 34 at the timing t6 receives the special prize at the timing t9. The game ball that has reached the position where it can be won into the device 35 and entered the through prize section 34 at the timing t8 reaches the position where it can be won into the special winning device 35 at the timing t11, and at the timing t10. The game ball that entered the through prize section 34 at the timing reaches the position where it can enter the special prize device 35 at the timing t13, and the game ball that entered the through prize section 34 at the timing t12 reaches the position where it can win the prize at the timing t15. The game ball that has reached the position where it can enter the special winning device 35 and has entered the through prize section 34 at the timing t16 reaches the position where it can enter the special winning device 35 at the timing t20, The game ball that has won in the through winning section 34 at the timing t19 will reach the position where it can be won in the special winning device 35 at the timing t23.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 19(c), when a prize is entered in the through-winning section 34 at timing t1, when the pending information on the normal drawing side is not stored on hold, the normal drawing is transferred from the timing t1 to the timing t2, as shown in FIG. 19(c). As shown in FIG. 19(c), the display continues on the display section 39a, and the winning in the through prize section 34 occurs at the timing t3, when the normal figure side reservation information is not stored on hold, as shown in FIG. 19(c). The continuous display on the ordinary figure display section 39a occurs over the timing of t5. When these display continuation times are started, the display of these display continuation times is continued due to no selection winning result in the lottery process for period selection (step S802) in the process of specifying the regular figure fluctuation period (FIG. 17). All periods are the first display continuation period. After the display continuation of the first display continuation period ends, the special prize winning device 35 enters the acceptance state at each of timing t2 and timing t5, as shown in FIG. 19(d). As already explained, the first display duration period is 0.45 seconds, and even if the acceptance execution state is subsequently started, the period during which the acceptance state of the special winning prize device 35 is maintained in the acceptance execution state is 0. .1 second, the total period of 0.55 seconds is shorter than the firing period of the game ball, 0.6 seconds. Therefore, during the continuous display of the common symbol display section 39a and the acceptance execution state of the special winning device 35, no new winnings will occur in the through prize section 34, and as shown in FIG. 19(e), the common symbol side Pending information is not stored.

In addition, the game ball that has won in the through winning section 34 at the timing t1 is entered into the special winning device 35 at the timing t4, which is the timing after the acceptance execution state of the special winning device 35 triggered by the game ball ends. At the same time as the game ball reaches the position where it is possible to win, the game ball that wins in the through winning section 34 at the timing t3 is the timing t7, which is the timing after the acceptance execution state of the special winning device 35 triggered by the game ball ends. Then, the player reaches a position where it is possible to win a prize in the special prize winning device 35. Therefore, these game balls will not enter a prize in the special prize winning device 35 which is in the acceptance execution state triggered by the game ball itself. Furthermore, to explain the continuous display of the normal figure display section 39a from the timing of t3 to the timing of t5 as an example, a game ball is fired one game ball before the game ball that enters the through prize section 34 at the timing of t3. The game ball reaches the position where it can win the special winning device 35 at timing t4, but after the game ball passes the position where it can win the special winning device 35, the game ball reaches the position where it can win the special prize device 35. The acceptance execution state of the special winning device 35 is started, triggered by the game ball that has won in the through winning section 34 after the ball. Therefore, in a situation where the first display continuation period is selected as the display continuation period of the general figure display section 39a, basically no prizes are awarded to the special prize winning device 35.

As shown in FIG. 19(c), as shown in FIG. 19(c), as shown in FIG. Display continuation times occur. When the display continuation time is started, the selection process in the period selection lottery process (step S802) in the regular pattern fluctuation period identification process (FIG. 17) results in a winning result, so that the display of the relevant display continuation time is continued. The period is the second display continuation period. As already explained, the second display duration period is 10.4 seconds, and even if the acceptance execution state is started subsequently, the period during which the acceptance execution state of the special winning prize device 35 is maintained due to the acceptance execution state is Since it is 0.1 second, the total period of 10.5 seconds is longer than four times the firing period of the game ball. Therefore, at the timing of t8, the timing of t10, the timing of t12, and the timing of t14 included in the period from the timing of t6 to the timing of t18 corresponding to these total periods, as shown in FIG. 34 occurs, and as shown in FIG. 19(e), the normal figure side pending information is held and stored at each timing. Then, at timing t14, the number of pending storage pieces of general figure side pending information reaches the upper limit number.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 19(d), at timing t18, the acceptance execution state of the special prize winning device 35 triggered by the display continuation cycle started at timing t6 ends, and the state shown in FIG. 19(c) is reached. As shown in FIG. 19, at the timing t18, a new display continuation time is started in the general figure display section 39a, and as shown in FIG. Ru. In this case, the process for specifying the general pattern fluctuation period in the new display continuation time (FIG. 17) is executed in a situation where the number of pending items in the general pattern side reservation information is equal to or greater than the standard number (specifically, 2 items). In the specific processing, the third display duration period is selected as the display duration period. As already explained, the third display duration period is 1 second, and even if the acceptance execution state is started subsequently, the period during which the acceptance execution state of the special winning prize device 35 is maintained due to the acceptance execution state is 0. Since it is 1 second, the total period of 1.1 seconds is longer than the firing cycle of the game ball. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 19(a), at the timing t19, which is before the timing at which it is possible to start a new display continuation time of the common figure display section 39a, a new display is sent to the through prize section 34 as shown in FIG. 19(a). A winning occurs, and as shown in FIG. 19(e), at the timing t19, the normal figure side pending information is newly acquired, and the number of pending memory of the normal figure side pending information becomes the upper limit number. As a result, when the number of reserved stored information on the common figure side is equal to or greater than the reference number and the third display duration period is selected as the display duration period of the common figure display section 39a, the information flows down the left area PA2. By continuing to shoot the game ball, the situation in which the third display duration period is selected continues.

However, the above-mentioned total period of 1.1 seconds is shorter than twice the firing period of the game ball. Therefore, the number of game balls that are won in the through prize section 34 during the total period of the display continuation of the third display continuation period and the acceptance execution state of the special prize winning device 35 triggered by the said display continuation is basically one. Therefore, there are at most two pieces. In this case, even if the number of pending storage information on the general drawing side exceeds the standard number due to the selection of the second display duration period, the number of display continuations in the third display duration period and the relevant display continuation time will be used as a trigger. Winning a prize in the through winning section 34 during the total period of the third display continuation period of the acceptance execution state of the special winning device 35 and one time of the acceptance execution state of the special winning device 35 triggered by the display continuation time If this does not occur once, the situation in which the third display duration period is selected cannot be continued. Therefore, in the situation where the third display duration period is selected, attention is paid to whether or not the game ball wins in the through winning section 34, so it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Here, in a situation where the number of reserved stored information on the regular symbol side is equal to or greater than the reference number and the third display duration period is repeatedly selected as the display duration period of the regular symbol display section 39a, the situation is triggered by the reserved information on the first special symbol side. When a jackpot result is selected in the validity determination process and the first opening/closing execution mode occurs, the process automatically ends. In other words, when the first opening/closing execution mode is entered, the special electric winning device 36 will be opened and closed, and a large number of game balls will be paid out by causing a winning to the special electric winning device 36. The special electric winning device 36 is provided in the right area PA3, and if the firing operation continues so as to flow down the right area PA3, no winning will occur in the through winning part 34 provided in the left area PA2. The maximum period of time required for all the display continuation times of the upper limit number of general figure side pending information and the end of the acceptance execution state of the special prize winning device 35 is longer than the minimum period required until the first opening/closing execution mode ends. It's also short. Furthermore, the longest period required for all the display continuation times of the upper limit number of normal figure side reservation information and the end of the acceptance execution state of the special prize winning device 35 is one round game in the first opening/closing execution mode. shorter than the minimum period required to complete. Therefore, the situation in which the third display duration period is selected as the display duration period of the general figure display section 39a can basically be ended when the first opening/closing execution mode occurs, and the third It is possible to prevent the situation in which the display duration period is selected from continuing for an excessively long time.

The third display continuation period is selected when the display continuation period is started in a situation where more than a reference number (specifically, two) of general figure side reservation information is stored. Therefore, a situation in which the third display duration period is selected occurs after the display continuation times according to the second display duration period have occurred. In addition, when the third display duration period is selected as described above, if the acceptance execution state does not occur, the next display duration time can be started after the display duration time in the general figure display section 39a has started. The period from the start of the display continuation on the regular figure display section 39a to the end of the acceptance execution state is 1.1 seconds even if the acceptance execution state occurs. In this case, the probability of winning the acceptance execution state in the internal lottery corresponding to the occurrence of the continuous display is set to a high probability, specifically 98%. Therefore, when a continuous display occurs, an acceptance execution state generally occurs. In addition, in a situation where the game ball continues to be launched so as to flow down the left side area PA2, basically one game ball is placed in the position where the ball can enter the special winning device 35 every 0.6 seconds, which is the game ball launch cycle. The game ball will arrive at a rate of , but depending on the manner in which the game ball flows down, an error of about 0.1 seconds may occur. Therefore, if the display continuation times in which the third display continuation period is selected are repeatedly selected, a prize will be won in the special prize winning device 35 with a probability of about 1/11. Specifically, regarding the case of FIG. 19, the acceptance execution state of the special prize winning device 35 from the timing t21 to the timing t24 after the display continuation times of the third display duration period from the timing t18 to the timing t21 has ended. As shown in FIG. 19(b) at timing t23, which is a timing in the middle of Become. The number of game balls paid out when a winning occurs in the special winning device 35 is 11. In other words, in a configuration in which when 11 game balls are supplied to the left area PA2, there is a possibility that one of them will win in the special winning device 35, the occurrence of winning in the special winning device 35 will result in 11 game balls being supplied to the left area PA2. game balls are paid out. Therefore, if the game ball continues to be launched so as to flow down the left area PA2 in a situation where the display continuation times that lead to the selection of the third display continuation period are repeatedly selected, the player's ball will be The number of balls held by the player is increased or decreased repeatedly by about 11 balls, and it is possible to prevent the number of balls held by the player from increasing or decreasing during the period in which the display continuation times in which the third display continuation period is selected are repeatedly selected.

According to the embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

A through winning section 34 and a special winning device 35 are provided in the left area PA2, and when an acceptance winning result is determined in the acceptance determination process executed based on the winning of a game ball in the through winning section 34, the special winning device is activated. 35 is in the acceptance state. Further, when the special winning device 35 enters the accepting state, the special winning device 35 enters the accepting state after the display continuation including the fluctuating display of the symbols is executed in the common figure display section 39a. This allows the player to predict in advance that the special prize winning device 35 will be in the accepting state. In this case, if the third display duration period is set as the display duration period of the display duration time, it is possible to win a prize using the special winning device 35 in a situation where the special winning device 35 is in the accepting state. While the game ball can reach the position, if the first display duration is set as the display duration of the display duration, the special winning device 35 is in the accepting state. Basically, the game ball does not reach the position where winning in the device 35 is possible. As a result, the player expects that the third display duration period will be set as the predetermined period, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, since the above situation can be caused by adjusting the display duration of the display duration, the control for switching the special prize winning device 35 between the acceptance state and the non-acceptance state becomes complicated. It is possible to achieve the excellent effects described above without any problems.

Regardless of which of the first display duration period and the third display duration period is selected as the display duration period of the regular display unit 39a, the control mode of the special prize winning device 35 in the acceptance execution state is constant. be. This makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects described above while simplifying the configuration of the control process for switching the special prize winning device 35 between the accepting state and the non-accepting state.

The first display continuation period during which no prizes to the special prize winning device 35 basically occur is shorter than the third display continuation period during which prizes to the special prize winning device 35 may occur at a predetermined frequency. It becomes. This makes it possible to prevent one display continuation from continuing excessively, which corresponds to the fact that no prizes are won on the special prize winning device 35 basically.

The third display duration period is a period longer than the game ball firing cycle, and the first display duration period is less than the game ball firing cycle. As a result, in a situation where the third display duration period is set as the display duration period of the regular display unit 39a, one or more game balls are supplied to the position where winning is possible in the through winning unit 34. On the other hand, in a situation where the first display duration period is set, it is possible to suppress the number of game balls that are wasted in the range where one display duration is executed. becomes possible.

In the left area PA2, the through winning part 34 is provided upstream of the special winning device 35, and the game ball that has won in the through winning part 34 can reach the position where it can enter the special winning device 35. Thereby, it becomes possible to generate both a prize in the through prize winning section 34 and a prize in the special prize winning device 35 with one game ball. In this case, the game ball that has won in the through winning section 34 will surely reach the position where it can enter the special winning device 35. This makes it easier to identify the relative relationship between the timing at which the game ball reaches the position where it can enter the special winning device 35 with respect to the timing at which the continuous display of the common figure display section 39a starts, so that the display continues. It becomes easier to adjust the ease with which game balls enter the special prize winning device 35 with respect to the setting of the period.

The first display continuation period is a period shorter than the minimum period required for the game ball that has won in the through winning section 34 to reach the position where it can enter the special winning device 35. As a result, if the first display duration period is set in the continuous display period of the general figure display section 39a, the game ball that won the through prize section 34 and started the continuous display period of the general figure display section 39a. It becomes possible to prevent the player from winning a prize in the special prize winning device 35.

The first display duration period is the firing order of the previous game ball for the predetermined game ball when the measurement of the first display duration period is started when a predetermined game ball enters the through winning section 34. This is the period that elapses after the game ball passes through the position where it can enter the special winning device 35. As a result, if the first display duration period is set in the continuous display time of the common figure display section 39a, a predetermined game that wins in the through winning section 34 and starts the continuous display time of the common figure display section 39a. Both the ball and the game ball in the firing order one ball before the predetermined game ball enter a prize in the special winning device 35 which is in an accepting state based on the winning of the through prize section 34 by the predetermined game ball. It is possible to prevent this from happening. Therefore, if the first display continuation period is set in the display continuation times of the common figure display section 39a, it is possible to basically make it impossible to win a prize in the special prize winning device 35.

When the third display duration period is set in the display continuation time of the regular figure display section 39a, when game balls are continuously supplied to the position where winning is possible in the special winning device 35, the display is sent to the special winning device 35. The probability of winning a prize is 1/11, whereas when one game ball wins in the special winning device 35, 11 game balls are awarded to the player. As a result, when the third display duration period is set, it becomes possible for the player to aim for winning in the special winning device 35 while not substantially increasing or decreasing the number of game balls owned by the player.

If the first display duration period is set in the display continuation time of the common figure display section 39a, even if the acceptance execution state of the special prize winning device 35 occurs after the display continuation time, the display continuation time of the common figure display section 39a The period required to start anew is shorter than the firing cycle of the game balls. Therefore, when the first display continuation period is set, the ordinary figure side reservation information is basically not acquired. As a result, if the first display continuation period is set, the display continuation time of the general figure display section 39a will start at the timing when a game ball wins in the through winning section 34, so the first display In a situation where a continuation period is set, the relationship between the timing when a game ball reaches a position where it can enter the special winning device 35 and the timing when the special winning device 35 enters the receiving state is determined at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10. It becomes possible to achieve the relationship assumed in . Therefore, when the first display duration period is set, it becomes easy to design so that basically no winnings to the special winning device 35 occur.

When the third display duration period is set in the display continuation time of the common figure display section 39a, regardless of whether or not the acceptance execution state of the special prize winning device 35 occurs after the display continuation time, the common figure display section 39a The period required to newly start the display continuation times is longer than the firing cycle of the game ball. Therefore, when the third display continuation period is set, the display continuation of the common figure display section 39a is likely to start at a timing different from the timing at which a prize to the through prize section 34 is won. Therefore, when the third display duration period is set, the relationship between the timing when the game ball reaches the position where the ball can enter the special winning device 35 and the timing when the special winning device 35 enters the acceptance execution state is determined. It is possible to make it irregular.

When the display continuation time of the common figure display section 39a is started in a situation where more than the reference number of common figure side pending information is not stored on hold, a first display continuation period is set as the display continuation period of the continuous display time, When the display continuation time of the common figure display section 39a is started in a situation where more than the reference number of general figure side pending information is held and stored, a third display continuation period is set as the display continuation period of the corresponding display continuous time. . As a result, players who expect to win a prize from the special winning device 35 will pay attention to whether or not the standard number or more of the reservation information on the regular game side is acquired, making it possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

In addition, as already explained, when the third display duration period is set, the display of the common figure display section 39a continues regardless of whether or not the acceptance execution state of the special prize winning device 35 occurs after the display continuation period. The period required to start a new round is longer than the firing cycle of game balls. As a result, the situation in which the third display continuation period is set when the standard number or more of the reservation information on the general figure side is temporarily stored can be maintained by continuously generating prizes in the through prize section 34. becomes possible.

The reference number is set as a plurality of numbers. As a result, in a situation where the first display duration period is set in the display continuation times of the common picture display section 39a, a prize is accidentally won in the through prize section 34 and one piece of common picture side pending information is acquired. Even if the third display duration period is set after that, the third display duration period is not set. Therefore, it becomes possible to make it difficult for a situation in which the third display duration period is set to occur.

When the display continuation of the common figure display section 39a is started in a situation where more than the reference number of common figure side reservation information is held and stored, winnings to the special winning device 35 can be made to occur at a predetermined frequency. A third display duration period is set. As a result, the player's advantage will differ depending on the status of the pending storage of the general figure side pending information, so it is possible to draw the attention of the player to whether or not the general figure side pending information is held and stored. , it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In a situation where the standard number or more of the reservation information on the general map side is not stored on hold, the second display continuation period is set in the display continuation times of the general map display section 39a by being selected and won in the lottery process for period selection. Ru. When the second display continuation period is set, the display continuation time of the general figure display section 39a is renewed regardless of whether or not the acceptance execution state of the special prize winning device 35 occurs after the display continuation time. It becomes possible to win a prize in the through prize winning section 34 with a larger number of game balls than the reference number before the game can be started. As a result, in a situation where the first display duration period is repeatedly set in the display continuation times of the general figure display section 39a, it is possible to trigger a switch to a situation where the third display duration period is set. . Furthermore, such switching can be realized by setting the display duration period.

When the second display duration period is set, it becomes possible to enter game balls equal to or more than the standard number into the through winning section 34, and in this case, the reservation information on the general game side is the standard number. This means that two or more more items will be held and stored. As a result, when the second display duration period is set, it is possible to continue the situation in which the third display duration period is set for a long time in subsequent display continuation times of the general figure display section 39a. Become.

The through winning section 34 and the special winning device 35 are provided in the left area PA2, whereas the special winning device 36 is provided in the right area PA3. As a result, a transition to the opening/closing execution mode occurs in a situation where more than the standard number of general figure side reservation information is held and stored and the third display duration period is repeatedly set in the display continuation times of the general figure display section 39a. In this case, even if the display continuation of the regular figure display section 39a, which is the third display continuation period, is executed in parallel with the opening/closing execution mode, the firing operation is performed with the aim of winning the prize on the special electric prize winning device 36, resulting in a throughput. Since no prize is won in the winning section 34, a situation arises in which more than the reference number of ordinary card side pending information is not stored pending during the opening/closing execution mode. Therefore, it is possible to terminate the situation in which the third display duration period is repeatedly set by using the opening/closing execution mode as a trigger, and to prevent the situation in which the third display duration period is repeatedly set from continuing excessively. It becomes possible to do so.

In addition, the shortest period required from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is such that in a situation where the maximum number of pieces of general-purpose drawing-side holding information is being held and stored, the general-purpose drawing-side holding information of the standard number or more is being held and stored. The period is set to be longer than the longest period required until the continuous display of the ordinary figure display section 39a starts in a situation where the normal figure display section 39a is not in use. Therefore, when the opening/closing execution mode occurs, it is possible to reliably end the situation in which the third display duration period is repeatedly set.

Based on the occurrence of a winning in the special winning device 35, the reservation information on the first special drawing side is acquired, and a win/fail judgment process is executed, and when a jackpot result is selected in the win/fail judgment process, opening/closing is executed. mode occurs. As a result, it is expected that a prize will be won on the special winning device 35, and as a result, whether the second display duration period or the third display duration period will be selected in the display continuation time of the general symbol display section 39a. This makes it possible to attract the attention of players. In addition, in a configuration where the reservation information on the first special drawing side is acquired based on the occurrence of a winning on the first actuating unit 32, even when a winning on the special winning device 35 occurs, the information on the first special drawing on the first special drawing side is acquired. Hold information is obtained. As a result, a player who expects to shift to the opening/closing execution mode not only expects to win a prize in the first operating section 32 but also to win a prize in the special prize device 35, which increases the interest of the game. It becomes possible to aim for improvement.

The first operating section 32, the through winning section 34, and the special winning device 35 are all provided at positions that can be reached by the game ball when the firing operation is performed so as to flow down the left side area PA2. As a result, by performing a firing operation so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2, it is possible to aim at winning with all of the first operating section 32, through winning section 34, and special winning device 35. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while suppressing the firing operation from becoming complicated.

<Another form of the first embodiment>
(1) When the opening/closing execution mode occurs, the general figure side reservation information may be deleted. In this case, if the opening/closing execution mode is entered in a situation where the third display duration is selected, it is possible to use the opening/closing execution mode as a trigger to forcibly shift to a situation where the third display duration is not selected. .

(2) Even if the reservation information on the general drawing side is acquired, the special winning device 35 does not enter the acceptance execution state unless an acceptance winning result is obtained in the acceptance determination process, but if the reservation information on the general drawing side is acquired. It may be configured to ensure that the special winning device 35 is in the acceptance execution state, or it may be configured that the special winning device 35 is in the acceptance execution state with approximately 100% probability when the general figure side reservation information is acquired. good.

(3) In place of the configuration in which the reservation information on the first special symbol side is acquired when a winning occurs in the special prize winning device 35, a configuration may be adopted in which reservation information on the second special symbol side is acquired. In this configuration, for example, a combination of a through winning section 34 and a special winning device 35 is provided in the right area PA3 instead of the second operating section 33, and when the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode, the display on the common figure display section 39a A configuration may be adopted in which the first display duration period is selected in the continuous time, and the third display duration period is selected in the display continuous time of the common figure display section 39a when the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode. As a result, winnings to the special winning device 35 are not possible or difficult to occur when the mode is low probability mode, and winnings to the special winning device 35 are possible or easy to occur when the mode is high probability mode. It becomes possible. In addition, in this configuration, it is necessary to have a configuration in which the reservation information on the second special drawing side is acquired frequently in the high probability mode, so when the third display duration period is selected, the reservation information on the special prize winning device 35 is It is preferable to increase the frequency of winnings. In addition, in this configuration, it is not preferable that the number of balls held by the player increases excessively based on winnings to the special winning device 35, so the number of game balls paid out based on winnings to the special winning device 35 is reduced to 1. It is preferable to set it as two pieces.

(4) In the configuration in which the reservation information on the second special drawing side is acquired when a winning occurs in the special winning device 35 as in the alternative form of (3) above, the second actuating section 33 may be defective. On the other hand, a combination of the through winning part 34 and the special winning device 35 is provided in the upper area PA1, left area PA2, or lower area PA4 so that the game ball can flow down to the first operating part 32 in the gaming area PA. If supplied, a configuration may be adopted in which winnings to the through winning section 34 and special winning device 35 can occur. In this configuration, when the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode, the first display duration period is basically selected in the display duration of the common figure display section 39a, and the second display duration period is selected with a predetermined probability. The third display duration period may be selected in the display continuation times of the common figure display section 39a when the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode. As a result, while in the high probability mode, the reservation information on the second special drawing side is acquired based on the winning in the special winning device 35, even in the low probability mode, the winning in the special winning device 35 is achieved with a predetermined probability. Based on this, it becomes possible to acquire the reservation information on the second special figure side. In addition, in this configuration, it is necessary to have a configuration in which the reservation information on the second special drawing side is acquired frequently in the high probability mode, so when the third display duration period is selected, the reservation information on the special prize winning device 35 is It is preferable to increase the frequency of winnings. In addition, in this configuration, it is not preferable that the number of balls held by the player increases excessively based on winnings to the special winning device 35, so the number of game balls paid out based on winnings to the special winning device 35 is reduced to 1. It is preferable to set it as two pieces.

(5) In the above-mentioned first embodiment and the alternative form of (4) above, depending on the execution mode of the opening execution state of the special winning device 35, it is difficult to win a prize to the special winning device 35 and to the special winning device 35. It is also possible to have a configuration in which there is a gaming state in which winnings are likely to occur. Specifically, in the former gaming state, the opening execution state of the special winning device 35 is performed in the manner described in the first embodiment, and in the latter gaming state, the display of the common figure display section 39a is The opening execution state of the special winning device 35 is made to be performed in such a manner that a winning to the special winning device 35 is likely to occur regardless of the display continuation period in the continuous times. As a result, it is possible to create a state in which a prize is won in the special prize winning device 35 regardless of the number of times the regular symbol display section 39a continues to display. Note that the latter gaming state may be configured to occur when the win/fail lottery mode becomes a high probability mode, or in addition to or in place of this configuration, it may be configured to occur without fail after the opening/closing execution mode ends. . In addition, if the latter gaming state is reached, the latter gaming state may be continued until the next opening/closing execution mode occurs, and if the winning/losing lottery mode is a high probability mode, the latter gaming state may be continued until the next opening/closing execution mode occurs. The latter gaming state may be continued, or the latter gaming state may be continued until a predetermined number of games have been played after the opening/closing execution mode ends. The latter gaming state may be continued until the winning is achieved.

(6) The number of pending pieces of common picture side pending information, which is the standard for setting the third display duration period in the display continuation times of the common picture display section 39a, is not limited to two, but may be one. The number may be three, or the upper limit number may be four. If the reference number is 1, and in a situation where two or more pieces of general-purpose figure-side pending information are held and stored, when the display continuation time of the general-purpose figure display section 39a starts anew, at the said display continuation time. Since the third display duration period is set, it is possible to further increase the player's attention to the fact that the normal figure side pending information is being held and stored.

(7) It is also possible to adopt a structure in which the number of pending pieces of the standard-sized figure side reservation information, which is a reference for setting the third display duration period in the display continuation times of the standard-sized figure display section 39a, changes depending on the gaming state. In this case, the player plays the game while expecting a gaming state with a small reference number of pieces.

(8) The display continuation period in the display continuation times of the general figure display section 39a is not limited to a configuration in which both the second display continuation period and the third display continuation period exist; If a certain target period exists, and a selection winning result is obtained in the period selection lottery process (step S802) in the process of specifying the general pattern fluctuation period (FIG. 17), and the number of pending items in the general pattern side reservation information is If the number is equal to or greater than the reference number, the target period may be set. If the third display duration period is set as the target period, it is necessary to create a situation in which the number of pending information on the general map side is equal to or greater than the standard number, so the third display duration period is set as the first one above. It is preferable to make it longer than the embodiment or to make the reference number smaller.

(9) If the pending information on the general drawing side is acquired in a situation where the continuous display of the general drawing display section 39a cannot be started, and if the corresponding continuous display is started after that, the third display continuation period It is also possible to have a configuration where . In this case, it is possible to increase the frequency with which the third display duration period is set.

(10) When the special electric winning device 36 is in the open state, it is possible to enter the game ball into the special electric winning device 36, and when the special electric winning device 36 is in the closed state, the game ball can be inserted into the special electric winning device 36. The present invention is not limited to a configuration in which it is not possible to enter a game ball into the special electric winning device 36, and even if the special electric winning device 36 is in a closed state, it is possible to enter a game ball into the special electric winning device 36, but it is in an open state. A configuration may be adopted in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter the special electric winning device 36 than in the case of the present invention.

(11) Limited to a configuration in which the third display duration period is reliably set when the display continuation of the common figure display section 39a is started in a situation where more than the standard number of common figure side pending information is held and stored. The configuration may be such that the third display duration period is easily set without being set. Specifically, regardless of the situation in which the standard number or more of the standard number side reservation information is not stored on hold or the situation where the standard number or more of the standard number side reservation information is stored on hold, the standard number display section 39a is displayed. Although a third display duration period may be set in the display continuation times, a situation where more than the reference number of general-purpose figure-side pending information is held and stored is better than a situation in which more than the standard number of general-purpose figure-side held information is not held and stored. A configuration may be adopted in which the third display duration period is more easily set in the display duration times of the ordinary figure display section 39a.

(12) Replacement with a configuration in which the third display duration period is set when more than the reference number of general figure side pending information is held and stored at the timing of determining the display duration period in the display continuation times of the ordinary figure display section 39a. Therefore, if more than the reference number of general figure side pending information is stored on hold at the timing before the data setting process (step S702) in the general figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 16) is executed, the third display duration period is set. The configuration may be set.

<Second embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the processing configuration of the process for specifying the normal pattern fluctuation period in the main MPU 72. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be described, and descriptions of the same configurations as the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

FIG. 20 is a flowchart illustrating a process for specifying a regular pattern fluctuation period in this embodiment. If the number of pieces of general map side reservation information is not equal to or greater than the reference number (step S1001: NO), a lottery process for period selection is executed as in the first embodiment (step S1002), and if it is not a selection winning result. (Step S1003: NO), the first display duration period is selected (Step S1004), and if it is a winning result (Step S1003: YES), the second display duration period is selected (Step S1005).

On the other hand, when the number of pieces of general map side reservation information is equal to or greater than the reference number (step S1001: YES), a lottery process for short-term selection is executed (step S1006). In the lottery process for short-term selection, numerical information is acquired from a random number counter that is updated periodically (for example, every 4 milliseconds) in the main side RAM 74, and the acquired numerical information is used as a short-term selection that is stored in advance in the main side ROM 73. Check against the table for selection. The short-term selection table is set so that a selected winning result will be obtained with a probability of 1/300, which is a higher probability than the probability of a selected winning result in the period selection lottery process in step S1002. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to have a lower probability than the probability of a selected winning result in the period selection lottery process in step S1002, or may be configured to be the same or substantially the same.

If the result of the lottery process for short-term selection is not a selection winning result but a losing result (step S1007: NO), the third display duration period is selected as the display duration period of the current display duration time (step S1008). . On the other hand, if the result of the lottery process for short-term selection is a selection winning result (step S1007: YES), the first display continuation period is selected as the display continuation period of the current display continuation time (step S1004).

When any one of the processes in step S1004, step S1005, and step S1008 is executed, information on the display duration selected in any of these processes is set in the general figure side timer counter of the main side RAM 74 (step S1009). .

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, even if the number of pieces for which the general figure side holding information is held and stored is greater than or equal to the reference number, if the selection winning result is obtained in the lottery process for short-term selection. , the first display duration period is selected instead of the third display duration period. When the first display continuation period is selected, a new game ball is won in the through prize section 34 during the total period of the continuous display of the regular figure display section 39a and the subsequent acceptance execution state of the special prize device 35. I can't expect that. This prevents a situation where the first display duration period is selected instead of the third display duration period as the display duration period of the common symbol display section 39a even in a situation where the number of pending items of the common symbol side reservation information is equal to or greater than the reference number. This makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the display duration period of the common figure display section 39a even in a situation where the number of pending pieces of the normal figure side reservation information is equal to or greater than the reference number.

In addition, if the selection winning result is obtained in the lottery process for short-term selection, the display continuation period of the general figure display section 39a will continue until the pending number of pieces in the general figure side reservation information reaches the standard number or becomes 0 pieces. A configuration may also be adopted in which the first display duration period is reliably selected. This makes it possible to reliably end the situation in which the third display continuation period is selected when a selection winning result is obtained in the lottery process for short-term selection.

<Third embodiment>
In this embodiment, the positions where the through prize winning section 34 and the special winning device 35 are provided in the gaming area PA are different from those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be described, and descriptions of the same configurations as the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

FIG. 21 is a front view of the game board 24 in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 21, the through winning section 34 and the special winning device 35 are provided not in the left area PA2 but in the upper area PA1. In detail, the through winning section 34 is located near the exit of the guiding rail partitioned by the inner rail section 25 and the outer rail section 26, and the passage direction of the guiding rail and the axial direction of the through hole of the through winning section 34 are aligned. They are provided at an angle so that they match. As a result, the game ball launched into the game area PA will surely land in the through prize section 34 even if the game ball flows down either the left side area PA2 or the right side area PA3, and the game ball If the firing continues, winnings will surely occur in the through winning section 34 at the firing cycle of the game balls.

The special prize winning device 35 is provided at a position closer to the left side in the upper area PA1. In addition, the special winning device 35 has an upright wall 48 on the right end of the base body 41, and furthermore, the ball receiving surface 44 and the upper surface of the opening/closing member 43 disposed in the non-receiving position are oriented downwardly to the left. It is installed in In this case, by firing the game ball with such intensity that the game ball hits the upright wall 48, it is possible to reliably make the game ball reach a position where it can win a prize in the special winning device 35.

According to the above configuration, it becomes possible to perform the firing operation of the game ball so that a prize to the through prize winning section 34 will surely occur, and also to ensure that the game ball reaches the position where the special prize winning device 35 can win a prize. It becomes possible to perform the firing operation of the game ball.

In addition, by reducing the number of obstructing members that change the flowing direction of game balls on the upstream side of the through-winning section 34 and the special winning device 35, the arrival cycle of the gaming balls to the through-winning section 34 and the special winning device 35 are reduced. The arrival cycle of the game ball to a position where it is possible to win a prize is likely to be the same or approximately the same as the firing cycle of the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to bring the acquisition mode of the normal figure side reservation information and the winning mode to the special winning device 35 with respect to the selection mode of the display duration in the normal figure display section 39a to be closer to the mode assumed at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10. .

<Fourth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the configuration of the gaming area PA is different from the above-described first embodiment, and this is executed when a winning occurs in the first operating section 32 and when a winning occurs in the special winning device 35. The processing content is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be described, and descriptions of the same configurations as the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

FIG. 22 is a front view of the game board 24 in this embodiment. The game area PA is divided into an upper area PA1, a left area PA2, a right area PA3, and a lower area PA4 by the variable display unit 37, as in the first embodiment. The first actuating section 32 is provided in the lower area PA4 as in the first embodiment. Further, in the left area PA2, a through prize winning section 34 and a special winning device 35 are provided as in the first embodiment. In this case, since the first guide area 49a and the second guide area 49b are also provided in the same manner as in the first embodiment, the game ball flowing down the left side area PA2 will surely enter the through winning section 34, and A game ball that has won a prize in a through prize winning section 34 surely reaches a position where it can win a prize in a special prize winning device 35. Further, the relative positional relationship between the through prize winning section 34 and the special winning device 35 is also the same as in the first embodiment.

In the right side area PA3, the second operating section 33 and the special electric prize winning device 36 in the first embodiment are not provided, and instead, a first general electric power device 121 and a second electric power device 122 are provided. . These first general power device 121 and second general power device 122 cannot win if the firing operation is performed so as to flow down the left side area PA2, and if the firing operation is performed so as to flow down the right side area PA3. By doing so, you can win a prize.

The first general purpose electric device 121 is provided with a first general purpose electric accessory 121a as a guide piece consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the first general electric accessory 121a is in the closed state, the game ball cannot win in the first general electric device 121, and when the first general electric accessory 121a is in the open state, it is possible to win in the first general electric device 121. becomes. The first general electric drive unit 121b for opening and closing the first general electric accessory 121a and the first general electric power detection sensor 121c for detecting the winning game ball of the first electric power device 121 are connected to the main controller 70 and electrically connected to each other. connected. When a drive signal is transmitted from the main side MPU 72 to the first general electric power drive unit 121b, the first general electric accessory 121a becomes an open state, and when the transmission of the drive signal is stopped, the first general electric accessory 121a returns to closed state. Further, the main side MPU 72 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the first general electric power device 121 based on the detection result of the first general electric power detection sensor 121c.

The second general-purpose electric device 122 is provided with a second general-purpose electric accessory 122a as a guide piece consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the second general electric accessory 122a is in the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the second general electric device 122, and when the second general electric accessory 122a is in the open state, it is possible to win a prize in the second electric general electric device 122. becomes. The second general electric drive unit 122b for opening and closing the second general electric accessory 122a and the second general electric power detection sensor 122c for detecting winning game balls in the second electric power device 122 are connected to the main controller 70 and electrically connected to each other. connected. When a drive signal is transmitted from the main side MPU 72 to the second general electric power drive unit 122b, the second general electric accessory 122a becomes an open state, and when the transmission of the drive signal is stopped, the second general electric accessory 122a returns to closed state. Further, the main side MPU 72 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the second general electricity device 122 based on the detection result of the second general electricity detection sensor 122c. These first general power device 121 and second general power device 122 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction with a predetermined interval, with the first general power device 121 facing upward.

Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first actuating unit 32 or the special winning device 35, an internal lottery is performed to win a prize. 121 becomes open. In addition, the second general power device 122 is placed in an open state by winning an internal lottery performed based on the game ball entering the first general power device 121. Regardless of whether a game ball enters either the first general electric power device 121 or the second general electric power device 122, 15 game balls are paid out for each game ball that enters. .

In addition to the first general power device 121 and the second general power device 122, a third general power device 123 is provided. The third general power device 123 is provided downstream of the special winning device 35 in the left area PA2. Therefore, the game balls that have flowed into the left area PA2 and have not won in the special winning device 35 can win in the third normal power device 123. In addition, game balls that have flowed into the left area PA2 and have not won in the special winning device 35 and the third general power device 123 flow into the lower area PA4. The game ball can win a prize in the first operating section 32.

The third general electric power device 123 is provided with a third general electric power accessory 123a as a guide piece consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the third general purpose electric accessory 123a is in the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the third general electric power device 123, and when the third general electric accessory object 123a is in the open state, it is possible to win the third general electric power device 123. becomes. The third general power drive section 123b for opening and closing the third general power accessory 123a and the third general power detection sensor 123c for detecting the winning game ball of the third general power device 123 are connected to the main control device 70 and electrically connected to each other. connected. When a drive signal is transmitted from the main side MPU 72 to the third general electric power drive unit 123b, the third general electric accessory 123a becomes an open state, and when the transmission of the drive signal is stopped, the third general electric accessory 123a returns to closed state. Further, the main side MPU 72 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the third general power device 123 based on the detection result of the third general power detection sensor 123c.

A specific actuation section 124 for generating an opportunity to open the third power supply device 123 is provided on the stage 37a of the variable display unit 37. Specifically, the specific actuation section 124 is formed in the variable display unit 37 so as to be open toward the front at the lateral center of a back wall 125 that defines the back side of the stage 37a. The game ball that has entered the specific operating section 124 is led out to the back side of the game board 24 and discharged downward. A specific detection sensor 124a is provided in the middle of this discharge passage. The specific detection sensor 124a is electrically connected to the main control device 70, and the main MPU 72 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the specific operating section 124 based on the detection result of the specific detection sensor 124a. When a game ball enters the specific operation unit 124, five game balls are paid out for each game ball that enters. Incidentally, game balls that have been supplied onto the stage 37a but have not entered the specific operating section 124 flow into the lower area PA4. The game ball that has flowed into the lower area PA4 can enter the first operating section 32. The third power supply device 123 enters the open state by winning an internal lottery executed based on the game ball entering the specific operating unit 124. When a game ball enters the third general electric field device 123, payout of 15 game balls is executed for each game ball that enters.

Game balls entering the inlet 126 provided at the upper left of the variable display unit 37 are supplied onto the stage 37a. A game ball that has reached the right side of the left end of the variable display unit 37 in the upper area PA1 can enter the introduction port 126 in the process of flowing down toward the left side area PA2. However, in this way, the game ball that has reached the right side of the left end of the variable display unit 37 in the upper area PA1 does not reliably enter the inlet 126 in the process of flowing down towards the left side area PA2, Only one game ball out of ten game balls flowing down will enter the ball. In addition, the game balls that have entered the introduction port 126 are supplied onto the stage 37a through the warp passage 127 provided in the variable display unit 37, but all of the game balls supplied onto the stage 37a are Only game balls that do not enter the actuating part 124 and whose lateral movement speed is sufficiently decelerated in front of the specific actuating part 124, which is the lateral center on the stage 37a, move to the specific actuating part 124. Enter the ball. This ball entry probability is such that one game ball will enter the ball out of ten game balls supplied on the stage 37a. With the above configuration, a game ball flowing down toward the left side area PA2 can enter the specific operating section 124, and a game ball flowing down toward the right side area PA3 cannot enter the specific operating section 124. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and although a game ball flowing down toward the right side area PA3 can enter the specific actuation section 124, a game ball flowing down toward the left side area PA2 is more likely to enter the right side area. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the ball enters the specific actuation section 124 more easily than the game ball flowing down toward PA3.

In addition, when the game ball is launched so as to reach the left side of the variable display unit 37 in the upper area PA1, the game ball will surely flow down the left side area PA2 without entering the introduction port 126. It happens. Then, when the game ball is fired in this firing mode, the game ball will definitely win in the through winning section 34.

A first general figure display section 131, a second general figure display section 132, a third general figure display section 133, a fourth general figure display section 134, and a first general figure display section are provided in the lower right side of the gaming area PA in an area through which the game ball does not pass. A figure reservation display section 135, a second ordinary figure reservation display section 136, and a third ordinary figure reservation display section 137 are provided. Each of the first general figure display section 131 to the fourth general figure display section 134 is constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner. In this case, it is impossible to perform complicated display like the symbol display device 51 in the first general figure display part 131 to the fourth general figure display part 134, but the first general figure display part 131 to the fourth general figure display part 134 It becomes possible to reduce the processing load for controlling the display of the display unit 134. However, the display device is not limited to this, and may be configured by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix display. In addition, the patterns displayed in the first general figure display section 131 to the fourth general figure display section 134 include a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are displayed, and a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed. Possible configurations include a configuration in which , or a configuration in which multiple types of colors are displayed. Further, the display range of the first general figure display section 131 to the fourth general figure display section 134 is narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 51. Furthermore, the display range of both the first general figure display part 131 to the fourth general figure display part 134 and the first general figure reservation display part 135 to the third general figure reservation display part 137 is also the display range of the symbol display device 51. The area is narrower than the display surface. As a result, the player's attention is focused on the symbol display device 51 rather than on the first normal pattern display section 131 to the fourth normal pattern display section 134 and the first normal pattern pending display section 135 to the third normal pattern pending display section 137. It is possible to increase it.

Based on the game ball entering the first actuating section 32 or the special winning device 35, a display continuation including a variable display of symbols is performed in the first common figure display section 131. Further, the first general figure reservation display section 135 is provided at a position adjacent to the first ordinary figure display section 131. Information corresponding to the number of game balls won in the first actuating unit 32 or the special winning device 35 is held as the first general game side reservation information up to a maximum of four, and the reservation is indicated by the lighting of the first general game ball reservation display section 135. The number is now displayed.

Based on the game ball entering the first general-purpose electric device 121, the second general-purpose figure display section 132 performs a display continuation including a variable display of the symbols. Further, the second general figure reservation display section 136 is provided at a position adjacent to the second ordinary figure display section 132. The information corresponding to the number of game balls that have won in the first general electricity device 121 is held as second general drawing side holding information up to a maximum of four, and the number of held balls is displayed by lighting the second general drawing holding display section 136. It has become so.

Based on the game ball entering the specific operation section 124, the third general figure display section 133 performs a display continuation including a variable display of the symbols. Further, the third general figure reservation display section 137 is provided at a position adjacent to the third ordinary figure display section 133. Information corresponding to the number of game balls that have won in the specific operating section 124 is held up to a maximum of 4 as third general drawing side holding information, and the number of held balls is displayed by lighting the third general drawing holding display section 137. It has become.

Based on the game ball entering the through prize winning section 34, a display continuation including a variable display of symbols is performed in the fourth normal figure display section 134. Here, the fourth common figure display section 134 is not provided with a common figure pending display section. In other words, the 4th common map side reservation information acquired when a prize is won in the through winning section 34 is not stored on a reservation basis.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lottery drawings on the main side MPU 72>
Next, the electrical configuration for performing various lottery drawings in the main MPU 72 will be described using FIG. 23.

During the game, the main MPU 72 uses various counter information to control the winning lottery, the display settings of the first normal pattern display section 131 to the fourth normal pattern display section 134, the setting of the display continuation recurrent effect of the symbol display device 51, etc. More specifically, as shown in FIG. The general random number counter C11 is used for the lottery to decide whether or not to put the general electric device 123 into the open execution state, and the reach random number is used for the reach random number when the winning variation occurs in the presentation of continuous display on the symbol display device 51. A counter C12, a random number initial value counter C13 used for setting the initial value of the general purpose random number counter C11, and a fluctuation type counter C14 used for determining the display duration of the display continuation times on the first general purpose figure display section 131. , will be used.

Each of the counters C11 to C14 is a loop counter in which "1" is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. Each counter C11 to C14 is updated at short intervals. The numerical information of the general random number counter C11 is stored in the first general drawing holding area 141 provided in the main side RAM 74 when a winning occurs in the first actuating unit 32 or the special winning device 35, and When a winning occurs in the device 121, the data is stored in the second general drawing holding area 142 provided in the main side RAM 74, and when a winning occurs in the specific operation section 124, the third general drawing holding area 142 provided in the main side RAM 74 is stored. It is stored in the drawing holding area 143, and when a winning in the through winning section 34 occurs, it is stored in the fourth general drawing execution area 144 provided in the main side RAM 74.

The first general drawing holding area 141 includes a first area 141a, a second area 141b, a third area 141c, and a fourth area 141d. , the numerical information of the general-purpose telephone random number counter C11 is stored in one of the areas 141a to 141d as the first general-purpose telephone side pending information. In this case, the first area 141a to the fourth area 141d are divided into areas such as the first area 141a → second area 141b → Numerical information is stored in chronological order from the third area 141c to the fourth area 141d. By providing the four areas 141a to 141d in this manner, a maximum of four winning histories of game balls to the first operating section 32 or the special winning device 35 can be stored on hold. Note that the number that can be held and stored in the first general drawing holding area 141 is not limited to four, but is arbitrary, and may be any other number such as two, three, or five or more. , may be singular. In addition to the first area 141a to the fourth area 141d, the first general figure holding area 141 is provided with a first general figure execution area 141e. The first general-purpose figure execution area 141e is an area in which the first general-purpose figure-side pending information for which the open determination process is to be performed is stored when the first general-purpose figure display section 131 starts display continuation times. The first general figure side pending information stored in the first area 141a is shifted to the first general figure execution area 141e when starting the display continuation time of the first general figure display section 131.

The second general drawing reservation area 142 includes a first area 142a, a second area 142b, a third area 142c, and a fourth area 142d. Numerical information of the counter C11 is stored in any of the areas 142a to 142d as second general map side pending information. In this case, in the first area 142a to the fourth area 142d, if winnings to the first general electricity device 121 occur multiple times in a row, the first area 142a → the second area 142b → the third area 142c → Numerical information is stored in chronological order in the fourth area 142d. By providing the four areas 142a to 142d in this manner, the winning history of game balls placed on the first general electric device 121 can be stored in abeyance at a maximum of four. Note that the number that can be held and stored in the second general drawing holding area 142 is not limited to four, but is arbitrary, and may be any other number such as two, three, or five or more. , may be singular. In addition to the first area 142a to fourth area 142d, the second general pattern holding area 142 is provided with a second general pattern execution area 142e. The second general-purpose figure execution area 142e is an area in which second general-purpose figure side pending information for which open determination processing is to be performed is stored when the second general-purpose figure display section 132 starts display continuation times. The second general figure side pending information stored in the first area 142a is shifted to the second general figure execution area 142e when the display continuation time of the second general figure display section 132 is started.

The third general drawing holding area 143 includes a first area 143a, a second area 143b, a third area 143c, and a fourth area 143d. The numerical information is stored in any of the areas 143a to 143d as the third general map side pending information. In this case, in the first area 143a to the fourth area 143d, if winnings to the specific operating section 124 occur multiple times in succession, the first area 143a → second area 143b → third area 143c → fourth area Numerical information is stored chronologically in the order of area 143d. By providing the four areas 143a to 143d in this manner, the winning history of game balls placed in the specific operating section 124 can be stored in abeyance at a maximum of four. Note that the number that can be held and stored in the third general drawing holding area 143 is not limited to four, but is arbitrary, and may be any other number such as two, three, or five or more. , may be singular. In addition to the first area 143a to fourth area 143d, the third general pattern holding area 143 is provided with a third general pattern execution area 143e. The third general-purpose figure execution area 143e is an area in which the third general-purpose figure side pending information for which open determination processing is to be performed is stored when the third general-purpose figure display section 133 starts display continuation times. The third general-purpose figure-side pending information stored in the first area 143a is shifted to the third general-purpose figure execution area 143e when the third general-purpose figure display unit 133 starts display continuation times.

In the execution area 144 for the fourth general figure, there is a situation in which it is possible to start the display continuation time in the fourth general figure display section 134 (that is, the display continuation time is not being performed in the fourth general figure display section 134, Further, when a winning occurs in the through winning section 34 in a situation where the special winning device 35 is not in the acceptance execution state), the numerical information of the general random number counter C11 is stored as the fourth general drawing side pending information. Here, the first to fourth areas 141a to 141d, 142a to 142d, and 143a to 143d are included in the first to fourth areas 141a to 141d, 142a to 142d, and 143a to 143d, as already explained. In contrast, even in a situation where it is not possible to start display continuation times in the corresponding general figure display sections 131 to 133, the corresponding general figure side reservation information is stored on hold. Regarding the fourth general purpose figure side pending information, only the fourth general purpose figure execution area 144 is provided, and an area for holding and storing the fourth general purpose figure side pending information is not provided. This makes it possible to handle the presence or absence of reservation storage differently between the first to third general map side reservation information and the fourth general map side reservation information.

Each of the above counters will be explained in detail.

First, the standard random number counter C11 will be explained. The general random number counter C11 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of "0 to 99" and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. In this case, when the general power random number counter C11 completes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter C13 at that time is read as the initial value of the general power random number counter C11. Note that the random number initial value counter C13 is a loop counter similar to the general purpose electric random number counter C11 (value=0 to 99).

The general random number counter C11 is updated regularly, and as already explained, at the timing when a game ball enters the first operating unit 32 or the special winning device 35, the value of the general electric random number counter C11 at that time is updated to the first general figure. The value of the general random number counter C11 at that time is stored in the second general drawing holding area 142, and the game ball is stored in the specific actuating unit 124 at the timing when a game ball enters the first general drawing device 121. At the timing when a game ball wins, the value of the standard random number counter C11 at that time is stored in the third general drawing holding area 143, and at the timing when a game ball wins in the through winning section 34, the value of the standard random number counter C11 at that time is stored. It is stored in the execution area 144 for the fourth general figure. Then, at a predetermined timing, it is determined whether or not to control the first general power device 121, the second general power device 122, and the third general power device 123 to the open execution state based on the stored value of the general power random number counter C11. An opening determination is made, and at the same time, an acceptance determination is made as to whether or not to control the special winning device 35 to an acceptance execution state.

Note that although there is no mode for changing the winning probability in these openness determinations and acceptance determinations, a configuration may be adopted in which a mode for changing the winning probability exists. For example, there may be a configuration in which there are a plurality of modes in which the winning probabilities are different in the opening determination using the first standard size reservation information stored in the first standard size reservation area 141, and the second standard size reservation area 142 The configuration may be such that a plurality of modes exist in which the probability of winning in the opening determination using the second general map side reservation information stored in the third general map storage area 143 is different; It may be possible to have a configuration in which there are a plurality of modes in which the winning probabilities are different in the opening determination using the side reservation information, and the acceptance using the 4th general map side reservation information stored in the execution area 144 for the 4th general map side. A configuration may also be adopted in which there are a plurality of modes in which the winning probabilities in the determination are different.

Next, the reach random number counter C12 will be explained. The reach random number counter C12 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of, for example, "0" to "238", and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C12 is updated regularly, and the value of the reach random number counter C12 at that time is acquired at the timing of starting the display continuation including the fluctuating display of the pattern in the first common figure display section 131. Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the display continuation round in the first regular symbol display section 131 is started, the symbol display device 51 corresponds to the performance for the game round in the first embodiment. When the fluctuating display of the symbols is started and the continuous display on the first general symbol display section 131 is ended, the final stop display after the fluctuating display of the symbols on the symbol display device 51 is ended. Then, when a stop result corresponding to setting the first general power device 121 to the open execution state is displayed on the first general figure display section 131, a combination of the same symbols is stopped and displayed on the pattern display device 51, When a stop result corresponding to not putting the first general power device 121 into the open execution state is displayed on the first general symbol display unit 131, the symbol display device 51 corresponds to a failure result that is different from the combination of the same symbol. The combination of symbols to be displayed will be stopped and displayed. In this configuration, when the display continuation times corresponding to the losing result are executed, it is determined whether or not to execute the ready-to-reach display on the symbol display device 51 using the value of the ready-to-reach random number counter C12.

Next, the variation type counter C14 will be explained. The variation type counter C14 is configured to be incremented by 1 within the range of "0 to 198" and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter C14 is used by the main MPU 72 to determine the display continuation period of the display continuation times on the first general figure display section 131.

<1st general map general electric power control process>
Next, various processes executed by the main MPU 72 will be explained. First, the first general purpose electric power control process for controlling the display continuation times in the first general electric power display section 131 and the execution control of the opening execution state of the first general electric power device 121 will be described. FIG. 24 is a slow chart showing the first general electric power control process.

If a winning has occurred in the first actuating unit 32 or the special winning device 35 (step S1101: YES), the Under the condition that the number of pieces of general-purpose figure side reservation information is less than the upper limit of four pieces (step S1102: NO), storage processing to the first general-purpose figure reservation area 141 is executed (step S1103). In this storage process, the numerical information of the random number counter C11 is used as the first general-purpose figure-side pending information, and the first general-purpose figure-side pending information in the first area 141a to fourth area 141d of the first general-purpose figure holding area 141 is stored. The data is stored in the area with the earliest digestion order among the areas that have not been processed. In addition, when the first general drawing side reservation information is acquired, the display contents of the first general drawing side holding display section 135 are updated in accordance with the increase in the number of pieces of first general drawing side holding information. Configure the data to do so.

If a negative determination is made in step S1101, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1102, or if the process of step S1103 is executed, whether or not the second general power device 122 is in the open execution state or the special winning device 35 is in the acceptance execution state (step S1104). If a negative determination is made in step S1104, the processes of steps S1105 to S1107 are executed. These processes will be explained later. Thereafter, the first general address table stored in the main side ROM 73 is read out (step S1108). A start address of a program for executing a process corresponding to the numerical information of the first general-purpose electricity counter is set in the first general-purpose electricity address table. The first general-purpose electric power counter is a counter for specifying the processing content to be executed in the first general-purpose electric power control process by the main side MPU 72.

The first general electricity counter can take values from "0" to "4", and each value from "0" to "4" is the start address NA10 to NA14 of each process (step S1111 to step S1115). It corresponds to Specifically, when the value of the first general-purpose figure general-purpose power counter is "0," a first general-purpose figure fluctuation start process ( If step S1111) is to be executed and the value of the first general pattern general electricity counter is "1," the first general pattern variation is a process for advancing the display continuation times in the first general pattern display section 131. The middle process (step S1112) is to be executed, and if the value of the first general-purpose figure general-purpose electric counter is "2," the first general-purpose figure general-purpose figure display section 131 executes a process for terminating the continuous display period. If the general power map determination process (step S1113) is to be executed, and the value of the first general power map general power counter is "3", the first general power map determination process (step S1113) is executed, which is a process for controlling the open state of the first general power power device 121. 1 general power disconnection processing (step S1114) is to be executed, and if the value of the first general power power counter is "4", this is a process for bringing the first general power device 121 into the open state again. The process during the first power outage (step S1115) is to be executed.

In the first general-purpose electricity control process, after reading the first general-purpose electricity address table (step S1108), the start address corresponding to the information of the first general-purpose electricity counter is set as the first general-purpose electricity address table. It is obtained from the table (step S1109), and jumps to the process indicated by the obtained start address (step S1110). Each process from step S1111 to step S1115 will be individually explained below.

In the first general pattern fluctuation start process in step S1111, on the condition that the first general pattern drawing side reservation information is stored in the first general pattern holding area 141, the first general pattern drawing side holding information is held and stored in the first general pattern drawing holding area 141. A process is executed to shift the pending information on the first general map side. Specifically, the first general drawing side reservation information stored in the first area 141a of the first general drawing holding area 141 is shifted to the first general drawing execution area 141e, and then the second area 141b→the second The first general map side reservation information is shifted so that the first area 141a, the third area 141c→second area 141b, and the fourth area 141d→third area 141c. In addition, when the first general map side reservation information is shifted, the display contents of the first general map side reservation display section 135 are updated in accordance with the current decrease in the number of pieces of first general computer side pending information. Configure the data to do so.

In the first general-purpose map fluctuation start process, after executing the above-mentioned shift process, the first general-purpose power grid opening lottery process is performed using the first general-purpose map side pending information newly shifted to the first general-purpose map execution area 141e as a lottery value. Execute. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the probability of winning the first general electricity lottery in the first general electricity opening lottery process is constant regardless of the game state, and specifically, the probability of winning the first general electricity lottery in the first general electricity opening lottery process is constant regardless of the game state, and specifically, the probability of winning the first general electricity lottery is 1/100. It will be an open election. However, it is not limited to this, and the probability of winning the first general electricity open circuit may be higher or lower than this.

In the first general-purpose map fluctuation start process, when the first general-purpose electricity release lottery process is executed, a process for specifying the display continuation period of the current display continuation time is executed. In the specific processing, first, it is determined whether the current display continuation time corresponds to the occurrence of a reach effect. Specifically, if the current display continuation corresponds to the first general electricity open winning, it is determined that the reach effect occurs. In addition, even if the current display continuation time does not correspond to the first general electricity open winning, the value of the reach random number counter C12 is obtained, and the value of the obtained reach random number counter C12 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach. If it is numerical information, it is determined that a reach effect occurs. When it is determined that a reach effect will occur, the reach effect table is read from the main side ROM 73, and the display duration period is determined by comparing the read out reach effect table with the current numerical information of the variation type counter C14. Then, information on the determined display continuation period is set in a first timer counter provided in the main side RAM 74. In addition, when it is determined that a reach effect does not occur, the reach non-occurrence table is read from the main side ROM 73, and the current numerical information of the fluctuation type counter C14 and the current first The display continuation period is determined by comparing the combination of the numbers of general figure side hold information, and the information of the determined display continuation period is set in the first timer counter provided in the main side RAM 74. When the table for reach occurrence is referred to, the display duration corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter C14 is selected regardless of the number of pieces of the first general figure side pending information, whereas the table for reach non-occurrence is selected. When referenced, a shorter display duration period is selected as the number of pieces of first general map side pending information increases. The numerical information set in the first timer counter is updated in the timer update process of step S210 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11). Incidentally, the display continuation period that can be selected when the first general map side hold information becomes an opportunity to start the display continuation time is 1 second to 180 seconds.

In the first general map fluctuation start process, when the process for specifying the display duration period is executed, a command corresponding to the result of the first general electricity release lottery process and information on the determined display duration period is read from the main side ROM 73. , is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 92. The sound and light side MPU 92 executes control for causing the symbol display device 51, the display light emitting section 63, and the speaker section 64 to execute the display continuation repetition effect corresponding to the received command. It should be noted that the symbol display device 51 performs the same effect as the effect for the game cycle in the first embodiment as the effect for the display continuation cycle.

In the first standard figure variation start process, after transmitting the above command, the first standard figure display section 131 starts displaying the pattern in a variable manner. A variable display table for ordinary figures is stored in advance in the main side ROM 73 as a table referred to by the main side MPU 72 when the first ordinary figure display section 131 performs variable display of the symbols. When a variable display of symbols is executed in the first general-purpose symbol display section 131, the same variable display table is used regardless of the result of the first general-purpose electricity opening lottery process. When a variable display of a pattern is performed in the first general figure display section 131, the variable display of a pattern according to a predetermined pattern is repeated, but the variable display table for ordinary figures shows a variation of a pattern according to the predetermined pattern. Control data for one round in the display is set. Therefore, when the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the first general figure display section 131, the variable display table for the common figure is repeatedly used until just before final display is performed. Note that the same variable display table for ordinary figures is also used when the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the second ordinary figure display section 132, the third ordinary figure display section 133, and the fourth ordinary figure display section 134.

After starting the variable display of the pattern on the first general figure display section 131, the value of the first general figure general electricity counter is incremented by one. Since the value of the first general-purpose electric power counter when the first general-purpose electric power fluctuation start process is executed is "0," by adding 1, the value of the first general-purpose electric power counter is It becomes "1" corresponding to the changing process (step S1112).

In the process during the first normal figure variation in step S1112, it is determined whether the timing is during display continuation and before final display. Specifically, when the value of the first timer counter that measures the display duration of the current display duration is 0.4 seconds remaining, it is determined that the timing is before final display. If it is before final display, a process for regularly changing the display mode of the picture in the first general figure display section 131 is executed. This regular change continues until it is time to start final display. Further, this regular change is performed in a fixed manner regardless of whether or not the first general electricity release is elected. Moreover, when the timing for final display has come, the display mode of the picture in the first general-purpose symbol display section 131 is set to the display mode corresponding to the result of the current first general-purpose electricity opening lottery process. Further, a final display command is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 92. When the sound/light side MPU 92 receives the final display command, it causes the symbol display device 51 to finally display the combination of symbols to be stopped and displayed this time. Thereafter, by adding 1 to the value of the first general map and general electricity counter, the value of the counter changes from the value corresponding to the first general map changing process to the one corresponding to the first general map determining process (step S1113). Update to.

In the process during the first general figure confirmation in step S1113, it is determined whether the confirmed display period (specifically, 0.4 seconds) of the current display continuation time has elapsed. If the fixed display period has elapsed, it is determined whether the result of the first general electricity release lottery process in the current display continuation time is the first general electricity release winning. If it is not the first general power grid opening election, the value of the first general public power grid counter is cleared to "0", and then the first general power map determining process is ended. If the first general power release is won, "3" is set in the first general power release counter provided in the main side RAM 74 as information on the number of openings and closings of the first general power device 121. Further, "10" is set in the first general power winning counter provided in the main side RAM 74 as information on the upper limit number of winnings to the first general power device 121 in the current open execution state. Further, information corresponding to 3 seconds is set in the first timer counter as information on the open duration period of the first general power device 121. Furthermore, by starting to output a drive signal to the first general power drive section 121b, the first general power device 121 is placed in an open state. Thereafter, 1 is added to the first general electric power counter. In this case, since the value of the first general-purpose electricity counter when the first general-purpose electricity map confirmation process is executed is "2," after adding 1, it corresponds to the first general-purpose electricity release process (step S1114). It becomes "3".

In the first general electricity release processing in step S1114, when winnings to the first general electricity device 121 occur, a value corresponding to the number of winnings is subtracted from the value of the first general electricity winning counter in the main side RAM 74. do. If the value of the first general electricity winning counter is ``0'', the value of the first general electricity release counter is cleared to ``0'', the value of the first timer counter is cleared to ``0'', and the value of the first general electricity release counter is cleared to ``0''. By stopping the output of the drive signal to the first general electric power drive unit 121b, the first general electric power accessory 121a is brought into a closed state, and the value of the first general electric power electric charge counter is cleared to "0". Thereby, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the first general-purpose figure general-purpose electric power control process becomes the first general-purpose figure fluctuation start process (step S1111). Furthermore, even if the value of the first general electricity winning counter is not "0", if the value of the first timer counter is "0", the drive signal is output to the first general electricity drive unit 121b. By stopping this, the first general electric utility accessory 121a is brought into a closed state, and the value of the first general electric power opening counter in the main side RAM 74 is subtracted by one. If the value of the first general electricity release counter is not "0", after setting the numerical information of the closing duration period (specifically, 1 second) of the first general electricity accessory 121a in the first timer counter, The value of the first general map general electricity counter is updated from "3" to "4". As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the first general utility grid control process becomes the first general public electricity closed process (step S1115). When the value of the first general power open counter is "0", the value of the first general power open counter is cleared to "0" without setting a value in the first timer counter. Thereby, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the first general-purpose figure general-purpose electric power control process becomes the first general-purpose figure fluctuation start process (step S1111).

In the first general power shut-down process in step S1115, on the condition that the value of the first timer counter is "0", output of the drive signal to the first general power drive section 121b is started. Numerical information of the opening duration period (specifically, 3 seconds) when the first general electric accessory 121a is opened and the first general electric accessory 121a is opened once is set in the first timer counter. . Then, the value of the first general electric power counter is updated from "4" to "3". As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the first general purpose electric power control process becomes the first general electric power release process (step S1114).

As described above, by executing the first general figure general electricity control process, the pattern changes in the first general figure display part 131 triggered by the occurrence of a winning in the first actuating section 32 or special winning device 35. The display continuation including the display is performed, and the symbol display device 51 displays symbols in a variable manner. Then, in the case where the first general electric power opening is won in the first general electric power opening lottery process, after the display continuation times on the first general electric power symbol display section 131 and the symbol display device 51 are completed, the first general electric power device 121 is It becomes an open execution state. In the opening execution state, the opening state for 3 seconds is performed three times in the first general power device 121 with a closing duration period of 1 second in between. In addition, if the number of winning game balls to the first general electric device 121 reaches 10 or more before the 3-second open state is performed three times, the 3-second open state is performed three times. Even if there is, the current open execution state is terminated. Further, when a game ball is won in the first general electricity device 121, second general figure side holding information is stored in the second general figure holding area 142 with an upper limit of four pieces.

In the first common map general electric power control process, if the second general electric power device 122 is in the open execution state or the special winning device 35 is in the acceptance execution state, an affirmative determination is made in step S1104, and step S1116 Execute the fluctuation stop processing at . In the fluctuation stop process, if the display continuation times in the first general figure display section 131 and the symbol display device 51 are currently being executed, the display continuation times in the first general figure display section 131 are changed to the current first general figure display section. 131, the update of the first timer counter is temporarily stopped, and a stop command is sent to the sound-light side MPU 92. By receiving the stopping command, the sound and light side MPU 92 continues the production in the symbol display device 51, the display light emitting unit 63, and the speaker unit 64, while receiving the stopping command, which will be described later, after receiving the stopping command. The period during which the symbol combination is finally stopped and displayed in the current display continuation time is extended by the period until the final stop display. In addition, in the fluctuation stop processing, the first stop flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1".

In the first general electric power control process, if a negative determination is made in step S1104 and the first stopped flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1105: YES), the corresponding 1 clears the stopped flag to "0" (step S1106). As a result, if the first general figure display section 131 is temporarily stopped during the continuous display period, the continuous display period is restarted and the updating of the first timer counter is restarted. After that, a stop cancellation command is transmitted to the audio-optical side MPU 92 (step S1107). Thereby, the sound-light side MPU 92 grasps the period during which the final stop display of the symbol combination is to be extended in the current display continuation time.

As described above, in the first general-purpose electric power control process, when the second general electric power device 122 is in the open execution state or when the special prize winning device 35 is in the acceptance execution state, the display continuation time of the first general electric figure display section 131 is Execute the process to temporarily stop. As a result, when the second general power supply device 122 is in the open execution state or when the special prize winning device 35 is in the acceptance execution state, the display continuation of the first general figure display section 131 is prevented from proceeding. becomes possible. Therefore, when the second general power device 122 is in the open execution state or the special winning device 35 is in the acceptance execution state, the first general power device 121 is prevented from becoming in the open execution state. It becomes possible to

<Second general electric power control process>
Next, the second general electric power control process executed by the main side MPU 72 will be explained. In the second general purpose electric power control process, execution control of the display continuation times in the second general electric power display section 132 and execution control of the open execution state of the second general electric power device 122 are performed. FIG. 25 is a slow chart showing the second general electric power control process.

If a winning has occurred in the first general-purpose drawing device 121 (step S1201: YES), the second general-purpose drawing side reservation stored in the first area 142a to fourth area 142d of the second general-purpose drawing holding area 142 On the condition that the number of pieces of information is less than the upper limit of 4 pieces (step S1202: NO), storage processing in the second general drawing reservation area 142 is executed (step S1203). In this storage process, the numerical information of the random number counter C11 is used as the second general-purpose figure-side pending information, and the second general-purpose figure-side pending information in the first area 142a to fourth area 142d of the second general-purpose figure holding area 142 is stored. The data is stored in the area with the earliest digestion order among the areas that have not been processed. In addition, when the second general purpose drawing side reservation information is acquired, the display contents of the second general drawing side holding display section 136 are updated in accordance with the current increase in the number of pieces of second general drawing side holding information. Configure the data to do so.

If a negative determination is made in step S1201, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1202, or if the process of step S1203 is executed, it is determined whether the first general power device 121 is in the open execution state or the special winning device 35 is in the acceptance execution state (step S1204). If a negative determination is made in step S1204, the processes in steps S1205 and S1206 are executed. These processes will be explained later. Thereafter, the second general address table stored in the main side ROM 73 is read out (step S1207). The start address of a program for executing a process corresponding to the numerical information of the second general-purpose electricity counter is set in the second general-purpose electricity address table. The second standard electric power counter is a counter used by the main MPU 72 to specify the processing content to be executed in the second general electric power control process.

The second general electricity counter can take values from “0” to “4”, and each value from “0” to “4” is the start address NA20 to NA24 of each process (step S1210 to step S1214). It corresponds to Specifically, when the value of the second general figure general electricity counter is "0," a second general figure fluctuation start process ( Step S1210) is to be executed, and when the value of the second general figure general electricity counter is "1," the second general figure fluctuation is a process for advancing the display continuation times in the second general figure display section 132. If the middle process (step S1211) is to be executed, and the value of the second general-purpose figure general-purpose electricity counter is "2," the second general-purpose figure display unit 132 executes the second If the ordinary figure determination process (step S1212) is to be executed, and the value of the second ordinary figure general electricity counter is "3," the second ordinary figure general electric power unit 122 is executed as a process for controlling the open state. 2 general power disconnection processing (step S1213) is to be executed, and if the value of the 2nd general power power counter is "4", this is a process for bringing the second general power device 122 into the open state again. The second power outage process (step S1214) is to be executed.

In the second general-purpose electricity control process, after reading the second general-purpose electricity address table (step S1207), the start address corresponding to the information of the second general-purpose electricity counter is set to the second general-purpose electricity address table. It is obtained from the table (step S1208), and jumps to the process indicated by the obtained start address (step S1209). Each process from step S1210 to step S1214 will be individually explained below.

In the second general pattern fluctuation start process in step S1210, on the condition that the second general pattern drawing side reservation information is stored in the second general pattern holding area 142, the second general pattern drawing side holding information is held and stored in the second general pattern drawing holding area 142. A process is executed to shift the pending information on the second general map side. Specifically, the second general drawing side reservation information stored in the first area 142a of the second general drawing holding area 142 is shifted to the second general drawing execution area 142e, and then the second general drawing drawing side holding information is shifted from the second area 142b to the second general drawing drawing execution area 142e. The second general map side reservation information is shifted so that it becomes the first area 142a, the third area 142c→second area 142b, and the fourth area 142d→third area 142c. In addition, when the second general drawing side reservation information is shifted, the display contents of the second general drawing drawing side holding display section 136 are updated in accordance with the current decrease in the number of pieces of second general drawing side holding information. Configure the data to do so.

In the second utility map fluctuation start process, after executing the above shift process, the second utility map side pending information newly shifted to the second utility map execution area 142e is used as a lottery value to perform the second utility map release lottery process. Execute. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the probability of winning the second general electricity lottery in the second general electricity opening lottery process is constant regardless of the gaming state, and specifically, the probability of winning the second general electricity opening lottery is 99/100. It will be an open election. However, it is not limited to this, and the probability of winning the second general electricity open circuit may be higher or lower than this. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the release execution state of the second general electric power device 122 reliably occurs when the second general electric power side pending information is acquired without the second general electric power release lottery process being executed.

In the second general-purpose map fluctuation start process, when the second general-purpose electricity release lottery process is executed, a process for specifying the display continuation period of the current display continuation time is executed. In the specific processing, a fixed display duration of 0.2 seconds is set in the second timer counter provided in the main side RAM 74, regardless of the result of the second general electric power opening lottery process and the number of pieces of second general electric power side pending information. set. In addition, when the display continuation times are executed in the second general symbol display section 132, the corresponding effects are not executed in the symbol display device 51, the display light emitting section 63, and the speaker section 64. After the first power supply device 121 enters the release execution state, all of the second power supply side reservation information acquired in the release execution state is digested, and the second power supply side reservation information is used as a trigger. Until all the opening execution states of the second power supply device 122 are completed, this corresponds to the jackpot state of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment, and in the jackpot state, the effect corresponding to the jackpot state is displayed on the symbol display device 51. , is executed by the display light emitting section 63 and the speaker section 64.

In the second standard figure variation start process, after executing the process for specifying the display duration period, the second standard figure display section 132 starts the variable display of the pattern. When the second standard figure display section 132 displays the symbols in a variable manner, the already explained variable display table for the standard figures is referred to. After starting the variable display of the pattern on the second general figure display section 132, the value of the second general figure general electricity counter is incremented by one. Since the value of the second general-purpose electric power counter when the second general-purpose electric power fluctuation start process is executed is "0," by adding 1, the value of the second general-purpose electric power counter changes to the second general electric power It becomes "1" corresponding to the changing process (step S1211).

In the process during second normal figure variation in step S1211, it is determined whether the timing is during display continuation and before final display. Specifically, when the value of the second timer counter that measures the display duration of the current display duration is 0.1 seconds remaining, it is determined that the timing is before final display. If it is before the final display, a process for regularly changing the display mode of the picture in the second general figure display section 132 is executed. Moreover, when the timing for final display has come, the display mode of the picture in the second general-purpose symbol display section 132 is set to the display mode corresponding to the result of the current second general-purpose electricity opening lottery process. Thereafter, by adding 1 to the value of the second general map general power counter, the value of the counter changes from the value corresponding to the second general map changing process to the one corresponding to the second general map determining process (step S1212). Update to.

In the second regular pattern determination process in step S1212, it is determined whether the final display period (specifically, 0.1 seconds) of the current display continuation time has elapsed. If the fixed display period has elapsed, it is determined whether the result of the second general electricity opening lottery process in the current display continuation is a second general electricity opening winning. If it is not the second general electric grid open election, the second general electric map general electricity counter is cleared to "0", and then the second general electric map confirmation process is ended. If the second general power release is won, "3" is set in the second general power release counter provided in the main side RAM 74 as information on the number of openings and closings of the second general power device 122. Further, "10" is set in the second general power winning counter provided in the main side RAM 74 as information on the upper limit number of winnings to the second general power device 122 in the current open execution state. Further, information corresponding to 3 seconds is set in the second timer counter as information on the open duration period of the second power supply device 122. Further, by starting to output a drive signal to the second general power drive section 122b, the second general power device 122 is brought into an open state. After that, 1 is added to the second general electric power counter. Since the value of the second general electricity grid counter when the second general electricity grid determination process is executed is "2", after adding 1, the value is "3" corresponding to the second general electricity release process (step S1213). ”.

In the second general electricity release processing in step S1213, when winnings to the second general electricity device 122 have occurred, a value corresponding to the number of winnings is subtracted from the value of the second general electricity winning counter in the main side RAM 74. do. If the value of the second general electricity winning counter is "0", the value of the second general electricity release counter is cleared to "0", the value of the second timer counter is cleared to "0", and By stopping the output of the drive signal to the second general electric power drive unit 122b, the second general electric power accessory 122a is brought into a closed state, and the value of the second general electric power electric charge counter is cleared to "0". Thereby, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the second general-purpose figure general-purpose electric power control process becomes the second general-purpose figure fluctuation start process (step S1210). Furthermore, even if the value of the second general electricity winning counter is not "0", if the value of the second timer counter is "0", the drive signal is output to the second general electricity drive unit 122b. By stopping this, the second general power accessory 122a is brought into a closed state, and the value of the second general power open counter in the main side RAM 74 is subtracted by 1. If the value of the second general electricity release counter is not "0", after setting the numerical information of the closing duration (specifically, 1 second) of the second general electricity accessory 122a in the second timer counter, The value of the second general map general electricity counter is updated from "3" to "4". As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the second general electric power control process becomes the second general electric power closed process (step S1214). When the value of the second general power open counter is "0", the value of the second general power open counter is cleared to "0" without setting a value in the second timer counter. Thereby, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the second general-purpose figure general-purpose electric power control process becomes the second general-purpose figure fluctuation start process (step S1210).

In the second general power shut-down process in step S1214, on the condition that the value of the second timer counter is "0", the output of the drive signal to the second general power drive unit 122b is started. Numerical information of the opening duration period (specifically, 3 seconds) when the second general electric accessory 122a is opened and the second general electric accessory 122a is opened once is set in the second timer counter. . Then, the value of the second general electric power counter is updated from "4" to "3". As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the second general purpose electric power control process becomes the second general electric power release process (step S1213).

As described above, by executing the second general figure general electricity control process, the fluctuation display of the picture is performed in the second general figure display section 132, triggered by the occurrence of a winning in the first general electric figure device 121. . Then, in the case where the second general electric power opening is won in the second general electric power opening lottery process, the second general electric power device 122 enters the opening execution state after the display continuation time on the second general electric power drawing display section 132 ends. . In the opening execution state, the second general power device 122 performs the opening state for 3 seconds three times with a closing duration period of 1 second in between. In addition, if the number of winning game balls to the second power supply device 122 reaches 10 or more before the 3-second open state is performed three times, the 3-second open state is performed three times. Even if there is, the current open execution state is terminated.

In the second common map general electric power control process, when the first general electric power device 121 is in the open execution state or when the special winning device 35 is in the acceptance execution state, an affirmative determination is made in step S1204, and step S1215 Execute the fluctuation stop processing at . In the fluctuation stop process, if the display continuation time in the second general figure display section 132 is currently being executed, the display continuation time in the second general figure display section 132 is changed from the current display mode of the second general figure display section 132. In this state, the update of the second timer counter is temporarily stopped. Further, in the fluctuation stop processing, the second stop flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1".

In the second general electric power control process, if a negative determination is made in step S1204 and the second stopped flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1205: YES), the corresponding 2. The stopped flag is cleared to "0" (step S1206). As a result, if the second general figure display section 132 has been temporarily stopped during the continuous display period, the continuous display period is restarted and the updating of the second timer counter is restarted.

As described above, in the second general-purpose power supply control process, when the first general-purpose power supply device 121 is in the open execution state or when the special winning device 35 is in the acceptance execution state, the display continuation time of the second general-purpose power supply device 132 is Execute the process to temporarily stop. As a result, when the first power supply device 121 is in the open execution state or when the special prize winning device 35 is in the acceptance execution state, the display continuation of the second general figure display section 132 is prevented from proceeding. becomes possible. Therefore, when the first general power device 121 is in the open execution state or the special winning device 35 is in the acceptance execution state, the second general power device 122 is prevented from becoming in the open execution state. It becomes possible to

<3rd general map general electric power control process>
Next, the third general electric power control process executed by the main side MPU 72 will be explained. In the third general purpose electric power control process, execution control of the display continuation times in the third general electric power display section 133 and execution control of the open execution state of the third general electric power device 123 are performed. FIG. 26 is a slow chart showing the third general-purpose electric power control process.

If a winning has occurred in the specific operation unit 124 (step S1301: YES), the third general-purpose drawing side reservation information stored in the first area 143a to fourth area 143d of the third general-purpose drawing holding area 143 On the condition that the number is less than the upper limit of four (step S1302: NO), storage processing to the third general drawing reservation area 143 is executed (step S1303). In this storage process, the numeric information of the random number counter C11 is used as the 3rd standard computer side pending information, and the 3rd standard computer side pending information in the first area 143a to the fourth area 143d of the 3rd standard computer reservation area 143 is stored. The data is stored in the area with the earliest digestion order among the areas that have not been processed. In addition, when the 3rd general map side reservation information is acquired, the display contents of the 3rd standard computer reservation display section 137 are updated in accordance with the increase in the number of pieces of 3rd standard computer side pending information. Configure the data to do so.

If a negative determination is made in step S1301, an affirmative determination is made in step S1302, or if the process in step S1303 is executed, the third general purpose electric address table stored in the main side ROM 73 is read out (step S1304). The start address of a program for executing the process corresponding to the numerical information of the third general-purpose electricity counter is set in the third general-purpose electricity address table. The third general-purpose electric power counter is a counter for specifying the processing content to be executed in the third general-purpose electric power control process by the main side MPU 72.

The third general electric power counter can take values from “0” to “3”, and each value from “0” to “3” corresponds to the start address NA30 to NA33 of each process (step S1307 to step S1310). It corresponds to Specifically, when the value of the third general figure general electricity counter is "0," the third general figure fluctuation start process (which is a process for starting the display continuation times in the third general figure display section 133) If step S1307) is to be executed and the value of the third general pattern general electricity counter is "1," the third general pattern variation is a process for advancing the display continuation times in the third general pattern display section 133. If the middle process (step S1308) is to be executed, and the value of the third general figure general electricity counter is "2," the third general figure display unit 133 executes the third general process, which is a process for terminating the continuous display on the third general figure display unit 133. If the ordinary figure determination process (step S1309) is to be executed, and the value of the third ordinary figure general electricity counter is “3”, the third ordinary figure general electricity unit 123 is executed as a process for controlling the open state. 3. The general power disconnection process (step S1310) is to be executed.

In the third general-purpose electricity control process, after reading the third general-purpose electricity address table (step S1304), the start address corresponding to the information of the third general-purpose electricity counter is changed to the third general-purpose electricity address table. It is obtained from the table (step S1305), and jumps to the process indicated by the obtained start address (step S1306). Each process from step S1307 to step S1310 will be individually explained below.

In the third general pattern fluctuation start process in step S1307, on the condition that the third general pattern side holding information is stored in the third general pattern holding area 143, the third general pattern drawing side holding information is held and stored in the third general pattern holding area 143. Executes processing to shift the pending information on the third general map side. Specifically, the third general drawing side reservation information stored in the first area 143a of the third general drawing holding area 143 is shifted to the third general drawing execution area 143e, and then the second area 143b→the third general drawing drawing execution area 143e is shifted. The 3rd general map side reservation information is shifted so that it becomes 1 area 143a, 3rd area 143c→2nd area 143b, and 4th area 143d→3rd area 143c. In addition, when the 3rd general map side reservation information is shifted, the display contents of the 3rd general map side reservation display section 137 are updated in accordance with the current decrease in the number of 3rd standard computer side pending information. Configure the data to do so.

In the 3rd utility map fluctuation start process, after executing the above shift process, the 3rd utility map side reservation information newly shifted to the 3rd utility map execution area 143e is used as a lottery value to perform the 3rd utility map opening lottery process. Execute. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the probability of winning the 3rd regular ticket lottery in the 3rd regular ticket lottery process is constant regardless of the gaming state, and specifically, the probability of winning the 3rd regular ticket lottery is 1/100. It will be an open election. However, it is not limited to this, and the probability of winning the third general electricity open circuit may be higher or lower than this.

In the third general-purpose map fluctuation start process, when the third general-purpose electricity release lottery process is executed, a process for specifying the display continuation period of the current display continuation time is executed. In the specific processing, a fixed display duration of 300 seconds is set in the third timer counter provided in the main side RAM 74, regardless of the result of the third general electric power opening lottery process and the number of pieces of third general electric power side pending information. . In addition, when the display continuation times are executed in the third general symbol display section 133, the corresponding effects are not executed in the symbol display device 51, the display light emitting section 63, and the speaker section 64.

In the third standard figure variation start process, after executing the process for specifying the display duration period, the variable display of the pattern in the third standard figure display section 133 is started. When the third standard figure display section 133 displays the symbols in a variable manner, the already explained variable display table for the standard figures is referred to. After starting the variable display of the pattern on the third general figure display section 133, the value of the third general figure general electricity counter is incremented by one. Since the value of the 3rd general purpose electric power counter when the 3rd general electric power map fluctuation start process is executed is "0," by adding 1, the value of the 3rd general electric power map general electric power counter changes to the 3rd general electric power map. It becomes "1" corresponding to the changing process (step S1308).

In the third normal figure variation processing in step S1308, it is determined whether the timing is during display continuation and before final display. Specifically, when the value of the third timer counter that measures the display duration of the current display duration is 0.4 seconds remaining, it is determined that the timing is before final display. If it is before final display, a process for regularly changing the display mode of the picture in the third general figure display section 133 is executed. Moreover, when the timing for final display has come, the display mode of the picture in the third general public figure display section 133 is set to the display mode corresponding to the result of the current third general public electricity opening lottery process. Thereafter, by adding 1 to the value of the 3rd general map general electricity counter, the value of the counter changes from the value corresponding to the 3rd general map changing process to the value corresponding to the 3rd general map determining process (step S1309). Update to.

In the third general map determination process in step S1309, it is determined whether the final display period (specifically, 0.4 seconds) of the current display continuation time has elapsed. If the confirmed display period has elapsed, it is determined whether the result of the third general electricity opening lottery process in the current display continuation is a third general electricity opening winning. If it is not the 3rd general public grid opening election, the value of the 3rd general public grid general electricity counter is cleared to "0", and then the third general public map confirmation process is ended. If the third general power release is won, "1" is set in the third general power release counter provided in the main side RAM 74 as information on the number of opening/closing times of the third general power device 123. In addition, "10" is set in the third general power winning counter provided in the main side RAM 74 as information on the upper limit number of winnings to the third general power device 123 in the current open execution state. Further, information corresponding to 1 second is set in the third timer counter as information on the open duration period of the third general power device 123. Further, the third general power device 123 is brought into an open state by starting to output a drive signal to the third general power drive unit 123b. Thereafter, 1 is added to the third general electric power counter. Since the value of the 3rd universal power counter when the 3rd general power map confirmation process is executed is "2", after adding 1, the value is "3" which corresponds to the 3rd general power map opening process (step S1310). ”.

In step S1310, during the third general electricity release process, if a winning is occurring in the third general electricity device 123, a value corresponding to the number of winnings is subtracted from the value of the third general electricity winning counter in the main side RAM 74. do. If the value of the third general electricity winning counter is "0", the value of the third general electricity release counter is cleared to "0", the value of the third timer counter is cleared to "0", and By stopping the output of the drive signal to the third general electric power drive unit 123b, the third general electric power accessory 123a is brought into a closed state, and the value of the third general electric power electric charge counter is cleared to "0". As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the third general-purpose figure general-purpose power control process becomes the third general-purpose figure fluctuation start process (step S1307). In addition, even if the value of the third general power winning counter is not "0", if the value of the third timer counter is "0", the third general power winning counter and the third general power winning counter of the main side RAM 74 are By clearing the value of the general electricity opening counter to "0" and further stopping the output of the drive signal to the third general electricity drive unit 123b, the third general electricity accessory 123a is brought into a closed state. Then, the value of the third general electric power counter is cleared to "0". As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the third general-purpose figure general-purpose power control process becomes the third general-purpose figure fluctuation start process (step S1307).

As described above, by executing the third common figure general electricity control process, the variable display of the symbols is performed in the third common figure display section 133, triggered by the occurrence of a winning in the specific operation section 124. Then, in the case where the third general electric power opening is won in the third general electric power opening lottery process, the third general electric power device 123 enters the opening execution state after the display continuation time on the third general electric power drawing display section 133 ends. . In the opening execution state, the opening state for 1 second is performed once in the third general power supply device 123. In addition, since the firing cycle of the game balls is 0.6 seconds, the upper limit number of game balls will not enter the third power supply device 123 in the open state for 1 second.

Here, in the third general electric power control process, when the first general electric power device 121 is in the open execution state, the second general electric power device 122 is in the open execution state, and the special winning device 35 is in the acceptance execution state. In either case, the process for temporarily stopping the display continuation of the third general figure display section 133 is not executed. As a result, even if the first general power device 121 is in the release execution state, the second general power device 122 is in the release execution state, or the special winning device 35 is in the acceptance execution state, Regardless, it becomes possible to advance the display continuation times of the third general figure display section 133, and it becomes possible to advance the open execution state in the third general power device 123. In addition, in the first general purpose electric power control process, even if the third general electric power device 123 is in the open execution state, the process for temporarily stopping the display continuation of the first general electric power display section 131 is not executed. , in the second general purpose electric power control process, even if the third general electric power device 123 is in the open execution state, the process for temporarily stopping the display continuation of the second general electric power display section 132 is not executed; In the fourth general purpose electric power control process to be described later, even if the third general electric power device 123 is in the open execution state, a process for temporarily stopping the display continuation of the fourth general electric power display section 134 is not executed. As a result, even if the third general power device 123 is in the open execution state, it becomes possible to advance the display continuation of the first general power map display section 131 regardless of this, and the first general power device It becomes possible to advance the open execution state in 121, and independently of this, it becomes possible to advance the display continuation times of the second general figure display section 132, and the open execution state in the second general power device 122 advances. This makes it possible to advance the display continuation times of the fourth common symbol display section 134 regardless of this, and it becomes possible to advance the acceptance execution state in the special prize winning device 35.

<4th general map general electric power control process>
Next, the fourth general electric power control process executed by the main side MPU 72 will be explained. In the fourth common figure general electricity control process, the execution control of the display continuation times in the fourth common figure display section 134 and the execution control of the acceptance execution state of the special prize winning device 35 are performed. FIG. 27 is a slow chart showing the fourth general electric power control process.

It is determined whether the first general power device 121 is in the open state or the second general power device 122 is in the open state (step S1401). If a negative determination is made in step S1401, processing in steps S1402 and S1403 is executed. These processes will be explained later. Thereafter, the fourth general address table stored in the main side ROM 73 is read out (step S1404). The start address of a program for executing the process corresponding to the numerical information of the fourth general-purpose electric power counter is set in the fourth general-purpose electric power address table. The 4th standard electric power counter is a counter for specifying the processing content to be executed in the 4th general electric power control process by the main side MPU 72.

The fourth general electricity counter can take values from "0" to "3", and each value from "0" to "3" is the start address NA40 to NA43 of each process (step S1407 to step S1410). It corresponds to Specifically, when the value of the fourth general-purpose figure general-purpose power counter is "0," a fourth general-purpose figure fluctuation start process ( Step S1407) is to be executed, and when the value of the fourth general figure general electricity counter is "1," the fourth general figure fluctuation is a process for advancing the display continuation times in the fourth general figure display unit 134. The middle process (step S1408) is to be executed, and when the value of the fourth general figure general electricity counter is "2," the fourth general figure general figure display section 134 executes a process for terminating the display continuation times. If the general figure confirmation process (step S1409) is to be executed, and the value of the fourth general figure general electric counter is "3", the fourth general figure which is a process for controlling the acceptance state of the special prize winning device 35 is executed. The power-off process (step S1410) is to be executed.

In the 4th standard and general electricity control process, after reading the 4th standard and general electricity address table (step S1404), the start address corresponding to the information of the 4th general and general electricity counter is set to the 4th general and general electricity address table. It is obtained from the table (step S1405), and jumps to the process indicated by the obtained start address (step S1406). Each process from step S1407 to step S1410 will be individually explained below.

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the fourth normal pattern fluctuation start process in step S1407. If a winning to the through winning section 34 has occurred (step S1501: YES), an acceptance determination process is executed (step S1502). In the acceptance determination process, the current numerical information of the general-purpose electric random number counter C11 is stored in the fourth general-purpose figure execution area 144 as the fourth general-purpose figure side pending information. Then, the acceptance determination table is read from the main side ROM 73, and the fourth standard figure side reservation information stored in the fourth standard figure execution area 144 is compared with the read acceptance determination table. In this case, there is a 98% probability that the winning result will be accepted.

If the result of the acceptance determination process is an acceptance winning result (step S1503: YES), a stop result setting process for the acceptance winning result is executed (step S1504). Specifically, information about the stopping mode of the accepted winning result pattern to be finally stopped and displayed in the current display continuation on the fourth general figure display section 134 is read from the main side ROM 73 and stored in the main side RAM 74. . Note that one type of pattern stopping mode may be set for the accepted winning result, or a plurality of types of stopping modes may be set for the accepted winning result.

If the result of the acceptance determination process is not an accepted winning result (step S1503: NO), a stop result setting process for an unsuccessful result is executed (step S1505). Specifically, information on the stop mode of the picture for the missed result that is to be finally stopped and displayed on the fourth normal picture display unit 134 in the current display continuation is read from the main side ROM 73 and stored in the main side RAM 74. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the accepted winning result.

After any one of the stop result setting processes is executed, a process for specifying a fourth general figure fluctuation period is executed (step S1506). Thereafter, the variable display of the picture pattern on the fourth general figure display section 134 is started (step S1507). When the fourth standard figure display section 134 displays the symbols in a variable manner, the already explained variable display table for the standard figures is referred to.

Thereafter, the value of the fourth general electric power counter is incremented by 1 (step S1508). Since the value of the 4th standard electric power counter when the 4th standard electric power fluctuation start process is executed is "0", the value of the 4th general electric power standard counter is "0", so by adding 1, the value of the 4th general standard electric power counter is It becomes "1" corresponding to the changing process (step S1408).

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the process for specifying the fourth normal pattern fluctuation period in step S1506. First, it is determined whether or not one or more pieces of third general map side reservation information are stored in the first area 143a to fourth area 143d of the third general map reservation area 143 (step S1601).

When a negative determination is made in step S1601, a lottery process for selecting a period is executed (step S1602). In this lottery process, numerical information is acquired from a random number counter that is updated periodically (for example, every 4 milliseconds) in the main side RAM 74, and the acquired numerical information is stored in a period selection table stored in advance in the main side ROM 73. Verify against. The period selection table is set so that the selection result will be selected with a probability of 1/500. Note that this is not limited to this, and the probability of winning the first general electricity release in the first general electricity release lottery process is 1/50, such as the probability of a selected winning result in the period selection lottery process. The configuration may be higher than that, such that the probability of a selection winning result in the lottery process for period selection is 1/100, which is the same as the probability of winning the first general electricity release in the first general electricity release lottery process. They may have a certain configuration, or may have substantially the same configuration.

If the result of the lottery process for period selection is not a selected winning result but a losing result (step S1603: NO), the first display duration period is selected as the display duration period of the current display duration time (step S1604). As in the first embodiment, the first display duration is 0.45 seconds. In a situation where the first display duration period is selected, as in the first embodiment, even if the special winning device 35 enters the acceptance execution state, basically no prize winning to the special winning device 35 occurs.

On the other hand, if one or more pieces of third general map side pending information are stored and an affirmative determination is made in step S1601, or if the result of the lottery process for period selection is a selection winning result and an affirmative determination is made in step S1603. If so, the third display duration period is selected as the display duration period of the current display duration time (step S1605). As in the first embodiment, the third display duration is 1 second. In a situation where the third display duration period is selected, as in the first embodiment, one special winning device 35 out of 11 game balls that reach a position where the special winning device 35 can win a prize is selected. You can expect to win a prize.

When either step S1604 or step S1605 is executed, information on the display duration selected in step S1604 or step S1605 is set in the fourth timer counter of the main side RAM 74 (step S1606). The numerical information set in the fourth timer counter is updated in the timer update process of step S210 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

With the above configuration, in a situation where the third general purpose figure side pending information is stored in a suspended state, the third display duration period is selected as the display continuation period of the display continuation time in the fourth general purpose figure display section 134. A prize to the special prize winning device 35 may occur. As a result, a player who expects to win a prize in the special winning device 35 will pay attention to whether or not a game ball will win in the specific operating section 124, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

If only the display continuation time in the third general figure display section 133 is executed, the third display continuation time is not selected in the display continuation time in the fourth general figure display section 134, and the display continuation in the fourth general figure display section 134 is not selected. In order for the third display continuation time to be selected in the third display continuation time, it is necessary to further hold and store the third general map side hold information. As a result, it becomes possible to increase the difficulty level for selecting the third display continuation time among the display continuation times in the fourth general figure display section 134, and from this point as well, the game ball is displayed in the specific operation section 124. The degree of attention paid to whether or not the player wins is increased, and as a result, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Even in a situation where the 3rd standard map side reservation information is not stored in storage, the selected winning result is obtained in the lottery process for period selection, so that the 3rd display continuation period is reached in the display continuation time on the 4th standard map display section 134. is selected. This makes it possible to increase the frequency with which the third display duration period is selected in the display continuation times in the fourth general figure display section 134.

In the process during the fourth normal figure variation in step S1408, it is determined whether the timing is during display continuation and before final display. Specifically, when the value of the fourth timer counter that measures the display duration of the current display duration is 0.4 seconds remaining, it is determined that the timing is before final display. If it is before final display, a process for regularly changing the display mode of the picture in the fourth general figure display section 134 is executed. Moreover, when the timing for final display has come, the display mode of the picture in the fourth general figure display section 134 is set to the display mode corresponding to the result of the current acceptance determination process. Thereafter, by adding 1 to the value of the 4th general map general power counter, the value of the counter changes from the value corresponding to the 4th general map changing process to the value corresponding to the 4th general map determining process (step S1409). Update to.

In the process during the 4th regular pattern determination in step S1409, it is determined whether the final display period (specifically, 0.4 seconds) of the current display continuation time has elapsed. If the final display period has elapsed, it is determined whether the result of the acceptance determination process in the current display continuation is an acceptance winning result. If it is not an accepted winning result, the value of the fourth general map general electric power counter is cleared to "0" and then the fourth general public map confirmation process is ended. If it is an accepted winning result, "1" is set in the fourth general power open counter provided in the main side RAM 74 as information on the number of times the special winning device 35 is opened and closed. Further, "10" is set in the fourth ordinary power winning counter provided in the main side RAM 74 as information on the upper limit number of winnings to the special winning device 35 in the current acceptance execution state. Further, information corresponding to 0.1 seconds is set in the fourth timer counter as information on the duration of opening of the special prize winning device 35. Further, by starting to output a drive signal to the opening/closing drive unit 47, the special prize winning device 35 is placed in an accepting state. After that, 1 is added to the 4th general map general electric power counter. Since the value of the 4th general electric power counter when the 4th general electric power map confirmation process is executed is "2," after adding 1, the value of the 4th general electric power general electric power counter is "3" corresponding to the 4th general electric power opening process (step S1410). ”.

In step S1410, during the fourth normal electricity release process, when a winning to the special winning device 35 has occurred, a value corresponding to the number of winnings is subtracted from the value of the fourth general electricity winning counter in the main side RAM 74. When the value of the fourth general power winning counter is "0", the value of the fourth general power open counter in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0", and furthermore, the output of the drive signal to the opening/closing drive section 47 is stopped. By stopping, the special prize winning device 35 is brought into a non-accepting state. Then, the value of the fourth general electric power counter is cleared to "0". As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the fourth general-purpose figure general-purpose electric power control process becomes the fourth general-purpose figure fluctuation start process (step S1407). In addition, even if the value of the 4th general electricity winning counter is not "0", if the value of the 4th timer counter of the main side RAM 74 is "0", the 4th general electricity winning prize counter of the main side RAM 74 The special prize winning device 35 is brought into a non-accepting state by clearing the values of the counter and the fourth normal power release counter to "0" and further stopping the output of the drive signal to the opening/closing drive unit 47. Then, the value of the fourth general electric power counter is cleared to "0". As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the fourth general-purpose figure general-purpose electric power control process becomes the fourth general-purpose figure fluctuation start process (step S1407).

As described above, by executing the fourth common figure general electricity control process, the variable display of the symbols is performed in the fourth common figure display section 134, triggered by the occurrence of a winning in the through prize winning section 34. If the acceptance determination process results in an acceptance winning result, the special winning device 35 enters the acceptance execution state after the display continuation on the fourth common symbol display section 134 ends. In the acceptance execution state, the special winning device 35 performs the acceptance state for 0.1 seconds once.

In the fourth general purpose electric power control process, when the first general electric power device 121 is in the open execution state, or when the second general electric power device 122 is in the open execution state, an affirmative determination is made in step S1401. In step S1411, fluctuation stop processing is executed. In the fluctuation stop processing, if the current display continuation time in the fourth general figure display section 134 is being executed, the display continuation time in the fourth general figure display section 134 is changed from the current display mode of the fourth general figure display section 134. In this state, the update of the fourth timer counter is temporarily stopped. Further, in the fluctuation stop processing, the fourth stop flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1".

In the fourth general electric power control process, if a negative determination is made in step S1401 and the fourth stopped flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1402: YES), the corresponding 4 Clear the stopped flag to "0" (step S1403). As a result, if the fourth general figure display section 134 has been temporarily stopped during the continuous display period, the continuous display period is restarted and the updating of the fourth timer counter is restarted.

As described above, in the fourth general purpose electric power control process, when the first general electric power device 121 is in the open execution state, or when the second general electric power device 122 is in the open execution state, the display on the fourth general electric power figure display section 134 Execute processing to temporarily stop the continuation. As a result, when the first general electric power device 121 is in the open execution state, or when the second general electric power device 122 is in the open execution state, the display continuation of the fourth general power figure display section 134 is prevented from proceeding. It becomes possible to do so. Therefore, when the first general power device 121 is in the open execution state or the second general power device 122 is in the open execution state, the special winning device 35 is prevented from entering the acceptance execution state. It becomes possible to

<Relationship between the display duration period of the fourth general drawing display section 134 and the acceptance state of the special prize winning device 35>
Next, the relationship between the display duration period of the fourth general figure display section 134 and the acceptance state of the special prize winning device 35 will be explained with reference to the time chart of FIG. 30. FIG. 30(a) shows a period during which the game ball is detected by the specific detection sensor 124a of the specific operating section 124, and FIG. 30(b) shows a period during which the display continuation is executed in the third general figure display section 133. , FIG. 30(c) shows the period during which the game ball is passing through the through prize winning section 34, and FIG. 30(d) shows the period when the game ball is in a position where winning to the special winning device 35 is possible. FIG. 30(e) shows a period during which the display continuation is executed in the fourth general drawing display section 134, and FIG. 30(f) shows a period during which the special prize winning device 35 is in the accepting state. show.

As already explained, the game balls that have reached the right side of the left end of the variable display unit 37 in the upper area PA1 can enter the introduction port 126 that allows the game balls to flow toward the specific operating section 124, and can also be introduced. If the ball does not enter the opening 126, it flows into the left side area PA2. Then, all the game balls flowing into the left area PA2 will be won in the through winning section 34. Moreover, the game balls flowing into the left side area PA2 can win a prize in the first operating section 32. Therefore, in a situation where either the first general power device 121 or the second general power device 122 is not in the open state, the direction is basically directed from the right side of the left end of the variable display unit 37 in the upper area PA1 toward the left side area PA2. A firing operation is performed so that the game ball flows downward. In the situation where the firing operation is performed in this way, the timing of t1, timing of t6, timing of t12, timing of t16, timing of t19, timing of t23, timing of t28, and As shown at the timing of t32, winnings basically occur in the through winning section 34, and as shown at the timings of t7 and t13 in FIG. 30(a), winnings in the specific operating section 124 occur with a low probability. do.

Based on the occurrence of winnings in the through winning section 34, timing from t1 to timing from t2, timing from t6 to timing from t8, timing from t12 to timing from t14, timing from t16 to timing from t20, timing from t23 to t29 In each period from timing t32 to timing t35, the display continuation times in the fourth general figure display section 134 are performed as shown in FIG. 30(e). Then, following the display continuation time, the timing of t2 to the timing of t3, the timing of t8 to the timing of t9, the timing of t14 to the timing of t15, the timing of t20 to the timing of t22, and the timing of t29 to the timing of t31. During each period from timing t35 to timing t36, the special prize winning device 35 enters the acceptance execution state as shown in FIG. 30(f).

In this case, as shown in FIG. 30(a), when a winning occurs in the specific operating section 124 at the timing t7, the third general figure display section The display continuation time at 133 is started. Then, at timing t13 in a situation where the display continuation is being executed, the winning to the specific operation section 124 occurs again as shown in FIG. 30(a). Due to the occurrence of a winning in the specific operation section 124, the third common map side pending information is put into a pending storage state. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 30(b), at the timing t25, the display continuation cycle in the third general-purpose figure display unit 133 ends, and the third general-purpose electric device 123 is immediately brought into the open execution state, although not shown. . Then, at timing t27, which is the timing after the opening execution state ends, a new display continuation time in the third general figure display section 133 is started as shown in FIG. 30(b). In this case, the state in which the third general map side pending information is held and stored is released.

When the game is played as described above, the third regular game side pending information is held and stored from timing t13 to timing t27. Therefore, the number of times the fourth general figure display section 134 continues displaying during each period from t1 timing to t2 timing, from t6 timing to t8 timing, from t12 timing to t14 timing, and from t32 timing to t35 timing is While the first display continuation period is selected as the display continuation period, the display continuation times of the fourth general figure display section 134 in each period from timing t16 to timing t20 and from timing t23 to timing t29 are as follows. The third display duration period is selected as the display duration period. Then, as shown in FIG. 30(d), t4 timing to t5 timing, t10 timing to t11 timing, t17 timing to t18 timing, t20 timing to t21 timing, t24 timing to t26 timing , the game ball reaches a position where it is possible to win a prize in the special winning device 35 during each period from timing t29 to timing t30 and from timing t33 to timing t34, but among these, the fourth normal The timing from t20 to the timing from t21 and from the timing from t29 to the timing from t30 included in the execution period of the acceptance execution state of the special winning prize device 35 immediately after the display continuation time that is the third display continuation period is executed in the diagram display section 134 A game ball that reaches a position where a prize can be won in the special prize winning device 35 wins a prize in the special prize winning device 35, and other game balls do not win in the special prize winning device 35.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, in addition to or in place of the effects described in the first embodiment, the following excellent effects are achieved.

When a prize is won in the through winning section 34, the 4th standard drawing side pending information is acquired, and by acquiring the 4th standard drawing side pending information, the display continuation of the 4th standard drawing display part 134 is repeated. In a configuration in which the acceptance execution state of the special winning device 35 can be performed after the end of the display continuation cycle, the award is acquired based on a winning to the specific operation unit 124 that does not directly contribute to the occurrence of the acceptance execution state of the special winning device 35. When the display continuation time of the fourth general-purpose figure display section 134 is executed in a situation where the third general-purpose figure side pending information that is displayed is stored on hold, the third display continuation period is set, and the third general-purpose figure side pending information When the display continuation time of the fourth general figure display section 134 is executed in a situation where the general figure display unit 134 is not stored on hold, the first display continuation period is set. When the first display duration period is set, it is basically impossible to win on the special winning device 35, and when the third display duration period is set, the special winning device 35 is A prize will be awarded. As a result, a player who expects to win a prize in the special winning device 35 will pay attention not only to the through winning section 34 and the special winning device 35 but also to the specific operation section 124, making it possible to improve the interest of the game. .

In order to make the game ball win in the specific actuation section 124, it is necessary to perform a firing operation so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2, whereas the first general electric device 121 and The second general power device 122 is provided in the right area PA3. As a result, if a jackpot state occurs in a situation where the 3rd general map side pending information is held and stored and the 3rd display duration period is repeatedly set in the display continuation times of the 4th standard card display section 134, the jackpot state In parallel with this, the display continuation times of the third general figure display section 133 are exhausted and the firing operation is performed aiming at winning the special electric winning device 36, so that no winning occurs in the specific operation section 124, During the jackpot state, there may be a situation where the 3rd normal figure side pending information is not stored pending. Therefore, it is possible to terminate the situation in which the third display duration period is repeatedly set by using the occurrence of a jackpot condition as a trigger, and the situation in which the third display duration period is repeatedly set can be prevented from continuing excessively. becomes possible.

The third general electric power opening lottery process is executed based on the acquisition of the third general electric power grid side reservation information, and when the third general electric power opening lottery process is won, the third general electric power device 123 enters the release execution state. Then, when a winning occurs in the third general electric device 123, the payout of game balls is executed. On the other hand, when the display continuation time of the fourth general map display section 134 is executed in a situation where the third general map side pending information is held and stored as described above, the third display continuation period is set, When the display duration period is set, winnings to the special winning device 35 will occur at a predetermined frequency. In other words, by storing the third general-purpose drawing side reservation information, there is not only the benefit that the third general-purpose power supply device 123 is in the open execution state, but also the benefit that winnings to the special winning device 35 occur at a predetermined frequency. will also be granted. Therefore, the player pays attention to whether or not the third normal figure side pending information is acquired, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Based on the occurrence of a winning in the special winning device 35, the first general public power lottery side reservation information is acquired, and the first general public power lottery opening lottery process is executed, and when the first general public power open lottery is won, the first general public power lottery lottery process is executed. A jackpot state occurs in which the first general power device 121 and the second general power device 122 are in an open execution state. As a result, it is expected that a prize will be won on the special prize winning device 35, and as a result, the third display duration period can be set in the display continuation times of the fourth general drawing display section 134. It is possible to draw the attention of the player to whether or not a winning occurs in the specific operation section 124. In addition, in the configuration where the first general drawing side pending information is acquired based on the occurrence of a winning to the first operating unit 32, even when a winning to the special winning device 35 occurs, the first general drawing side holding information is obtained. As a result, a player who expects a jackpot state not only expects a prize to be won in the first actuating section 32 but also to win a prize in the special prize winning device 35, which increases the interest of the game. It becomes possible to achieve this goal.

The first actuating part 32, the through winning part 34, the special winning device 35, and the specific actuating part 124 are all provided at positions that can be reached by the game ball when the firing operation is performed so as to flow down the left side area PA2. ing. As a result, by performing the firing operation so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2, it is possible to aim for the occurrence of winnings for all of the first operating section 32, through winning section 34, special winning device 35, and specific operating section 124. becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while suppressing the firing operation from becoming complicated.

If any one of the opening execution state of the first general power device 121, the opening execution state of the second general power device 122, and the acceptance execution state of the special prize winning device 35 is occurring, the other state occurs. However, even if any one of the opening execution state of the first general power device 121, the opening execution state of the second general power device 122, and the acceptance execution state of the special prize winning device 35 occurs. An open execution state of the third general power device 123 may occur. This makes it possible to diversify the manner in which winnings occur, thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The first general power device 121 enters the opening execution state based on the occurrence of a winning in the special winning device 35, and the second general power device 122 is opened based on the occurrence of a winning in the first general power device 121. In the configuration that is in the execution state, if any of the release execution state of the first general power device 121, the release execution state of the second general power device 122, and the acceptance execution state of the special prize winning device 35 is occurring, No other conditions occur. Thereby, the player can aim to win a prize in the special winning device 35, the first general power device 121, and the second general power device 122 in stages. On the other hand, the opening execution state of the third general power device 123 occurs regardless of winnings to the special winning device 35, the first general power device 121, and the second general power device 122. In this case, even if any one of the opening execution state of the first general power device 121, the opening execution state of the second general power device 122, and the acceptance execution state of the special winning device 35 occurs, the third An open execution state of the general power device 123 may occur. This makes it possible to create a situation in which, for example, it is possible to aim for a prize in the special prize winning device 35 and a prize in the third general power device 123 at the same time.

In a configuration in which the acceptance execution state of the special winning device 35 and the opening execution state of the third general power device 123 can occur at the same time, the third general power device 123 moves the game ball so that it flows down toward the special winning device 35. It is placed in a position where you can win if the coin is flowing down. Thereby, it becomes possible to perform a firing operation aiming at both winning a prize in the special winning device 35 and winning a prize in the third general power device 123.

When any one of the opening execution state of the first general power device 121, the opening execution state of the second general power device 122, and the acceptance execution state of the special prize winning device 35 occurs, a corresponding one of the other devices among them occurs. The display continuation times in the ordinary figure display sections 131, 132, and 134 are prevented from proceeding. As a result, by simply adjusting the progress of the display continuation times, any one of the opening execution state of the first general power device 121, the opening execution state of the second general power device 122, and the acceptance execution state of the special winning device 35 occurs. If so, it is possible to prevent other of these conditions from occurring.

The state in which the display continuation cycle is not allowed to proceed as described above is the state in which the first general power device 121 is opened, the second general power device 122 is opened, and the special winning device 35 is accepted. It is canceled after the state corresponding to the general figure display parts 131, 132, 134 that are not subject to the progress stoppage of the continuous time ends, and if the continuous display time has been temporarily stopped in the middle, the progress of the continuous display time is canceled. Progress is resumed. This makes it possible to prevent the display continuation times whose progress is to be stopped from being invalidated.

<Another form of the fourth embodiment>
(1) In the above configuration, if a jackpot state occurs in a situation where the upper limit of 4 pieces of 3rd general map side pending information is held and stored, until the situation where the 3rd standard card side pending information is not stored in storage. Because the longest period required for this is longer than the shortest period required from the start to the end of the jackpot state, when a jackpot state occurs in a situation where the third game side pending information is stored in a pending state, Although the configuration is such that it is possible for the 3rd general map side pending information to be held and stored even after the jackpot state ends, the present invention is not limited to this, and the 3rd standard game side pending information is the upper limit of 4 pieces. If a jackpot state occurs in a situation where pieces are held and stored, the longest period required until the state where the 3rd game side holding information is not held and stored is the shortest period required from the start to the end of the jackpot state. It is also possible to configure the period to be shorter than that. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the display duration of the display continuation times on the third general map display section 133 is set to 30 seconds instead of 300 seconds to increase the efficiency of digesting information on the third general map side, and when a jackpot state occurs. In this case, the display duration period of the display continuation times on the third general map display section 133 may be shortened compared to the case where there is no jackpot state, and in the case of a jackpot state, the third general map side pending information may be It is good also as a structure where the 3rd general purpose map side reservation information is erased from the 3rd general purpose map reservation area 143 so that it becomes a situation where it is not stored on hold. Thereby, when a jackpot state occurs, it is possible to reliably end the situation in which the third display duration period is repeatedly set.

(2) The display continuation of the third general figure display section 133 is not temporarily stopped even if the first general power device 121 or the second general power device 122 is in the open execution state, and the special winning device 35 Although the configuration is such that it is not temporarily stopped even if the device enters the acceptance execution state, the present invention is not limited to this. When any of the acceptance execution states of the device 35 occurs, the display continuation of the third general map display section 133 is temporarily stopped, and when the event that triggered the stop ends, the third general map display is stopped. A configuration may be adopted in which the display continuation times of the section 133 are restarted. In this configuration, in the jackpot state, the display continuation of the third common symbol display section 133 is temporarily stopped, so that the jackpot state is started in a situation where the third common symbol side pending information is held and stored. In this case, even after the jackpot state ends, the situation in which the third general symbol side pending information is held and stored is likely to be maintained. Therefore, it is possible to make it possible for the situation in which winnings to the special winning device 35 occur at a predetermined frequency to continue even after the jackpot state ends.

(3) Even if the 4th standard drawing side pending information is acquired, the special winning device 35 does not enter the acceptance execution state unless an acceptance winning result is obtained in the acceptance determination process, but the 4th standard drawing side pending information When the special prize winning device 35 is acquired, the configuration may be such that the special prize winning device 35 is surely in the acceptance execution state, and when the 4th general drawing side pending information is acquired, the special winning prize device 35 is in the acceptance execution state with approximately 100% probability. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the state is set.

(4) When any one of the acceptance execution state of the special prize winning device 35, the opening execution state of the first general power device 121, and the opening execution state of the second general power device 122 occurs, the third general power drawing display section 133 A configuration may also be adopted in which the continuous display is terminated midway and is invalidated as is.

(5) In the middle of the continuous display on the ordinary figure display parts 131, 132, 134, the predetermined devices 35, 121, 122 that do not correspond to the ordinary figure display parts 131, 132, 134 enter the acceptance execution state or the release execution state. In this case, the display continuation is temporarily stopped in the middle of the execution, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the period during which the predetermined device 35, 121, 122 is in the acceptance execution state or the release execution state. The display continuation period of the display continuation times may be extended by the same amount. In this case, during the period when the predetermined device 35, 121, 122 is in the acceptance execution state or the release execution state, the fluctuation display of the picture is displayed on the regular figure display section 131, 132, 134 corresponding to the display continuation time in the middle of execution. The configuration may be continued.

(6) A configuration may also be provided in which a ball entry device that enables winning of game balls when a winning occurs in the second general electric device 122 is separately provided. The ball entry device may have a configuration in which the electric drive unit is activated based on the winning of the second general electricity device 122, so that the winning of game balls is possible. In addition, in the ball entering device, when the game ball that has won a prize in the second electric power device 122 comes into contact with the mechanical operating mechanism and operates the operating mechanism, the game ball enters a state where it is possible to win a prize. It may be configured such that the game ball that enters the device comes into contact with another mechanical operating mechanism and operates the operating mechanism, thereby making it impossible for the game ball to win a prize. In this case, by executing the payout of game balls based on winnings in the ball entry device, it is possible to increase the number of game balls given to the player in a jackpot state.

(7) Although the configuration has been described in which the 4th general map side reservation information is not stored on hold, a configuration may be adopted in which the 4th general map side reservation information is stored on hold.

(8) The execution mode of the opening execution state of the third general power device 123 is arbitrary. For example, when the third general power device 123 is in the opening execution state, the upper limit number of the third general power device 123 is It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the third power supply device 123 is in an open state so that winning of the game ball can be expected. Thereby, it becomes possible to increase the advantage of the third general power device 123 being in the open execution state.

(9) When the display continuation time of the fourth general map display section 134 is started in a situation where the third general map side pending information is stored in a suspended state, the configuration is limited to a configuration in which the third display continuation period is reliably set. The configuration may be such that the third display duration period is easily set without being set. Specifically, the display of the fourth general map display section 134 is continued regardless of whether the third general purpose map side pending information is not stored on hold or the third general public map side pending information is stored on hold. Although the third display duration period can be set in the third display period, the situation in which the 3rd program side pending information is held and stored is better than the situation in which the 3rd program side pending information is not stored in the 4th program. A configuration may be adopted in which the third display duration period is easily set in the display duration times of the display unit 134.

<Fifth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the configuration of the specific operation section 124 is different from the fourth embodiment. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the fourth embodiment will be described, and descriptions of the same configurations as the fourth embodiment will basically be omitted.

In the fourth embodiment, the specific actuation section 124 is provided on the back wall 125 that defines the back side of the stage 37a in the variable display unit 37, but in this embodiment, the disk member 151 is provided on the stage 37a. A specific actuating portion 124 is provided in the disc member 151 so that the game ball supplied to the disc member 151 can enter the ball. The disk member 151 will be explained in detail. FIG. 31 is a plan view of the disk member 151.

The disc member 151 is provided on the stage 37a so that the upper surface of the disc member 151 is visible to the player. The disk member 151 is provided with three holes that vertically penetrate the disk member 151, one of which is the specific actuation section 124, and the remaining two holes are for discharge. These are holes 152 and 153. The specific operating portion 124 and discharge holes 152 and 153 are provided at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction, and the upper surface of the disc member 151 is arranged so that the game balls supplied to the disc member 151 can be removed from the specific operating portion 124 and discharged. The ball is sloped downward toward the specific operating section 124 and the discharge holes 152, 153 so that the ball enters either of the holes 152, 153. The game balls that entered the specific actuating section 124 are discharged as they are to the back side of the game board 24, and the game balls that entered the discharge holes 152, 153 are discharged to the lower area PA4 and are discharged to the back side of the game board 24. Continue flowing down. In addition, the game ball that entered the discharge holes 152, 153 and was discharged to the lower area PA4 can enter the first actuating part 32 provided in the lower area PA4.

The game balls that entered the inlet 126 of the variable display unit 37 and passed through the warp passage 127 are supplied onto the disk member 151. The game ball supplied onto the disk member 151 enters the specific operating section 124 with a probability of 1/3, and enters either of the discharge holes 152, 153 with a probability of 2/3.

According to the above configuration, a player who expects a game ball to enter the specific operating section 124 not only knows that a game ball will be supplied to the disc member 151, but also that when a game ball is supplied to the disc member 151, It is expected that the game ball will enter the specific operating section 124. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Sixth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the fourth embodiment described above in the processing configuration of the process for specifying the fourth general figure variation period executed by the main side MPU 72. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the fourth embodiment will be described, and descriptions of the same configurations as the fourth embodiment will basically be omitted.

FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the process for specifying the fourth regular pattern fluctuation period in this embodiment. First, it is determined whether one or more pieces of 3rd general drawing side reservation information are stored in the first area 143a to the fourth area 143d of the 3rd general drawing holding area 143, or whether the display continuation of the third general drawing display section 133 is executed. It is determined whether it is inside (step S1701).

If a negative determination is made in step S1701, a lottery process for selecting a period is executed (step S1702). In this lottery process, numerical information is acquired from a random number counter that is updated periodically (for example, every 4 milliseconds) in the main side RAM 74, and the acquired numerical information is stored in a period selection table stored in advance in the main side ROM 73. Verify against. The period selection table is set so that the selection result will be selected with a probability of 1/500.

If the result of the lottery process for period selection is not a selected winning result but a losing result (step S1703: NO), the first display duration period is selected as the display duration period of the current display duration time (step S1704). As in the first embodiment, the first display duration is 0.45 seconds. In a situation where the first display duration period is selected, as in the first embodiment, even if the special winning device 35 enters the acceptance execution state, basically no prize winning to the special winning device 35 occurs.

On the other hand, if one or more pieces of 3rd general map side pending information are stored, or the display continuation times of the 3rd general map display section 133 are being executed, and an affirmative determination is made in step S1701, or a lottery for period selection is made. If the processing result is a selection winning result and an affirmative determination is made in step S1703, the third display duration period is selected as the display duration period of the current display duration time (step S1705). As in the first embodiment, the third display duration is 1 second. In a situation where the third display duration period is selected, as in the first embodiment, one special winning device 35 out of 11 game balls that reach a position where the special winning device 35 can win a prize is selected. You can expect to win a prize.

When either step S1704 or step S1705 is executed, information on the display duration selected in step S1704 or step S1705 is set in the fourth timer counter of the main side RAM 74 (step S1706).

According to the above configuration, not only when the third general map side pending information is held and stored, but also when the display continuation time is executed in the third general map display section 133, the fourth general map display section A third display continuation period is set at the 134th display continuation time. Then, by selecting the third display duration period, a prize in the special prize winning device 35 may occur. This makes it possible to increase the frequency of winnings to the special winning device 35.

In addition, when the display continuation cycle is executed on the third general map display unit 133, not only is there a possibility that the third general power device 123 will be in the open execution state, but also the fourth general map display By setting the third display continuation period in the display continuation times of the section 134, winnings to the special winning device 35 can occur at a predetermined frequency. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the execution of the display continuation on the third general figure display section 133, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the display continuation time of the fourth general map display section 134 is started in a situation where the display continuous period of the third general map display section 133 is being executed, the third display continuation period is surely set. However, the third display duration period may be easily set. Specifically, regardless of whether the display continuation times of the third general map display section 133 are not being executed or the situation where the display continuation times of the third general map display section 133 is being executed, the fourth general map display section 133 can be displayed. Although the third display duration period can be set in the display continuation times of the display unit 134, the display continuation time of the third general figure display unit 133 is better when the display continuation time of the third general figure display unit 133 is being executed. The configuration may be such that the third display continuation period is more likely to be set in the display continuation times of the fourth general figure display section 134 than in a situation where the display is not executed.

Moreover, it is good also as a structure where the process of step S1702 and step S1703 is not performed in the process of specifying the 4th general pattern fluctuation period. In this case, only when one or more pieces of third general map side pending information are stored or when the display continuation time of the third general map display section 133 is being executed, the display of the fourth general map display section 134 In the continuation time, a third display continuation period is set.

<Seventh embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing structure of the third general electric power control process executed by the main side MPU 72 is different from that of the fourth embodiment. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the fourth embodiment will be described, and descriptions of the same configurations as the fourth embodiment will basically be omitted.

FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the third general electric power control process in this embodiment. If a winning has occurred in the specific operation unit 124 (step S1801: YES), the third general-purpose drawing side reservation information stored in the first area 143a to fourth area 143d of the third general-purpose drawing holding area 143 On the condition that the number is less than the upper limit of 4 (step S1802: NO), storage processing to the third general drawing reservation area 143 is executed (step S1803). The processing contents of the storage process are the same as step S1303 of the third general electric power control process (FIG. 26) in the fourth embodiment.

If a negative determination is made in step S1801, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1802, or if the process of step S1803 is executed, it is determined whether the first general power device 121 is in the opening execution state or not. It is determined whether the device 122 is in the open execution state or whether the special prize winning device 35 is in the acceptance execution state (step S1804). If a negative determination is made in step S1804, processing in steps S1805 and S1806 is executed. These processes will be explained later. Thereafter, the processes from step S1807 to step S1813 are executed. The processing contents of steps S1807 to S1813 are the same as the processing contents of steps S1304 to S1310 of the third general electric power control process (FIG. 26) in the fourth embodiment.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1804, a fluctuation stop process is executed in step S1814. In the fluctuation stop processing, if the display continuation time in the third general figure display section 133 is currently being executed, the display continuation time in the third general figure display section 133 is changed from the current display mode of the third general figure display section 133. In this state, the update of the third timer counter is temporarily stopped. In addition, in the fluctuation stop processing, the third stop flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1".

Thereafter, on condition that the first general power device 121 is in the release execution state or the second general power device 122 is in the release execution state (step S1815: YES), the clearing process of the third general power map reservation area 143 is performed. Execute (step S1816). In the clearing process, the first area 143a to the fourth area 143d of the third general map holding area 143 are cleared to "0". As a result, even if the third general purpose figure side pending information is held and stored, the third general purpose figure side pending information is erased and becomes in a state where it is not held and stored. Further, in the clearing process, the third general-purpose figure execution area 143e is cleared to "0" and the third general-purpose figure general-purpose electric counter is cleared to "0". As a result, even if the third general figure display section 133 is currently performing a display continuation time, it is invalidated.

In this embodiment, when the third general power device 123 is in the open execution state, in the first general power power control process (FIG. 24), an affirmative determination is made in step S1104, so that the fluctuation stop process (step S1116) is performed. is executed, and in the second general electric power control process (FIG. 25), by making an affirmative determination in step S1204, the fluctuation stop process (step S1215) is executed, and the fourth general electric power control process (FIG. 27) Then, by making an affirmative determination in step S1401, fluctuation stop processing (step S1411) is executed. Therefore, in a situation where the third general power device 123 is in the release execution state, the first general power device 121 or the second general power device 122 will not be in the release execution state, and furthermore, the special winning device 35 will be in the release execution state. Not at all.

In the third general electric power control process, if a negative determination is made in step S1804 and the third stopped flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1805: YES), the corresponding 3. Clear the stopped flag to "0" (step S1806). As a result, if the third general figure display section 133 has been temporarily stopped during the continuous display period, the continuous display period is restarted and the updating of the third timer counter is restarted.

According to the above configuration, when the first general power device 121 or the second general power device 122 enters the release execution state, even if the third general purpose power device side hold information is held and stored, it is erased. This creates a situation in which the third display duration period is selected in the display continuation times of the fourth general map display section 134 when the first general power device 121 or the second general power device 122 enters the open execution state. It becomes possible to terminate. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a prize may be won to the special winning device 35 from continuing even after the first general power device 121 or the second general power device 122 enters the open execution state. Become.

<Eighth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the fourth embodiment in the manner in which the main side MPU 72 selects the display duration period of the third general figure display section 133. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the fourth embodiment will be described, and descriptions of the same configurations as the fourth embodiment will basically be omitted.

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a process for specifying the third general pattern variation period executed by the main MPU 72. Note that the process for specifying the third general-purpose figure fluctuation period is executed in the third general-purpose figure fluctuation start process of step S1307 in the third general-purpose figure general-purpose power control process (FIG. 26).

First, it is determined whether one or more pieces of second general drawing side reservation information are stored in the first area 142a to fourth area 142d of the second general drawing holding area 142, or whether the display continuation time of the second general drawing drawing section 132 is executed. It is determined whether it is inside (step S1901). If a negative determination is made in step S1901, a long period of time is selected as the display continuation period of the current display continuation time on the third general figure display section 133 (step S1902). The long period is set to 300 seconds, which is the same as the display duration of the third general figure display section 133 in the fourth embodiment. Therefore, in the continuous display of the third general map display section 133, further winnings can be expected to occur in the specific operation section 124, and when the winning occurs, the third general public drawing side reservation information is held and stored. The third display continuation period is selected in the display continuation time of the fourth general figure display section 134. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1901, a short period of time is selected as the display continuation period of the current display continuation time on the third general figure display section 133 (step S1903). The short period is set to 0.5 seconds. In this case, since no further winnings can be expected in the specific operation section 124 during the continuous display of the third general pattern display section 133, the third general pattern side pending information will not be held and stored, and the fourth general pattern side pending information will not be stored. The third display continuation period is not selected in the display continuation times of the diagram display section 134.

When either step S1902 or step S1903 is executed, information on the display duration selected in step S1902 or step S1903 is set in the third timer counter of the main side RAM 74 (step S1904). The numerical information set in the third timer counter is updated in the timer update process of step S210 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

According to the above configuration, when the first general power device 121 enters the open execution state and the second general power device side reservation information is acquired based on winning to the first general power device 121, the third general power device side reservation information will not be retained and stored. Then, if the third general map side reservation information is not stored on hold, the third display continuation period is not selected in the display continuation times of the fourth general map display section 134, so no winning will occur in the special winning device 35. Become. This prevents the situation in which the third display duration period is selected in the display continuation times of the fourth general map display section 134 to be prevented from continuing when the first general power device 121 enters the open execution state. becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a prize may be won to the special prize winning device 35 from continuing until after the first general power device 121 enters the open execution state.

<Ninth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the fourth embodiment described above in the processing configuration of the process for specifying the fourth general figure variation period executed by the main side MPU 72. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the fourth embodiment will be described, and descriptions of the same configurations as the fourth embodiment will basically be omitted.

FIG. 35 is a flowchart illustrating a process for specifying the fourth common pattern fluctuation period in this embodiment. First, it is determined whether one or more pieces of 3rd standard map side reservation information are stored in the first area 143a to the fourth area 143d of the 3rd standard card reservation area 143 (step S2001). If a negative determination is made in step S2001, it is determined whether one or more pieces of 4th general map side reservation information are stored in the first to fourth areas of the 4th standard computer reservation area (step S2002 ).

Here, in the fourth embodiment described above, the fourth general purpose figure side pending information is not stored on hold, but in this embodiment, in a situation where the display continuation time is executed in the fourth general purpose figure display section 134, the fourth general purpose figure side pending information is When a prize is won in the winning section 34, the fourth common map side reservation information is acquired and stored on hold when the prize is won. Although the upper limit number of items to be held and stored is set to four, it is not limited to this, and may be one, two, or three, or five or more.

If a negative determination is made in step S2002, a lottery process for selecting a period is executed (step S2003). In the lottery process, numerical information is acquired from a random number counter that is updated periodically (for example, every 4 milliseconds) in the main side RAM 74, and the acquired numerical information is stored in a period selection table stored in advance in the main side ROM 73. Verify against. The period selection table is set so that the selection result will be selected with a probability of 1/500.

If the result of the lottery process for period selection is not a selected winning result but a losing result (step S2004: NO), the first display duration period is selected as the display duration period of the current display duration time (step S2005). As in the first embodiment, the first display duration is 0.45 seconds. In a situation where the first display duration period is selected, as in the first embodiment, even if the special winning device 35 enters the acceptance execution state, basically no prize winning to the special winning device 35 occurs.

On the other hand, if one or more pieces of 3rd general map side reservation information are stored and an affirmative determination is made in step S2001, one or more pieces of 4th general map side reservation information are stored and an affirmative determination is made in step S2002. In this case, or if the result of the period selection lottery process is a selection winning result and an affirmative determination is made in step S2004, the third display continuation period is selected as the display continuation period of the current display continuation time (step S2006). As in the first embodiment, the third display duration is 1 second. In a situation where the third display duration period is selected, as in the first embodiment, one special winning device 35 out of 11 game balls that reach a position where the special winning device 35 can win a prize is selected. You can expect to win a prize.

When either step S2005 or step S2006 is executed, information on the display duration selected in step S2005 or step S2006 is set in the fourth timer counter of the main side RAM 74 (step S2007).

According to the above configuration, not only when the third general purpose map side reservation information is stored pending storage but also when the fourth general public map side reservation information is stored pending storage, the display continuation time of the fourth general public map display section 134 A third display duration period is selected. Then, by selecting the third display duration period, a prize in the special prize winning device 35 can occur. This makes it possible to increase the frequency of winnings to the special winning device 35.

In particular, when the third display continuation period is selected, a new prize is likely to occur in the through prize section 34 in a situation where the display continuation is being executed in the fourth general figure display section 134. This makes it easier for the situation in which the general map side pending information is held and stored to continue. That is, by storing the third general purpose figure side pending information, the third display continuation period is selected in the display continuation time of the fourth general purpose figure display section 134. Then, by selecting the third display duration period, it becomes easier to store the 4th standard computer side pending information, and when the 4th standard computer side pending information is held and stored, the 3rd standard computer side pending information Even if it is not stored on hold, the third display continuation period is selected at the display continuation time of the fourth general figure display section 134. Therefore, it becomes possible to easily continue the situation in which the third display continuation period is selected in the display continuation times of the fourth general figure display section 134.

<Tenth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the configuration of the gaming area PA is different from the above-described first embodiment, and this is executed when a winning occurs in the first operating section 32 and when a winning occurs in the special winning device 35. The processing content is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be described, and descriptions of the same configurations as the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

FIG. 36 is a front view of the game board 24 in this embodiment. The game area PA is divided into an upper area PA1, a left area PA2, a right area PA3, and a lower area PA4 by the variable display unit 37, as in the first embodiment. The first actuating section 32 is provided in the lower area PA4 as in the first embodiment. On the other hand, in the first embodiment, the through-winning section 34 and the special winning device 35 were provided in the left area PA2, but in this embodiment, the through-winning section 34 and the special winning device 35 are not provided in the left area PA2, but on the right side. It is provided in area PA3. Further, in the right area PA3, a first general power device 121, a second general power device 122, and a third general power device 123 are provided. The configurations of the first general power device 121, the second general power device 122, and the third general power device 123 are similar to those in the fourth embodiment.

In the right area PA3, the first general power device 121, the second general power device 122, and the third general power device 123 are arranged in the vertical direction with a predetermined interval. In this case, the first general electric power device 121 is arranged at the most upstream side, the second general electric power device 122 is arranged below it, and the third general electric power device 123 is arranged below it. The first general electric power device 121, the second general electric power device 122, and the third general electric power device 123 are all incapable of winning game balls when the corresponding general electric power accessories 121a to 123a are in the closed state, When the corresponding common electric accessories 121a to 123a are opened, it becomes possible to win a game ball. Then, the game ball that has won in any one of the first general power device 121, the second general power device 122, and the third general power device 123 is guided to the back side of the game board 24 and discharged.

By winning in the internal lottery executed based on the prize entered into the first actuating unit 32, the first general power device 121 is brought into an opening execution state, and the first general power device 121 is brought into an open state. In addition, by winning the internal lottery executed based on winnings in the first general power device 121, the second general power device 122 becomes in an opening execution state, and the second general power device 122 becomes in an open state. In addition, by winning the internal lottery executed based on winnings in the second general power device 122, the third general power device 123 becomes in an opening execution state, and the third general power device 123 becomes in an open state. No matter when a game ball enters any of the first general electric power device 121, the second general electric power device 122, and the third general electric power device 123, 15 game balls are played for one game ball that enters the ball. The ball is paid out.

In the right area PA3, a through prize winning section 34 and a special winning device 35 are provided downstream of the first general power device 121 to the third general power device 123. Between the third general power device 123 and the through winning section 34, there are game balls that have flowed into the right side area PA3 but have not won in any of the first general power device 121 to the third general power device 123. An upper guide region 155 is formed to reliably guide the player to the through winning section 34. The upper guide region 155 can be formed in any manner, but in the present pachinko machine 10, the upper guide region 155 is formed by arranging a plurality of nails 24b.

The through winning part 34 and the special winning device 35 are arranged to be spaced apart in the vertical direction, with the through winning part 34 facing upward. In this case, the vertical positional relationship between the through-winning part 34 and the special winning device 35 is the same as that in the first embodiment, except that the orientation of the special winning device 35 is left and right opposite to that in the first embodiment. This is the same as the embodiment. In addition, in the area between the through-winning section 34 and the special winning device 35, the winning game ball in the through-winning section 34 is securely placed in the entrance section 42a of the discharge passage 42 or the opening/closing member 43 disposed at the non-accepting position. A lower guide area 156 is formed for guiding. The lower guide region 156 can be formed in any manner, but in the present pachinko machine 10, the lower guide region 156 is formed by arranging a plurality of nails 24b and by the standing wall 48 of the special winning device 35. By forming the lower guide area 156, if the opening/closing member 43 is placed in the non-accepting position, the winning game ball in the through winning section 34 will be reliably placed in the non-accepting position. If the game ball reaches the member 43 and the opening/closing member 43 is placed at the receiving position, the game ball that has won the through prize part 34 will surely enter the discharge passage 42.

In addition, since the upper surface of the opening/closing member 43 and the ball receiving surface 44 are formed to slope downward toward the left, the game balls placed on these surfaces flow down toward the left due to their own weight. It happens. In this case, the positional relationship of the special prize winning device 35 with respect to the first operating section 32 is such that the game ball flowing down with the upper surface of the opening/closing member 43 and the ball receiving surface 44 facing left does not enter the first operating section 32 or The position is set in such a way that it is difficult to hit the ball. In addition, since the introduction port 37b that allows the game balls to flow into the stage 37a in the variable display unit 37 is provided only at the upper left of the variable display unit 37, the game balls are launched so as to flow down the right side area PA3. When the operation is being performed, game balls are not supplied to the stage 37a through the introduction port 37b. Therefore, in order to generate a winning in the first actuating section 32, the game ball is not launched so as to flow down the right area PA3, but the game ball is launched so as to flow down the left area PA2. There is a need.

A first general figure display section 131, a second general figure display section 132, a third general figure display section 133, a fourth general figure display section 134, and a first general figure display section are provided in the lower right side of the gaming area PA in an area through which the game ball does not pass. A figure reservation display section 135, a second ordinary figure reservation display section 136, and a third ordinary figure reservation display section 137 are provided. Each of the first general figure display section 131 to the fourth general figure display section 134 is constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner. In this case, although it is impossible to perform a complex display like the symbol display device 51 in the first general figure display section 131 to the fourth general figure display section 134, It becomes possible to reduce the processing load for controlling the display of the display unit 134. However, the display device is not limited to this, and may be configured by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix display. In addition, the patterns displayed in the first general figure display section 131 to the fourth general figure display section 134 include a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are displayed, and a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed. Possible configurations include a configuration in which , or a configuration in which multiple types of colors are displayed. Further, the display range of the first general figure display section 131 to the fourth general figure display section 134 is narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 51. Furthermore, the display range of both the first general figure display part 131 to the fourth general figure display part 134 and the first general figure reservation display part 135 to the third general figure reservation display part 137 is also the display range of the symbol display device 51. The area is narrower than the display screen. As a result, the player's attention is focused on the symbol display device 51 rather than on the first normal pattern display section 131 to the fourth normal pattern display section 134 and the first normal pattern pending display section 135 to the third normal pattern pending display section 137. It is possible to increase it.

Based on the game ball entering the first actuating section 32, the first normal figure display section 131 performs display continuation times including variable display of symbols. Further, the first general figure reservation display section 135 is provided at a position adjacent to the first general figure display section 131. Information corresponding to the number of game balls entered into the first actuating section 32 is held as the first general drawing side holding information up to a maximum of four, and the number of held balls is displayed by lighting the first general drawing holding display section 135. It looks like this. Note that, similarly to the fourth embodiment, the main side RAM 74 is provided with a first general purpose figure reservation area 141 as an area for storing first general purpose figure side reservation information.

Based on the game ball entering the first general-purpose electric device 121, a display continuation including a variable display of the pattern is performed in the second general-purpose figure display section 132. Further, the second general figure reservation display section 136 is provided at a position adjacent to the second ordinary figure display section 132. Information corresponding to the number of game balls that have entered the first general electricity device 121 is held as second general drawing side holding information up to a maximum of four, and the number of held balls is displayed by lighting the second general drawing holding display section 136. It has become so. Note that, similarly to the fourth embodiment, the main side RAM 74 is provided with a second general purpose figure reservation area 142 as an area for storing second general purpose figure side reservation information.

Based on the game ball entering the second general-purpose electric device 122, the third general-purpose figure display section 133 performs a display continuation including a variable display of the symbols. Further, the third general figure reservation display section 137 is provided at a position adjacent to the third ordinary figure display section 133. Information corresponding to the number of game balls won in the second general electricity device 122 is held as the third general drawing side holding information up to a maximum of four, and the number of held balls is displayed by lighting the third general drawing holding display section 137. It has become so. Note that, similarly to the fourth embodiment, the main side RAM 74 is provided with a third general-purpose figure reservation area 143 as an area for storing third general-purpose figure side reservation information.

Based on the game ball entering the through prize winning section 34, a display continuation including a variable display of symbols is performed in the fourth general figure display section 134. Here, the fourth common figure display section 134 is not provided with a common figure pending display section. In other words, the 4th common map side reservation information acquired when a prize is won in the through winning section 34 is not stored on a reservation basis. Note that, similarly to the fourth embodiment, the main side RAM 74 is provided with a fourth general-purpose figure execution area 144 as an area for storing fourth general-purpose figure side pending information.

Here, the first display duration period and the third display duration period are set as the display duration periods of the display duration times in the fourth general figure display section 134. The first display duration period is set to 0.45 seconds as in the first embodiment. Further, the third display duration period is set to 1.5 seconds, unlike the first embodiment. In this case, the positional relationship between the through winning part 34 and the special winning device 35 is such that when the first display duration period is selected in the display continuation time of the fourth general drawing display part 134, the winning part to the special winning device 35 is becomes impossible or difficult to occur, and if the third display duration period is selected in the display continuation times of the fourth general figure display section 134, the ratio of one out of two game balls won in the through-winning section 34. The positional relationship is set such that a winning to the special winning device 35 occurs. When a winning occurs in the special winning device 35, 15 game balls are paid out for each game ball that enters. As a result, when the third display continuation time is selected in the display continuation times of the fourth general figure display section 134, a larger number of game balls than the number of game balls supplied to the through winning section 34 are played. It will be paid out to the person.

<1st general map general electric power control process>
Next, various processes executed by the main MPU 72 will be explained. First, the first general purpose electric power control process for controlling the display continuation times in the first general electric power display section 131 and the execution control of the opening execution state of the first general electric power device 121 will be described. FIG. 37 is a slow chart showing the first general electric power control process.

If a winning has occurred in the first operating unit 32 (step S2101: YES), the first general drawing side reservation information stored in the first area 141a to fourth area 141d of the first general drawing holding area 141 On the condition that the number is less than the upper limit of 4 (step S2102: NO), storage processing to the first general drawing reservation area 141 is executed (step S2103). In this storage process, the numerical information of the random number counter C11 is used as the first general-purpose figure-side pending information, and the first general-purpose figure-side pending information in the first area 141a to fourth area 141d of the first general-purpose figure holding area 141 is stored. The data is stored in the area with the earliest digestion order among the areas that have not been processed. In addition, when the first general drawing side reservation information is acquired, the display contents of the first general drawing drawing side holding display section 135 are updated in accordance with the current increase in the number of pieces of first general drawing side holding information. Configure the data to do so.

If a negative determination is made in step S2101, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2102, or if the process of step S2103 is executed, whether the second general power device 122 or the third general power device 123 is in the opening execution state. It is determined whether or not (step S2104). If a negative determination is made in step S2104, the processes of steps S2105 to S2115 are executed. The processing contents of steps S2105 to S2115 are the same as the processing contents of steps S1105 to S1115 of the first general electric power control process (FIG. 24) in the fourth embodiment. Further, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2104, the process of step S2116 is executed. The processing content of step S2116 is the same as the processing content of step S1116 of the first general electric power control process (FIG. 24) in the fourth embodiment.

As described above, by executing the first common symbol general electricity control process, the first common symbol display section 131 displays a changing pattern in response to the occurrence of a winning in the first actuating section 32. A variable display of symbols is performed on the symbol display device 51. In the case where the first general electric power opening lottery is won in the first general electric power opening lottery process, after the display continuation times on the first general electric power symbol display section 131 and the symbol display device 51 are completed, the first general electric power device 121 is It becomes an open execution state. In the opening execution state, the opening state for 3 seconds is performed three times in the first general power device 121 with a closing duration period of 1 second in between. In addition, if the number of winning game balls to the first general electric device 121 reaches 10 or more before the 3-second open state is performed three times, the 3-second open state is performed three times. Even if there is, the current open execution state is terminated. In addition, when a game ball is won in the first general electricity device 121, second general figure side reservation information is stored in the second general figure holding area 142 with an upper limit of four pieces.

In addition, in the first general purpose electric power control process, when the second general electric power device 122 or the third general electric power device 123 is in the open execution state, a process for temporarily stopping the display continuation of the first general electric power display section 131 is performed. Execute. Thereby, when the second general power device 122 or the third general power device 123 is in the open execution state, it is possible to prevent the first general power map display section 131 from continuing to display. Therefore, when the second general power device 122 or the third general power device 123 is in the open execution state, it is possible to prevent the first general power device 121 from going into the open execution state redundantly. Become.

<Second general electric power control process>
Next, the second general electric power control process executed by the main side MPU 72 will be explained. In the second general purpose electric power control process, execution control of the display continuation times in the second general electric power display section 132 and execution control of the open execution state of the second general electric power device 122 are performed. FIG. 38 is a slow chart showing the second general electric power control process.

If a winning has occurred in the first general-purpose drawing device 121 (step S2201: YES), the second general-purpose drawing side reservation stored in the first area 142a to fourth area 142d of the second general-purpose drawing holding area 142 On the condition that the number of pieces of information is less than the upper limit of 4 pieces (step S2202: NO), storage processing in the second general drawing reservation area 142 is executed (step S2203). In this storage process, the numerical information of the random number counter C11 is used as the second general-purpose figure-side pending information, and the second general-purpose figure-side pending information in the first area 142a to fourth area 142d of the second general-purpose figure holding area 142 is stored. The data is stored in the area with the earliest digestion order among the areas that have not been processed. In addition, when the second general purpose drawing side reservation information is acquired, the display contents of the second general drawing side holding display section 136 are updated in accordance with the current increase in the number of pieces of second general drawing side holding information. Configure the data to do so.

If a negative determination is made in step S2201, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2202, or if the process in step S2203 is executed, whether the first general power device 121 or the third general power device 123 is in the opening execution state. It is determined whether or not (step S2204). If a negative determination is made in step S2204, the processes of steps S2205 to S2214 are executed. The processing contents of these steps S2205 to S2214 are the same as the processing contents of steps S1205 to S1214 of the second general electric power control process (FIG. 25) in the fourth embodiment. Further, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2204, the process of step S2215 is executed. The processing content of step S2215 is the same as the processing content of step S1215 of the second general electric power control process (FIG. 25) in the fourth embodiment.

As described above, by executing the second general figure general electricity control process, the fluctuation display of the picture is performed in the second general figure display section 132, triggered by the occurrence of a winning in the first general electric figure device 121. . Then, in the case where the second general electric power opening is won in the second general electric power opening lottery process, the second general electric power device 122 enters the opening execution state after the display continuation time on the second general electric power drawing display section 132 ends. . In the opening execution state, the second general power device 122 performs the opening state for 3 seconds three times with a closing duration period of 1 second in between. In addition, if the number of winning game balls to the second power supply device 122 reaches 10 or more before the 3-second open state is performed three times, the 3-second open state is performed three times. Even if there is, the current open execution state is terminated. In addition, when a game ball enters the second general electricity device 122, the third general figure side holding information is stored in the third general figure holding area 143 with an upper limit of four pieces.

In addition, in the second general purpose electric power control process, when the first general electric power device 121 or the third general electric power device 123 is in the open execution state, a process for temporarily stopping the display continuation of the second general electric power display section 132 is performed. Execute. Thereby, when the first general power device 121 or the third general power device 123 is in the open execution state, it is possible to prevent the second general power map display section 132 from continuing to display. Therefore, when the first general power device 121 or the third general power device 123 is in the open execution state, it is possible to prevent the second general power device 122 from going into the open execution state redundantly. Become.

<3rd general map general electric power control process>
Next, the third general electric power control process executed by the main side MPU 72 will be explained. In the third general purpose electric power control process, execution control of the display continuation times in the third general electric power display section 133 and execution control of the open execution state of the third general electric power device 123 are performed. FIG. 39 is a slow chart showing the third general-purpose electric power control process.

If a winning has occurred in the second general-purpose drawing device 122 (step S2301: YES), the third general-purpose drawing side reservation stored in the first area 143a to fourth area 143d of the third general-purpose drawing holding area 143 On the condition that the number of pieces of information is less than the upper limit of 4 pieces (step S2302: NO), storage processing to the third general drawing reservation area 143 is executed (step S2303). In this storage process, the numeric information of the random number counter C11 is used as the third general-purpose figure side pending information, and the third general-purpose figure side pending information in the first area 143a to fourth area 143d of the third general-purpose figure holding area 143 is stored. The data is stored in the area with the earliest digestion order among the areas that have not been processed. In addition, when the 3rd general map side reservation information is acquired, the display contents of the 3rd standard computer reservation display section 137 are updated in accordance with the increase in the number of 3rd standard computer side pending information. Configure the data to do so.

If a negative determination is made in step S2301, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2302, or if the process of step S2303 is executed, whether the first general power device 121 or the second general power device 122 is in the opening execution state. It is determined whether or not (step S2304). If a negative determination is made in step S2304, processing in steps S2305 and S2306 is executed. These processes will be explained later. Thereafter, the third general purpose electric address table stored in the main side ROM 73 is read out (step S2307). The start address of a program for executing a process corresponding to the numerical information of the third general-purpose electricity counter is set in the third general-purpose electricity address table. The third general-purpose electric power counter is a counter for specifying the processing content to be executed in the third general-purpose electric power control process by the main side MPU 72.

The third general electric power counter can take values from “0” to “4”, and each value from “0” to “4” corresponds to the start address NA30 to NA34 of each process (step S2310 to step S2314). It corresponds to Specifically, when the value of the third general figure general electricity counter is "0," the third general figure fluctuation start process (which is a process for starting the display continuation times in the third general figure display section 133) If step S2310) is to be executed and the value of the third general pattern general electricity counter is "1," the third general pattern variation is a process for advancing the display continuation times in the third general pattern display section 133. The middle process (step S2311) is to be executed, and if the value of the third general-purpose figure general-purpose electricity counter is "2," the third general-purpose figure which is a process for terminating the display continuation times in the third general-purpose figure display section 133 is executed. If the ordinary figure determination process (step S2312) is to be executed, and the value of the third ordinary figure general electricity counter is "3," the process for controlling the open state of the third ordinary electricity apparatus 123 is executed. The 3 general power disconnection processing (step S2313) is to be executed, and if the value of the 3 general power power counter is "4", this is the process for setting the 3rd general power device 123 in the open state again. The third power station closed process (step S2314) is to be executed.

In the third general-purpose electricity control process, after reading the third general-purpose electricity address table (step S2307), the start address corresponding to the information of the third general-purpose electricity counter is changed to the third general-purpose electricity address table. It is obtained from the table (step S2308), and jumps to the process indicated by the obtained start address (step S2309). Each process from step S2310 to step S2314 will be individually explained below.

In the third general pattern fluctuation start process of step S2310, on the condition that the third general pattern side reservation information is stored in the third general pattern holding area 143, the third general pattern pattern fluctuation start process is held and stored in the third general pattern holding area 143. Executes processing to shift the pending information on the third general map side. Specifically, the third general drawing side reservation information stored in the first area 143a of the third general drawing holding area 143 is shifted to the third general drawing execution area 143e, and then the second area 143b→the third general drawing drawing execution area 143e is shifted. The 3rd general map side reservation information is shifted so that it becomes 1 area 143a, 3rd area 143c→2nd area 143b, and 4th area 143d→3rd area 143c. In addition, when the 3rd general map side reservation information is shifted, the display contents of the 3rd general map side reservation display section 137 are updated in accordance with the current decrease in the number of 3rd standard computer side pending information. Configure the data to do so.

In the 3rd utility map fluctuation start process, after executing the above shift process, the 3rd utility map side pending information newly shifted to the 3rd utility map execution area 143e is used as the lottery value to perform the 3rd utility map opening lottery process. Execute. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the probability of winning the 3rd regular ticket lottery in the 3rd regular ticket lottery process is constant regardless of the gaming state, and specifically, the probability of winning the 3rd regular ticket lottery with a probability of 99/100 is 99/100. It will be an open election. However, it is not limited to this, and the probability of winning the third general electricity open circuit may be higher or lower than this. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the release execution state of the third general electric power device 123 reliably occurs when the third general electric power side pending information is acquired without the third general electric power opening lottery process being executed.

In the third general-purpose map fluctuation start process, when the third general-purpose electricity release lottery process is executed, a process for specifying the display continuation period of the current display continuation time is executed. In the specific processing, a fixed display duration of 0.03 seconds is set in the third timer counter provided in the main side RAM 74, regardless of the result of the third general electric power opening lottery process and the number of pieces of third general electric power side pending information. set. In addition, when the display continuation times are executed in the third general symbol display section 133, the corresponding effects are not executed in the symbol display device 51, the display light emitting section 63, and the speaker section 64. After the first power supply device 121 enters the release execution state, all of the second power supply side reservation information acquired in the release execution state is digested, and the second power supply side reservation information is used as a trigger. All the release execution states of the second general power supply device 122 that have been released are completed, and all of the third general purpose power supply side pending information acquired in the said release execution state is digested, and the third general purpose power supply side pending information is used as a trigger. The period until all the opening execution states of the third power supply device 123 are completed corresponds to the jackpot state of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment, and in the jackpot state, the effect corresponding to the jackpot state is displayed on the symbol display device 51. This is executed by the light emitting section 63 and the speaker section 64.

In the third standard figure variation start process, after executing the process for specifying the display duration period, the variable display of the pattern in the third standard figure display section 133 is started. When the third standard figure display section 133 displays the symbols in a variable manner, the already explained variable display table for the standard figures is referred to. After starting the variable display of the pattern on the third general figure display section 133, the value of the third general figure general electricity counter is incremented by one. Since the value of the 3rd general-purpose electric power counter when the 3rd general-purpose electric power fluctuation start process is executed is "0," by adding 1, the value of the 3rd general-purpose electric power counter changes to the 2nd general electric power counter. It becomes "1" corresponding to the changing process (step S2311).

In the third normal pattern fluctuation processing in step S2311, it is determined whether the timing is during display continuation and before final display. Specifically, when the value of the third timer counter that measures the display duration of the current display duration is 0.01 seconds remaining, it is determined that the timing is before final display. If it is before final display, a process for regularly changing the display mode of the picture in the third general figure display section 133 is executed. Moreover, when the timing for final display has come, the display mode of the picture in the third general public figure display section 133 is set to the display mode corresponding to the result of the current third general public electricity opening lottery process. Thereafter, by adding 1 to the value of the 3rd general map general electricity counter, the value of the counter changes from the value corresponding to the 3rd general map changing process to the value corresponding to the 3rd general map determining process (step S2312). Update to.

In the third general map determination process in step S2312, it is determined whether the final display period (specifically, 0.01 seconds) of the current display continuation time has elapsed. If the confirmed display period has elapsed, it is determined whether the result of the third general electricity opening lottery process in the current display continuation is a third general electricity opening winning. If it is not the 3rd general public grid opening election, the value of the 3rd general public grid general electricity counter is cleared to "0", and then the third general public map confirmation process is ended. If the third general power release is won, "3" is set in the third general power release counter provided in the main side RAM 74 as information on the number of opening/closing times of the third general power device 123. In addition, "10" is set in the third general power winning counter provided in the main side RAM 74 as information on the upper limit number of winnings to the third general power device 123 in the current open execution state. Further, information corresponding to 3 seconds is set in the third timer counter as information on the open duration period of the third general power device 123. Further, the third general power device 123 is brought into an open state by starting to output a drive signal to the third general power drive unit 123b. Thereafter, 1 is added to the third general electric power counter. Since the value of the 3rd universal power grid counter when the 3rd general power grid determination process is executed is "2", after adding 1, the value is "3" which corresponds to the 3rd general power grid opening process (step S2313). ”.

In the third general electricity release processing in step S2313, when winnings to the third general electricity device 123 have occurred, a value corresponding to the number of winnings is subtracted from the value of the third general electricity winning counter in the main side RAM 74. do. If the value of the third general electricity winning counter is "0", the value of the third general electricity release counter is cleared to "0", the value of the third timer counter is cleared to "0", and By stopping the output of the drive signal to the third general electric power drive unit 123b, the third general electric power accessory 123a is brought into a closed state, and the value of the third general electric power electric charge counter is cleared to "0". As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the third general-purpose figure general-purpose electric power control process becomes the third general-purpose figure fluctuation start process (step S2310). Furthermore, even if the value of the third general electricity winning counter is not "0", if the value of the third timer counter is "0", the drive signal is output to the third general electricity drive unit 123b. By stopping this, the third general power accessory 123a is brought into a closed state, and the value of the third general power open counter in the main side RAM 74 is subtracted by 1. If the value of the third general power open counter is not "0", then after setting the numerical information of the closing duration period (specifically, 1 second) of the third general power accessory 123a in the third timer counter. The value of the third general map general electric power counter is updated from "3" to "4". As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the third general electric power control process becomes the third general electric power closed process (step S2314). When the value of the third general power open counter is "0", the value of the third general power open counter is cleared to "0" without setting a value in the third timer counter. As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the third general-purpose figure general-purpose electric power control process becomes the third general-purpose figure fluctuation start process (step S2310).

In the third general power shut-down process in step S2314, on the condition that the value of the third timer counter is "0", the output of the drive signal to the third general power drive section 123b is started. Set the numerical information of the opening duration (specifically, 3 seconds) in the third timer counter when the third general electric accessory 123a is opened and the third general electric accessory 123a is opened once. . Then, the value of the third general electric power counter is updated from "4" to "3". As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the third general-purpose power control process becomes the third general-purpose power release process (step S2313).

As described above, by executing the third general figure general electricity control process, the variable display of the picture is performed in the third general figure display section 133, triggered by the occurrence of a prize in the second general electric figure device 122. . Then, in the case where the third general electric power opening is won in the third general electric power opening lottery process, the third general electric power device 123 enters the opening execution state after the display continuation time on the third general electric power drawing display section 133 ends. . In the opening execution state, the third general power device 123 performs the opening state for 3 seconds three times with a closing duration period of 1 second in between. In addition, if the number of winning game balls to the third power supply device 123 reaches 10 or more before the 3-second open state is performed three times, the 3-second open state is performed three times. Even if there is, the current open execution state is terminated.

In the third general purpose electric power control process, if the first general electric power device 121 or the second general electric power device 122 is in the open execution state, an affirmative determination is made in step S2304, and the fluctuation stop processing is performed in step S2315. Execute. In the fluctuation stop processing, if the display continuation time in the third general figure display section 133 is currently being executed, the display continuation time in the third general figure display section 133 is changed from the current display mode of the third general figure display section 133. In this state, the update of the third timer counter is temporarily stopped. In addition, in the fluctuation stop processing, the third stop flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1".

In the third general electric power control process, if a negative determination is made in step S2304 and the third stopped flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2305: YES), the corresponding 3 Clear the stopped flag to "0" (step S2306). As a result, if the third general figure display section 133 has been temporarily stopped during the continuous display period, the continuous display period is restarted and the updating of the third timer counter is restarted.

As described above, in the third general purpose electric power control process, when the first general electric power device 121 or the second general electric power device 122 is in the open execution state, the third general electric power general electric power device 122 is in an open execution state. Execute processing. Thereby, when the first general power device 121 or the second general power device 122 is in the open execution state, it is possible to prevent the display continuation of the third general power map display section 133 from proceeding. Therefore, when the first general power device 121 or the second general power device 122 is in the open state, it is possible to prevent the third general power device 123 from going into the open state. Become.

<4th general map general electric power control process>
Next, the fourth general electric power control process executed by the main side MPU 72 will be explained. In the fourth common figure general electricity control process, the execution control of the display continuation times in the fourth common figure display section 134 and the execution control of the acceptance execution state of the special prize winning device 35 are performed. FIG. 40 is a slow chart showing the fourth general electric power control process.

First, the fourth general address table stored in the main side ROM 73 is read out (step S2401). The start address of a program for executing the process corresponding to the numerical information of the fourth general-purpose electric power counter is set in the fourth general-purpose electric power address table. The 4th standard electric power counter is a counter for specifying the processing content to be executed in the 4th general electric power control process by the main side MPU 72.

The fourth general electricity counter can take values from "0" to "3", and each value from "0" to "3" is the start address NA40 to NA43 of each process (step S2404 to step S2407). It corresponds to Specifically, when the value of the fourth general-purpose figure general-purpose power counter is "0," the fourth general-purpose figure fluctuation start process ( Step S2404) is to be executed, and when the value of the fourth general pattern general electricity counter is "1," the fourth general pattern fluctuation is a process for advancing the display continuation times in the fourth general pattern display unit 134. The middle process (step S2405) is to be executed, and if the value of the fourth general figure general electricity counter is "2," the fourth general figure general figure display section 134 executes the fourth process for ending the display continuation times on the fourth general figure display unit 134. If the general figure confirmation process (step S2406) is to be executed, and the value of the fourth general figure general electricity counter is "3", the fourth ordinary figure which is a process for controlling the acceptance state of the special prize winning device 35 is executed. The power-off process (step S2407) is to be executed.

In the 4th standard and general electricity control process, after reading the 4th general and general electricity address table (step S2401), the start address corresponding to the information of the 4th general and general electricity counter is set to the 4th general and general electricity address table. It is obtained from the table (step S2402), and jumps to the process indicated by the obtained start address (step S2403). The processing contents of steps S2405 to S2407 are the same as the processing contents of steps S1407 to S1410 of the fourth general electric power control process (FIG. 27) in the fourth embodiment. In addition, the processing contents of the fourth general pattern fluctuation start process in step S2404 are the same as the fourth general pattern fluctuation start process (FIG. 28) in the fourth embodiment, except for the processing contents of the process for specifying the fourth general pattern fluctuation period. The processing details are the same.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the process for specifying the fourth regular pattern fluctuation period.

First, it is determined whether one or more pieces of second general map side reservation information are stored in the first area 142a to fourth area 142d of the second general map reservation area 142 (step S2501). If a negative determination is made in step S2501, the first display continuation period is selected as the display continuation period of the current display continuation time (step S2501). As in the first embodiment, the first display duration is 0.45 seconds. In a situation where the first display duration period is selected, as in the first embodiment, even if the special winning device 35 enters the acceptance execution state, basically no prize winning to the special winning device 35 occurs.

On the other hand, if one or more pieces of second standard figure side pending information are stored and an affirmative determination is made in step S2501, the third display continuation period is selected as the display continuation period of the current display continuation time (step S2503). The third display duration is 1.5 seconds. In a situation where the third display duration period is selected, one of the two game balls that reach the position where the special winning device 35 can win a prize can be expected to win a prize in the special winning device 35.

If either step S2502 or step S2503 is executed, information on the display duration selected in step S2502 or step S2503 is set in the fourth timer counter of the main RAM 74 (step S2504).

With the above configuration, in a situation where the second general purpose figure side reservation information is held and stored, the third display duration period is selected as the display continuation period of the display continuation time in the fourth general purpose figure display section 134. This means that winnings to the special winning device 35 may occur with high frequency. As a result, in the jackpot state in which the second general power device 122 and the third general power device 123 are in the open execution state, winnings are won not only in the second general power device 122 and the third general power device 123 but also in the special prize winning device 35. It is also possible to expect an increase in the number of game balls based on this, making it possible to increase the advantage of a jackpot state.

<Relationship between the display duration period of the fourth general drawing display section 134 and the acceptance state of the special prize winning device 35>
Next, the relationship between the display duration period of the fourth general figure display section 134 and the acceptance state of the special prize winning device 35 will be explained with reference to the time chart of FIG. 42(a) shows a period during which the first general power device 121 is in an open state, and FIG. 42(b) shows a period when a game ball is detected by the first general power detection sensor 121c of the first general power device 121. FIG. 42(c) shows a period during which the display continuation times in the second general drawing display section 132 is executed, and FIG. 42(d) shows a period in which one or more pieces of second general drawing side pending information are stored FIG. 42(e) shows a period during which the game ball is passing through the through winning section 34, and FIG. FIG. 42(g) shows a period in which the display continuation time is executed in the fourth general drawing display section 134, and FIG. 42(h) shows a period in which the special prize winning device 35 is in the accepting state. period.

As already explained, all the game balls that flowed into the right area PA3 and did not win in any of the first general power device 121 to the third general power device 123 will win in the through winning section 34. . Therefore, before the opening execution state of the first general power supply device 121 is started, as shown in FIG. 42(e), winnings to the through winning section 34 occur at the timing of t1, the timing of t4, and the timing of t9. . In these cases, as shown in FIG. 42(g), the fourth normal display according to the first display duration period is performed in each period from timing t1 to timing t2, timing from t4 to timing t7, and timing from t9 to timing t13. The display continuation of the diagram display section 134 is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 42(h), following the display continuation time, special prizes are won in each period from timing t2 to timing t3, timing from t7 to timing t8, and timing from t13 to timing t14. The device 35 enters the acceptance execution state. In this case, the game ball that entered the through prize section 34 at the timing t1 will be awarded from the timing t5 to the timing t6, and the game ball that entered the through prize section 34 at the timing t4 will be awarded from the timing t10 to the timing t11. Over time, the game balls that have won in the through winning section 34 at the timing t9 will reach the positions where they can be won in the special winning device 35 from the timing t15 to the timing t16. Since the special winning device 35 is not in the accepting state even during the period of , no winning occurs in the special winning device 35.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 42(a), the first general power device 121 enters the open state from timing t10 to timing t21. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 42(b), a winning occurs in the first general power device 121 at each of timing t12, timing t17, and timing t18, and second general power drawing side reservation information is acquired. In this case, the number of display continuations of the second general figure display section 132 from the timing of t12 to the timing of t19 is triggered by the winning of the first general figure display unit 121 at the timing of t12, as shown in FIG. 42(c). will be held. On the other hand, since the winning on the first general electricity device 121 at the timing of t17 and the timing of t18 occurs in a situation where the second general drawing display section 132 is continuously displaying, the second general drawing side pending information will be retained and stored. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 42(d), at the timing t17, one or more pieces of second general map side pending information are held and stored.

As shown in FIG. 42(e), a prize is won in the through prize section 34 at timing t20, which is a situation in which one or more pieces of second general figure side reservation information are stored in a suspended state. Then, at the timing t20, as shown in FIG. 42(g), the display continuation time in the fourth general figure display section 134 is started. Since the situation is such that one or more pieces of the second general map side pending information are held and stored, the display continuation time becomes the third display continuation period. Therefore, the display continuation time is performed from timing t20 to timing t22. Then, after the display continuation cycle ends, the special prize winning device 35 enters the acceptance execution state from timing t22 to timing t24, as shown in FIG. 42(h). In this case, the game ball that has won in the through winning section 34 at the timing t20 is at a position where it can be won in the special winning device 35 from the timing t22 to the timing t23, as shown in FIG. 42(f). exists in Since this period corresponds to the period in which the special winning device 35 is in the accepting state, a winning to the special winning device 35 will occur.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, in addition to or in place of the effects described in the first embodiment, the following excellent effects are achieved.

In the jackpot state, not only the first general power device 121, the second general power device 122, and the third general power device 123 are in the open state, but also the special winning device 35 can be in the acceptance state. This makes it possible to increase the advantage in the jackpot state, and it becomes possible to increase the player's attention to the jackpot state.

In the jackpot state, first the first general electric power device 121 becomes an open execution state, and when a winning occurs in the first general electric power device 121 that is in the open execution state, the second general electric power device side pending information is acquired. Then, the second general power device 122 enters the open execution state. In this case, when the display continuation time of the fourth general map display section 134 is executed in a situation where the second general map side pending information is held and stored, the third display continuation period is set as the display continuous period of the display continuation time. is set and the third display duration period is set, so that winnings to the special winning device 35 occur at a predetermined frequency. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which a winning in the first general electricity device 121 becomes an opportunity to win in multiple devices 35, 122, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in a jackpot state. .

In addition, when the second general power supply device 122 acquires the second general power drawing side reservation information, the special winning device 35 enters the open execution state without requiring the generation of further winnings, whereas the special winning device 35 In order to enter the execution state, it is necessary for a prize to be won to the through prize section 34 to occur in a situation where the second general drawing side reservation information is stored in a suspended state, and further, for a prize to be won to the special prize winning device 35 to occur. After the third display continuation period is set in the display continuation times of the fourth normal figure display section 134, the game ball needs to reach a position where it can enter the special prize winning device 35. As a result, even if it becomes possible to win in each of the special winning device 35 and the second general drawing device 122 by acquiring the second general drawing side reservation information, the conditions for generating a winning can be changed to the special winning device. 35 and the second general power device 122 can be made different.

The through winning unit 34 and the special winning device 35 are provided downstream of the first general power device 121, the second general power device 122, and the third general power device 123 in the right side area PA3. As a result, game balls that did not win in the first general power device 121, second general power device 122, and third general power device 123 in the jackpot state can enter the through prize winning section 34 and the special winning device 35. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the number of game balls that are wasted in a jackpot state.

In the configuration in which the 2nd NP side pending information is held and stored in the jackpot state, in a situation where the 2nd NP side pending information is not held and stored, the first display is displayed at the display continuation time of the 4th NP side display section 134. By setting the duration period, basically no prizes are won in the special prize winning device 35. This makes it possible to limit the situation in which winnings to the special winning device 35 occur at a predetermined frequency to a jackpot state.

If any one of the opening execution state of the first general power device 121, the opening execution state of the second general power device 122, and the opening execution state of the third general power device 123 is occurring, the other state among them does not occur, but any one of the opening execution state of the first general power device 121, the opening execution state of the second general power device 122, and the opening execution state of the third general power device 123 occurs. However, the acceptance execution state of the special prize winning device 35 may occur. This makes it possible to diversify the manner in which winnings occur, thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The second general power device 122 enters the open execution state based on the occurrence of winning in the first general power device 121, and the third general power device 123 is based on the occurrence of the winning in the second general power device 122. In the configuration in which the first general power device 121 is in the open execution state, the second general power device 122 is in the open execution state, and the third general power device 123 is in the open execution state. If no other of these conditions occurs. Thereby, the player can aim to win a prize in the first general power device 121, the second general power device 122, and the third general power device 123 in stages. On the other hand, the acceptance execution state of the special winning device 35 occurs regardless of winnings to the first general power device 121, the second general power device 122, and the third general power device 123. In this case, even if any one of the first general power device 121 is in the open state, the second general power device 122 is in the open state, and the third general power device 123 is in the open state, An open execution state of the special prize winning device 35 may occur. This creates a situation in which it is possible to simultaneously aim to win a prize in any of the first general power device 121, second general power device 122, and third general power device 123 and to win a prize in the special winning device 35. becomes possible.

In a configuration in which the acceptance execution state of the special winning device 35 and the release execution state of any one of the first general power device 121, the second general power device 122, and the third general power device 123 may overlap, the special winning device 35 is provided at a position where it is possible to win when the game balls are flowing down toward the first general power device 121, the second general power device 122, and the third general power device 123. As a result, it is possible to perform a firing operation with the aim of winning both the special winning device 35 and winning any of the first general power device 121, the second general power device 122, and the third general power device 123. becomes.

When any one of the first general power device 121 is in the open state, the second general power device 122 is in the open state, and the third general power device 123 is in the open state, the other device is The display continuation times in the corresponding ordinary figure display sections 131, 132, and 133 are prevented from proceeding. As a result, by simply adjusting the progress of display continuation times, any one of the opening execution state of the first general power device 121, the opening execution state of the second general power device 122, and the opening execution state of the third general power device 123 can be set. If this occurs, it is possible to prevent other conditions from occurring.

The states in which the display continuation cycle is not allowed to proceed as described above include the opening execution state of the first general power device 121, the opening execution state of the second general power device 122, and the opening execution state of the third general power device 123. Among them, the state corresponding to the general figure display parts 131, 132, and 133 that are not subject to the stoppage of the display continuation time is canceled after the state ends, and if the display continuation time has been temporarily stopped during the display continuation time, the display will be continued. The progression of the episode will resume. This makes it possible to prevent the display continuation times whose progress is to be stopped from being invalidated.

<Another form of the tenth embodiment>
(1) Even if the 4th standard drawing side pending information is acquired, the special winning device 35 does not enter the acceptance execution state unless an acceptance winning result is obtained in the acceptance determination process, but the 4th standard drawing side pending information When the special prize winning device 35 is acquired, the configuration may be such that the special prize winning device 35 is surely in the acceptance execution state, and when the 4th general drawing side pending information is acquired, the special winning prize device 35 executes the acceptance with approximately 100% probability. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the state is set.

(2) If a predetermined device 121, 122, 123 that does not correspond to the ordinary figure display section 131, 132, 133 enters the open execution state during the continuous display on the ordinary figure display section 131, 132, 133, the Although the configuration is such that the display continuation times are temporarily stopped during execution, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display continuation times are continued for a period during which the predetermined devices 121, 122, and 123 are in the open execution state. The period may be extended. In this case, the configuration is such that the fluctuating display of the picture is continued on the common figure display section 131, 132, 133 corresponding to the display continuation time in the middle of execution during the period when the predetermined device 121, 122, 123 is in the open execution state. You can also use it as

(3) The third display duration period is selected as the display duration period in the fourth display unit 134 display continuation time in a situation where the second general map side pending information is stored in a suspended state. The present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured such that the third display duration period is selected as the display duration period in the display continuation times of the fourth common picture display section 134 in a situation where the third common picture side pending information is held and stored. Often, in a situation where either the second general map side pending information or the third general computer side pending information is held and stored, the third display duration period is set as the display duration period in the display continuation times of the fourth general map display section 134. The configuration may be selected, and in a situation where both the second general map side pending information and the third general standard computer side pending information are stored on hold, the display duration period in the display continuation times of the fourth general public map display section 134 may be set as the display duration period. A configuration may be adopted in which three display duration periods are selected.

(4) The display continuation of the fourth general figure display section 134 is not temporarily stopped even if any of the first general power device 121, the second general power device 122, and the third general power device 123 enters the open execution state. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and when any one of the first general power device 121, the second general power device 122, and the third general power device 123 is in the open execution state, the fourth general power device It may be configured such that the continuous display of the diagram display section 134 is temporarily stopped, and when the event that caused the stoppage ends, the continuous display of the fourth general diagram display section 134 is restarted.

(5) When the display continuation time of the fourth general map display section 134 is started in a situation where the second general map side pending information is stored on hold, the configuration is limited to a configuration in which the third display continuation period is reliably set. The configuration may be such that the third display duration period is easily set without being set. Specifically, the display of the fourth general map display section 134 is continued regardless of whether the second standard computer side pending information is not stored in storage or the second computer side pending information is stored in storage. Although the third display duration period can be set in the third display period, the situation where the second computer side pending information is held and stored is better than the situation where the second computer side pending information is not stored and stored. A configuration may be adopted in which the third display duration period is easily set in the display duration times of the display unit 134.

<Eleventh embodiment>
In this embodiment, the configuration of the gaming area PA is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be described, and descriptions of the same configurations as the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

FIG. 43 is a front view of the game board 24 in this embodiment. The game area PA is divided into an upper area PA1, a left area PA2, a right area PA3, and a lower area PA4 by the variable display unit 37, as in the first embodiment. In the lower area PA4, a first through winning section 160 is provided in place of the first operating section 32 in the first embodiment. The first through winning section 160 is operated when the firing operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2, and when the firing operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the right side area PA3. It is placed in a position where you can win in any case. However, in the variable display unit 37, an introduction port 37b that allows the game balls to flow into the stage 37a is provided at the upper left of the variable display unit 37, and the game balls supplied to the stage 37a are allowed to flow into the stage 37a. When the ball decelerates sufficiently near the center in the lateral direction and flows downward, it is easy for the ball to enter the first through winning section 160. Therefore, when the firing operation is performed so that the game ball flows down toward the left side area PA2, which is to the right of the left end of the variable display unit 37 in the upper area PA1, it is easier to play the game ball toward the right side area PA3. The ball entering the first through prize winning section 160 is more likely to occur than when the firing operation is performed so that the ball flows down.

The first through winning part 160 has a through hole that penetrates in the vertical direction, and when the game ball passes through this through hole and is detected by the first through detection sensor 160a, the main side MPU 72 The occurrence of winning in the through winning section 160 is specified. In addition, when winning the first through winning section 160, the game ball only passes through the through hole in the vertical direction, so the game ball that wins the first through winning section 160 continues to flow down the gaming area PA. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game ball that enters the first through winning section 160 may be discharged to the back side of the game board 24. In addition, when a prize is won in the first through prize section 160, three game balls are paid out for each game ball that enters, but if the number of balls paid out is other than three, It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the payout of game balls is not executed. In the left side area PA2, no ball entering section is provided including the through winning section 34 and the special winning device 35 in the first embodiment.

In the right area PA3, a first general power device 121, a second general power device 122, a third general power device 123, a fourth general power device 161, and a second through prize winning section 162 are provided. These first general power device 121, second general power device 122, third general power device 123, fourth general power device 161, and second through prize winning section 162 are operated so as to flow down the left area PA2. If there is, it is not possible to win a prize, and a prize can be won by performing a firing operation so as to flow down the right area PA3.

The first general purpose electric device 121 is provided with a first general purpose electric accessory 121a as a guide piece consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the first general electric accessory 121a is in the closed state, the game ball cannot win in the first general electric device 121, and when the first general electric accessory 121a is in the open state, it is possible to win in the first general electric device 121. becomes. The first general electric drive unit 121b for opening and closing the first general electric accessory 121a and the first general electric power detection sensor 121c for detecting the winning game ball of the first electric power device 121 are connected to the main controller 70 and electrically connected to each other. connected. When a drive signal is transmitted from the main side MPU 72 to the first general electric power drive unit 121b, the first general electric accessory 121a becomes an open state, and when the transmission of the drive signal is stopped, the first general electric accessory 121a returns to closed state. Further, the main side MPU 72 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the first general electric power device 121 based on the detection result of the first general electric power detection sensor 121c. In addition, when a winning occurs in the first general electricity device 121, 15 game balls are paid out for each game ball that enters, but if the number of paid out balls is other than 15, then Good too.

The second general-purpose electric device 122 is provided with a second general-purpose electric accessory 122a as a guide piece consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the second general electric accessory 122a is in the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the second general electric device 122, and when the second general electric accessory 122a is in the open state, it is possible to win a prize in the second electric general electric device 122. becomes. The second general electric drive unit 122b for opening and closing the second general electric accessory 122a and the second general electric power detection sensor 122c for detecting winning game balls in the second electric power device 122 are connected to the main controller 70 and electrically connected to each other. connected. When a drive signal is transmitted from the main side MPU 72 to the second general electric power drive unit 122b, the second general electric accessory 122a becomes an open state, and when the transmission of the drive signal is stopped, the second general electric accessory 122a returns to closed state. Further, the main side MPU 72 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the second general electricity device 122 based on the detection result of the second general electricity detection sensor 122c. In addition, when a winning occurs in the second general electric device 122, similarly to the first general electric device 121, 15 game balls are paid out for each game ball entered. , the number of payouts may be other than 15.

The third general electric power device 123 is provided with a third general electric power accessory 123a as a guide piece consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the third general purpose electric accessory 123a is in the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the third general electric power device 123, and when the third general electric accessory object 123a is in the open state, it is possible to win the third general electric power device 123. becomes. The third general power drive section 123b for opening and closing the third general power accessory 123a and the third general power detection sensor 123c for detecting the winning game ball of the third general power device 123 are connected to the main control device 70 and electrically connected to each other. connected. When a drive signal is transmitted from the main side MPU 72 to the third general electric power drive unit 123b, the third general electric accessory 123a becomes an open state, and when the transmission of the drive signal is stopped, the third general electric accessory 123a returns to closed state. Further, the main side MPU 72 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the third general power device 123 based on the detection result of the third general power detection sensor 123c. In addition, when a winning occurs in the third general electric device 123, similarly to the first general electric device 121 and the second general electric device 122, 15 game balls are awarded for each game ball entered. However, the number of payouts may be other than 15.

The fourth general electric power device 161 is provided with a fourth general electric power accessory 161a as a guide piece consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the fourth general purpose electric accessory 161a is in the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the fourth general electric power device 161, and when the fourth general electric utility object 161a is in the open state, it is possible to win the fourth general electric power device 161. becomes. The fourth general electric drive unit 161b for opening and closing the fourth general electric accessory 161a and the fourth general electric current detection sensor 161c for detecting the winning game ball of the fourth electric power device 161 are connected to the main controller 70 and electrically connected to each other. connected. When a drive signal is transmitted from the main side MPU 72 to the fourth general electric power drive unit 161b, the fourth general electric accessory 161a becomes an open state, and when the transmission of the drive signal is stopped, the fourth general electric accessory 161a returns to closed state. In addition, the main side MPU 72 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the fourth general power device 161 based on the detection result of the fourth general power detection sensor 161c. In addition, when a winning occurs in the fourth general power device 161, similarly to the first general power device 121, the second general power device 122, and the third general power device 123, when a prize is won in the fourth general power device 161, one game ball enters. In contrast, 15 game balls are paid out, but the number of paid out balls may be other than 15.

The second through winning part 162 has a through hole that penetrates in the vertical direction, and when the game ball passes through this through hole and is detected by the second through detection sensor 162a, the second through winning part 162 is activated by the main side MPU 72. The occurrence of a winning in the through winning section 162 is specified. Furthermore, when winning the second through winning section 162, the game ball only passes through the through hole in the vertical direction, so the game ball that wins the second through winning section 162 continues to flow down the gaming area PA. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game ball that enters the second through winning section 162 may be discharged to the back side of the game board 24. In addition, when a winning occurs in the second through winning section 162, two game balls are paid out for each game ball that enters, but if the number of balls paid out is other than one, It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the payout of game balls is not executed.

The first general power device 121, the second general power device 122, the third general power device 123, and the fourth general power device 161 are arranged in order from the upstream side in the right area PA3: first general power device 121 → second general power device 122 → They are arranged in the vertical direction with a predetermined interval so that the third general power device 123→the fourth general power device 161. In addition, the second through winning section 162 is provided downstream of the fourth general power device 161 on the left side of the area where the first general power device 121 to the fourth general power device 161 are provided in the right area PA3. There is. On the upstream side of the second through winning section 162, game balls that have flowed into the right side area PA3 and have not won in the first general electricity device 121 to the fourth general electricity device 161 are stored in the second through winning section 162. A right-side guide area 163 is formed for guiding. The right guide region 163 can be formed in any manner, but in the present pachinko machine 10, the right guide region 163 is formed by arranging a plurality of nails 24b. By forming the right side guide area 163, one of the two game balls that flowed into the right side area PA3 and did not win in the first general electric power device 121 to the fourth general electric power device 161. The probability of a ball entering the second through winning section 162 is set such that a ball entering the second through winning section 162 can be expected.

Here, as already explained, when one game ball enters the second through winning section 162, two game balls are paid out. On the other hand, as mentioned above, one of the two game balls that entered the right area PA3 and did not win a prize in the first general power device 121 to the fourth general power device 161 received a second through. The probability of a ball entering the second through winning section 162 is set so that a ball entering the winning section 162 can be expected. This allows the player to aim for winning in the second through winning section 162 while not substantially increasing or decreasing the number of balls he or she owns.

A first general figure display section 131, a second general figure display section 132, a third general figure display section 133, a fourth general figure display section 134, and a first general figure display section are provided in the lower right side of the gaming area PA in an area through which the game ball does not pass. A figure reservation display section 135, a second ordinary figure reservation display section 136, and a third ordinary figure reservation display section 137 are provided. Each of the first general figure display section 131 to the fourth general figure display section 134 is constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner. In this case, although it is impossible to perform a complex display like the symbol display device 51 in the first general figure display section 131 to the fourth general figure display section 134, It becomes possible to reduce the processing load for controlling the display of the display unit 134. However, the display device is not limited to this, and may be configured by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix display. In addition, the patterns displayed in the first general figure display section 131 to the fourth general figure display section 134 include a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are displayed, and a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed. Possible configurations include a configuration in which , or a configuration in which multiple types of colors are displayed. Further, the display range of the first general figure display section 131 to the fourth general figure display section 134 is narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 51. Furthermore, the display range of both the first general figure display part 131 to the fourth general figure display part 134 and the first general figure reservation display part 135 to the third general figure reservation display part 137 is also the display range of the symbol display device 51. The area is narrower than the display surface. As a result, the player's attention is focused on the symbol display device 51 rather than on the first normal pattern display section 131 to the fourth normal pattern display section 134 and the first normal pattern pending display section 135 to the third normal pattern pending display section 137. It is possible to increase it.

Based on the game ball entering the first through prize winning section 160, a display continuation including a variable display of symbols is performed in the first common figure display section 131. Further, the first general figure reservation display section 135 is provided at a position adjacent to the first general figure display section 131. Information corresponding to the number of game balls that have won in the first through winning section 160 is held up to a maximum of 4 as the first general drawing side holding information, and the number of held balls is displayed by lighting the first general drawing holding display section 135. It has become so. Note that, similarly to the fourth embodiment, the main side RAM 74 is provided with a first general purpose figure reservation area 141 as an area for storing first general purpose figure side reservation information.

Based on the game ball entering the first general power device 121 or the fourth general power device 161, a display continuation including a fluctuating display of symbols is performed in the second general figure display section 132. Further, the second general figure reservation display section 136 is provided at a position adjacent to the second ordinary figure display section 132. Information corresponding to the number of game balls won in the first general electric device 121 or the fourth general electric device 161 is held up to a maximum of four as second general drawing side reservation information, and the second general electric drawing reservation display section 136 is lit. The number of pending items is displayed. Note that, similarly to the fourth embodiment, the main side RAM 74 is provided with a second general purpose figure reservation area 142 as an area for storing second general purpose figure side reservation information.

Based on the game ball entering the second general-purpose electric device 122, the third general-purpose figure display section 133 performs a display continuation including a variable display of the symbols. Further, the third general figure reservation display section 137 is provided at a position adjacent to the third ordinary figure display section 133. Information corresponding to the number of game balls won in the second general electricity device 122 is held as the third general drawing side holding information up to a maximum of four, and the number of held balls is displayed by lighting the third general drawing holding display section 137. It has become so. Note that, similarly to the fourth embodiment, the main side RAM 74 is provided with a third general-purpose figure reservation area 143 as an area for storing third general-purpose figure side reservation information.

Based on the game ball entering the second through prize winning section 162, a display continuation including a variable display of symbols is performed in the fourth common figure display section 134. Here, the fourth common figure display section 134 is not provided with a common figure pending display section. In other words, the fourth common map side reservation information acquired when a prize is won in the second through winning section 162 is not stored on a reservation basis. Note that, similarly to the fourth embodiment, the main side RAM 74 is provided with a fourth general-purpose figure execution area 144 as an area for storing fourth general-purpose figure side pending information.

<1st general map general electric power control process>
Next, various processes executed by the main MPU 72 will be explained. First, the first general purpose electric power control process for controlling the display continuation times in the first general electric power display section 131 and the execution control of the opening execution state of the first general electric power device 121 will be described. FIG. 44 is a slow chart showing the first general electric power control process.

If a prize has been won in the first through winning section 160 (step S2601: YES), the first general drawing side reservation stored in the first area 141a to fourth area 141d of the first general drawing holding area 141 On the condition that the number of pieces of information is less than the upper limit of four pieces (step S2602: NO), storage processing in the first general drawing reservation area 141 is executed (step S2603). In this storage process, the numerical information of the random number counter C11 is used as the first general-purpose figure-side pending information, and the first general-purpose figure-side pending information in the first area 141a to fourth area 141d of the first general-purpose figure holding area 141 is stored. The data is stored in the area with the earliest digestion order among the areas that have not been processed. In addition, when the first general drawing side reservation information is acquired, the display contents of the first general drawing drawing side holding display section 135 are updated in accordance with the current increase in the number of pieces of first general drawing side holding information. Configure the data to do so.

If a negative determination is made in step S2601, an affirmative determination is made in step S2602, or the process of step S2603 is executed, the second general power device 122, the third general power device 123, or the fourth general power device 161 It is determined whether or not is in the open execution state (step S2604). If a negative determination is made in step S2604, the processes in steps S2605 to S2615 are executed. The processing contents of steps S2605 to S2615 are the same as the processing contents of steps S1105 to S1115 of the first general electric power control process (FIG. 24) in the fourth embodiment. In this case, the probability of winning the first general electricity release in the first general electricity release lottery process in the first general electricity map fluctuation start process (step S2611) is 1/100. Further, the display continuation period of the display continuation times in the first common symbol display section 131 and the symbol display device 51 selected in the first common symbol fluctuation start process (step S2611) is 1 second to 180 seconds. These configurations are similar to those of the fourth embodiment.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2604, the process of step S2616 is executed. The processing contents of step S2616 are the same as the processing contents of step S1116 of the first general electric power control process (FIG. 24) in the fourth embodiment.

As described above, by executing the first general figure general electricity control process, the fluctuation display of the symbols is performed in the first general figure display part 131, triggered by the occurrence of a winning in the first through prize winning part 160. At the same time, a variable display of symbols is performed on the symbol display device 51. In the case where the first general electric power opening lottery is won in the first general electric power opening lottery process, after the display continuation times on the first general electric power symbol display section 131 and the symbol display device 51 are completed, the first general electric power device 121 is It becomes an open execution state. In the opening execution state, the opening state for 3 seconds is performed three times in the first general power device 121 with a closing duration period of 1 second in between. In addition, if the number of winning game balls to the first general electric device 121 reaches 10 or more before the 3-second open state is performed three times, the 3-second open state is performed three times. Even if there is, the current open execution state is terminated. Further, when a game ball is won in the first general electricity device 121, second general figure side holding information is stored in the second general figure holding area 142 with an upper limit of four pieces.

In addition, in the first general electric power control process, when the second general electric power device 122, the third general electric power device 123, or the fourth general electric power device 161 is in the open execution state, the display continuation time of the first general electric power display section 131 is Execute the process to temporarily stop the. As a result, when the second general power device 122, the third general power device 123, or the fourth general power device 161 is in the open execution state, the display continuation of the first general power map display section 131 is prevented from proceeding. becomes possible. Therefore, when the second general power device 122, the third general power device 123, or the fourth general power device 161 is in the open state, the first general power device 121 does not become in the open state. It becomes possible to do so.

<Second general electric power control process>
Next, the second general electric power control process executed by the main side MPU 72 will be explained. In the second general purpose electric power control process, execution control of the display continuation times in the second general electric power display section 132 and execution control of the open execution state of the second general electric power device 122 are performed. FIG. 45 is a slow chart showing the second general electric power control process.

If a prize has been won in the first general drawing device 121 or the fourth general drawing device 161 (step S2701: YES), the prize is stored in the first area 142a to fourth area 142d of the second general drawing holding area 142. On the condition that the number of pieces of second general purpose figure side pending information is less than the upper limit of four (step S2702: NO), storage processing to the second general purpose figure side reservation area 142 is executed (step S2703). In this storage process, the numerical information of the random number counter C11 is used as the second general-purpose figure-side pending information, and the second general-purpose figure-side pending information in the first area 142a to fourth area 142d of the second general-purpose figure holding area 142 is stored. The data is stored in the area with the earliest digestion order among the areas that have not been processed. In addition, when the second general drawing side reservation information is acquired, the display contents of the second general drawing drawing side holding display section 136 are updated in accordance with the current increase in the number of pieces of second general drawing side holding information. Configure the data to do so.

If a negative determination is made in step S2701, an affirmative determination is made in step S2702, or the process of step S2703 is executed, the first general electric power device 121, the third general electric power device 123, or the fourth general electric power device 161 It is determined whether or not is in the open execution state (step S2704). If a negative determination is made in step S2704, the processes of steps S2705 to S2714 are executed. The processing contents of steps S2705 to S2714 are basically the same as the processing contents of steps S1205 to S1214 of the second general electric power control process (FIG. 25) in the fourth embodiment. However, in the second general-purpose map fluctuation start process (step S2710), the second general-purpose power grid opening lottery process is not executed, and after the display continuation time on the second general-purpose map display section 132 ends, the second general-purpose power grid is reliably used. The device 122 enters the open execution state. Further, the display continuation period of the display continuation times in the second general pattern display section 132 selected in the second general pattern fluctuation start process (step S2710) is fixed at 0.2 seconds.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2704, the process of step S2715 is executed. The processing content of step S2715 is the same as the processing content of step S1215 of the second general electric power control process (FIG. 25) in the fourth embodiment.

As described above, by executing the second general purpose electric power control process, the second general electric power drawing display section 132 is A changing display of the picture is performed. Then, after the continuous display on the second general figure display section 132 is completed, the second general electric power device 122 is surely brought into the open execution state. In the opening execution state, the second general power device 122 performs the opening state for 3 seconds three times with a closing duration period of 1 second in between. In addition, if the number of winning game balls to the second power supply device 122 reaches 10 or more before the 3-second open state is performed three times, the 3-second open state is performed three times. Even if there is, the current open execution state is terminated. In addition, when a game ball enters the second general electricity device 122, the third general figure side holding information is stored in the third general figure holding area 143 with an upper limit of four pieces.

In addition, in the second general electric power control process, when the first general electric power device 121, the third general electric power device 123, or the fourth general electric power device 161 is in the open execution state, the display continuation time of the second general electric power display section 132 is Execute the process to temporarily stop the. As a result, when the first general electric power device 121, the third general electric power device 123, or the fourth general electric power device 161 is in the open execution state, the display continuation of the second general electric power display section 132 is prevented from proceeding. becomes possible. Therefore, when the first general power device 121, the third general power device 123, or the fourth general power device 161 is in the open state, the second general power device 122 does not become in the open state. It becomes possible to do so.

<3rd general map general electric power control process>
Next, the third general electric power control process executed by the main side MPU 72 will be explained. In the third general purpose electric power control process, execution control of the display continuation times in the third general electric power display section 133 and execution control of the open execution state of the third general electric power device 123 are performed. FIG. 46 is a slow chart showing the third general-purpose electric power control process.

If a winning has occurred in the second general-purpose drawing device 122 (step S2801: YES), the third general-purpose drawing side reservation stored in the first area 143a to fourth area 143d of the third general-purpose drawing holding area 143 On condition that the number of pieces of information is less than the upper limit of four pieces (step S2802: NO), storage processing to the third general drawing reservation area 143 is executed (step S2803). In this storage process, the numeric information of the random number counter C11 is used as the 3rd standard computer side pending information, and the 3rd standard computer side pending information in the first area 143a to the fourth area 143d of the 3rd standard computer reservation area 143 is stored. The data is stored in the area with the earliest digestion order among the areas that have not been processed. In addition, when the 3rd general map side reservation information is acquired, the display contents of the 3rd standard computer reservation display section 137 are updated in accordance with the increase in the number of pieces of 3rd standard computer side pending information. Configure the data to do so.

If a negative determination is made in step S2801, an affirmative determination is made in step S2802, or the process of step S2803 is executed, the first general electric power device 121, the second general electric power device 122, or the fourth general electric power device 161 It is determined whether or not is in the open execution state (step S2804). If a negative determination is made in step S2804, the processes of steps S2805 to S2814 are executed. The processing contents of these steps S2805 to S2814 are basically the same as the processing contents of steps S2305 to S2314 of the third general electric power control process (FIG. 39) in the tenth embodiment. However, in the third general-purpose map fluctuation start process (step S2810), the third general-purpose power grid opening lottery process is not executed, and after the display continuation time on the third general-purpose map display section 133 ends, the third general-purpose power grid is reliably used. The device 123 enters the open execution state.

Further, the display continuation period of the display continuation times in the third general pattern display unit 133 selected in the third general pattern fluctuation start process (step S2810) is fixed at 0.03 seconds. As already explained, the display continuation period of the display continuation times in the second general-purpose figure display section 132 is fixed at 0.2 seconds, and when the third general-purpose power device 123 is in the open execution state, the second general-purpose figure display section 132 The progress of the display continuation times in the ordinary figure display section 132 is temporarily stopped, and when the relevant open execution state ends, the progress of the display continuation times is resumed. In this configuration, the display continuation period of the third general map display section 133 is the second period, which is the period obtained by multiplying the display continuation period by "4", which is a value corresponding to the upper limit number of pending storage of the third general public map side pending information. By setting the period to be shorter than the display duration of the general-purpose figure display section 132, all of the third general-purpose figure side pending information acquired in one opening execution state of the second general-purpose power supply device 122. It becomes possible to prevent a new opening execution state of the second general power device 122 from starting before the opening execution state of the third general power device 123 corresponding to the above ends.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2804, the process of step S2815 is executed. The processing contents of step S2815 are the same as the processing contents of step S2315 of the third general electric power control process (FIG. 39) in the tenth embodiment.

As described above, by executing the third general figure general electricity control process, the variable display of the picture is performed in the third general figure display section 133, triggered by the occurrence of a prize in the second general electric figure device 122. . Then, after the display continuation times on the third general-purpose figure display section 133 are completed, the third general-purpose electric device 123 is surely brought into the open execution state. In the opening execution state, the third general power device 123 performs the opening state for 3 seconds three times with a closing duration period of 1 second in between. In addition, if the number of winning game balls to the third power supply device 123 reaches 10 or more before the 3-second open state is performed three times, the 3-second open state is performed three times. Even if there is, the current open execution state is terminated.

In addition, in the third general electric power control process, when the first general electric power device 121, the second general electric power device 122, or the fourth general electric power device 161 is in the open execution state, the display continuation time of the third general electric power display section 133 is Execute the process to temporarily stop. As a result, when the first general power device 121, the second general power device 122, or the fourth general power device 161 is in the open execution state, the display continuation of the third general power map display section 133 is prevented from proceeding. becomes possible. Therefore, when the first general power device 121, the second general power device 122, or the fourth general power device 161 is in the open state, the third general power device 123 does not become in the open state. It becomes possible to do so.

<4th general map general electric power control process>
Next, the fourth general electric power control process executed by the main side MPU 72 will be explained. In the fourth general purpose electric power control process, execution control of the display continuation times in the fourth general electric power display section 134 and execution control of the open execution state of the fourth general electric power device 161 are performed. FIG. 47 is a slow chart showing the fourth general-purpose electric power control process.

First, it is determined whether the first general power device 121, the second general power device 122, or the third general power device 123 is in an open state (step S2901). If a negative determination is made in step S2901, the processes of steps S2902 and S2903 are executed. These processes will be explained later. Thereafter, the fourth general address table stored in the main side ROM 73 is read out (step S2904). The start address of a program for executing the process corresponding to the numerical information of the fourth general-purpose electric power counter is set in the fourth general-purpose electric power address table. The 4th standard electric power counter is a counter for specifying the processing content to be executed in the 4th general electric power control process by the main side MPU 72.

The fourth general electricity counter can take values from "0" to "4", and each value from "0" to "4" is the start address NA40 to NA44 of each process (step S2907 to step S2911). It corresponds to Specifically, when the value of the fourth general-purpose figure general-purpose power counter is "0," a fourth general-purpose figure fluctuation start process ( Step S2907) is to be executed, and when the value of the fourth general figure general electricity counter is "1," the fourth general figure fluctuation is a process for advancing the display continuation times in the fourth general figure display section 134. If the middle process (step S2908) is to be executed, and the value of the fourth general figure general electricity counter is "2," the fourth general figure display unit 134 executes the fourth process for ending the display continuation times on the fourth general figure display unit 134. If the process for determining the general purpose power supply (step S2909) is to be executed, and the value of the fourth general purpose power supply counter is "3", the process for controlling the open state of the fourth general power supply device 161 is executed. The process for opening the 4th general electric power (step S2910) is to be executed, and if the value of the 4th general electric power counter is "4," this is the process for setting the fourth general electric power device 161 in the open state again. The fourth power station closed process (step S2911) is to be executed.

In the 4th standard and general electricity control process, after reading the 4th general and general electricity address table (step S2904), the start address corresponding to the information of the 4th general and general electricity counter is set to the 4th general and general electricity address table. It is obtained from the table (step S2905), and jumps to the process indicated by the obtained start address (step S2906). Each process from step S2907 to step S2911 will be individually explained below.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the fourth normal pattern fluctuation start process in step S2907. If a winning to the second through winning section 162 has occurred (step S3001: YES), an open determination process is executed (step S3002). In the release determination process, the current numerical information of the general-purpose electric random number counter C11 is stored in the fourth general-purpose figure execution area 144 as fourth general-purpose figure side pending information. Then, the release determination table is read from the main side ROM 73, and the fourth regular figure side reservation information stored in the fourth regular figure execution area 144 is compared with the read open determination table. In this case, the probability that the open winning result is determined in the open determination process is determined by the first general electric power open lottery process in the first general electric power fluctuation start process (step S2611) of the first general electric power general electric power control process (FIG. 44). The probability is 1/100, which is the same as the probability of winning the first public power open election.

If the result of the open decision process is an open winning result (step S3003: YES), a stop result setting process for the open winning result is executed (step S3004). Specifically, information about the stop mode of the open winning result pattern to be finally stopped and displayed in the current display continuation on the fourth general figure display section 134 is read from the main side ROM 73 and stored in the main side RAM 74. . Note that one type of pattern stopping mode may be set for the open winning result, or a plurality of types of pattern stopping modes may be set for the open winning result.

If the result of the open determination process is not an open winning result (step S3003: NO), a stop result setting process for a losing result is executed (step S3005). Specifically, information on the stop mode of the picture for the missed result that is to be finally stopped and displayed on the fourth normal picture display unit 134 in the current display continuation is read from the main side ROM 73 and stored in the main side RAM 74. The information on the pattern of the pattern selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern of the pattern selected in the case of an open winning result.

After any one of the stop result setting processes is executed, a process for specifying a fourth general figure fluctuation period is executed (step S3006). Thereafter, variable display of the picture pattern on the fourth general figure display section 134 is started (step S3007). When the fourth standard figure display section 134 displays the symbols in a variable manner, the already explained variable display table for the standard figures is referred to.

Thereafter, the value of the fourth general electric power counter is incremented by 1 (step S3008). Since the value of the 4th standard electric power counter when the 4th standard electric power fluctuation start process is executed is "0", the value of the 4th general electric power standard counter is "0", so by adding 1, the value of the 4th general standard electric power counter is It becomes "1" corresponding to the changing process (step S2908).

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the process for specifying the fourth normal pattern fluctuation period in step S3006.

In the specific processing, if the result of the open determination process in the current display continuation time is not an open winning result (step S3101: NO), a long period is set as the display continuation period of the current display continuation time in the fourth general map display section 134. is selected (step S3102). The long period is set to a fixed value of 600 seconds. This period is longer than the longest display continuation period that can be selected in the display continuation times in the first general figure display section 131. In this way, when the result is not an open winning result, a long period of 600 seconds is set as the display continuation period of the display continuation times in the fourth general figure display section 134, so that the first general electric power device 121, the second general electric power When the firing operation of the game ball is performed so as to flow down the right area PA3 in a situation other than the jackpot state where either the electric device 122 or the third general electric device 123 is in the open execution state, the fourth This makes it possible to reduce the efficiency of display continuous display on the normal figure display section 134, and in this situation, the player is informed that the game ball should be launched so that it flows down the left side area PA2 instead of the right side area PA3. It becomes possible to make it recognized.

On the other hand, if the result of the open determination process in the current display continuation time is an open winning result (step S3101: YES), a short period is selected as the display duration period of the current display continuation time in the fourth general map display section 134. (Step S3103). The short period is set to a fixed value of 0.1 seconds.

As already explained, when the fourth general power device 161 enters the open execution state and a winning occurs in the fourth general power device 161, the second general power device 161 enters the second general power device 161 in the same way as when a winning occurs in the first general power device 121. The drawing-side pending information is held and stored. When the second general figure side pending information is held and stored, the display continuation time of the second general figure display section 132 is executed, and when the display continuation time of the second general figure display section 132 is executed, The second general electric power device 122 enters the opening execution state, and the third general electric power device 123 is then reliably opened by storing the third general power drawing side reservation information on the basis of winning the second general electric power device 122. It enters the execution state. In other words, basically, the first general public power grid side reservation information acquired based on the winning in the first through prize section 160 is used as a trigger to become the first general public power open lottery winner in the first general public power open lottery process. The second general power device 122 and the third general power device 123 will move to the jackpot state where they are in the open execution state, but in the middle of the jackpot state, the fourth general power device 161 will be in the open execution state and the fourth general power device 123 will be in the open execution state. The number of times the second general power device 122 and the third general power device 123 are in the open execution state in the jackpot state is increased by storing the second general power device side reservation information on hold based on the winning of 161. becomes. In this configuration, the display duration of each continuous display on the second general figure display section 132 is fixed at 0.2 seconds, and the display duration of each continuous display on the third common figure display section 133 is 0.03 seconds. Fixed. In this case, the display duration period of the fourth common map display section 134 that is selected in the event of an open winning result is set to a shorter period than the display duration period of the second common symbol display section 132. Even if the display continuation of the fourth general figure display section 134 corresponding to the open winning result is executed at any timing in the jackpot state, a winning occurs in the fourth general figure device 161 and the second general figure side is put on hold. It is possible to generate a situation in which information is newly acquired at a timing close to a situation in which the second general power device 122 or the third general power device 123 is in the open execution state. In addition, since the display duration period of the fourth general map display section 134 selected in the case of an open winning result is set to a longer period than the display continuation period of the third general map display section 133, It becomes possible to guarantee a period during which the display continuation times are executed in the ordinary figure display section 134 to a certain extent.

After selecting a short period, a short period selection command is transmitted to the audio-optical side MPU 92 (step S3104). The short-term selection command is a command for making the audio/light side MPU 92 recognize that the fourth general power device 161 will be in the open execution state. When the sound-light side MPU 92 receives the short-term selection command in the jackpot state where the second general power device 122 or the third general power device 123 is in the opening execution state, the fourth general power device 161 is in the opening execution state. The symbol display device 51, the display light emitting unit 63, and the speaker unit 64 perform an effect that allows the player to recognize that the game ball is to be won and that the game ball should be placed in the fourth general electric device 161. do.

In addition, the sound-optical side MPU 92 transmits a command transmitted by the main side MPU 72 when the second general computer side hold information is acquired and a command sent by the main side MPU 72 when the third general computer side hold information is acquired. Based on this, the number of the second general map side pending information and the third general standard side pending information is grasped, and the number of the second general pattern side pending information and the number of the third general standard side pending information is recognized to the player. A configuration may be adopted in which the effect that is enabled is executed by the symbol display device 51, the display light emitting section 63, and the speaker section 64. In this case, in the jackpot state, the fourth general power device 161 is in the open execution state, and when the second general power drawing side reservation information is acquired based on the winning to the fourth general power device 161, the corresponding effect is changed to the symbol. By being executed by the display device 51, the display light emitting unit 63, and the speaker unit 64, the number of times that the second general power device 122 and the third general power device 123 are in the open execution state in this jackpot state has increased. The player can clearly recognize it. In addition, when the display continuation time in the fourth general figure display section 134 is executed, the sound and light side MPU 92 determines that the display continuation time is executed and that the display continuation time is executed based on the command transmitted by the main side MPU 72. A configuration may also be adopted in which the symbol display device 51, the display light emitting section 63, and the speaker section 64 perform effects corresponding to the result of the opening determination process. This makes it possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the fourth power supply device 161 enters the open execution state in the jackpot state.

When either step S3102 or step S3104 is executed, information on the display duration selected in step S3102 or step S3104 is set in the fourth timer counter of the main side RAM 74 (step S3105).

In the process during the fourth normal figure variation in step S2908, it is determined whether the timing is during display continuation and before final display. Specifically, when the value of the fourth timer counter that measures the display duration of the current display duration is 0.05 seconds remaining, it is determined that the timing is before final display. If it is before final display, a process for regularly changing the display mode of the picture in the fourth general figure display section 134 is executed. Further, when the timing for final display has come, the display mode of the picture in the fourth general figure display section 134 is set to the display mode corresponding to the result of the current open-release determination process. Thereafter, by adding 1 to the value of the 4th general map general power counter, the value of the counter changes from the value corresponding to the 4th general map changing process to the value corresponding to the 4th general map determining process (step S2909). Update to.

In the process during the 4th regular pattern determination in step S2909, it is determined whether the finalized display period (specifically, 0.05 seconds) of the current display continuation time has elapsed. If the fixed display period has elapsed, it is determined whether the result of the opening determination process in the current display continuation is an opening winning result. If it is not an open winning result, the value of the fourth general map general electric power counter is cleared to "0", and then the fourth general public map finalization process is ended. If it is an open winning result, "3" is set in the fourth general power release counter provided in the main side RAM 74 as information on the number of times the fourth general power device 161 is opened and closed. Further, "10" is set in the fourth general power winning counter provided in the main side RAM 74 as information on the upper limit number of winnings to the fourth general power device 161 in the current open execution state. Further, information corresponding to 3 seconds is set in the fourth timer counter as information on the open duration period of the fourth general power device 161. In addition, by starting to output a drive signal to the fourth general power drive section 161b, the fourth general power device 161 is brought into an open state. After that, 1 is added to the 4th general electric power counter. Since the value of the 4th general electricity grid counter when the 4th general electricity grid determination process is executed is "2", after adding 1, the value is "3" corresponding to the 4th general electricity release process (step S2910). ”.

In step S2910, during the process of opening the fourth general electric power, if a prize has been won to the fourth general electric power device 161, a value corresponding to the number of winnings is subtracted from the value of the fourth general electric power winning counter in the main side RAM 74. do. If the value of the fourth general electricity winning counter is "0", the value of the fourth general electricity release counter is cleared to "0", the value of the fourth timer counter is cleared to "0", and By stopping the output of the drive signal to the fourth general electric power drive unit 161b, the fourth general electric power accessory 161a is brought into a closed state, and the value of the fourth general electric power electric charge counter is cleared to "0". As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the fourth general-purpose figure general-purpose electric power control process becomes the fourth general-purpose figure fluctuation start process (step S2907). Furthermore, even if the value of the fourth general electricity winning counter is not "0", if the value of the fourth timer counter is "0", the drive signal is output to the fourth general electricity drive unit 161b. By stopping this, the fourth general power utility object 161a is brought into a closed state, and the value of the fourth general power open counter in the main side RAM 74 is subtracted by 1. If the value of the fourth general electric utility opening counter is not "0," then after setting the numerical information of the closing duration period (specifically, 1 second) of the fourth general electric utility accessory 161a in the fourth timer counter, The value of the 4th general map general electricity counter is updated from "3" to "4". As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the fourth general utility grid control process becomes the fourth general public electricity closed process (step S2911). When the value of the fourth general power open counter is "0", the value of the fourth general power open counter is cleared to "0" without setting a value in the fourth timer counter. As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the fourth general-purpose figure general-purpose electric power control process becomes the fourth general-purpose figure fluctuation start process (step S2907).

In step S2911, during the fourth general power shut-down process, on the condition that the value of the fourth timer counter is "0", the output of the drive signal to the fourth general power drive section 161b is started. Numerical information of the opening duration period (specifically, 3 seconds) when the 4th general electric accessory 161a is opened and the 4th general electric accessory 161a is opened once is set in the 4th timer counter. . Then, the value of the fourth general electric power counter is updated from "4" to "3". As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the fourth general purpose electric power control process becomes the fourth general electric power release process (step S2910).

As described above, by executing the fourth general figure general electric power control process, the changing display of the symbols is performed in the fourth general figure display section 134, triggered by the occurrence of a winning in the second through prize winning section 162. . If the opening determination process results in an opening winning result, after the display continuation time on the fourth ordinary figure display section 134 ends, the fourth ordinary electricity device 161 enters the opening execution state. In the opening execution state, the fourth general power device 161 performs the opening state for 3 seconds three times with a closing duration period of 1 second in between. In addition, if the number of winning game balls to the fourth general electric device 161 reaches 10 or more before the 3-second open state is performed three times, the 3-second open state is performed three times. Even if there is, the current open execution state is terminated.

In the fourth general purpose electric power control process, if the first general electric power device 121, the second general electric power device 122, or the third general electric power device 123 is in the open execution state, an affirmative determination is made in step S2901, so that step Adjustment processing is executed in S2912. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing adjustment processing.

In the adjustment process, if the current display continuation time of the fourth general figure display section 134 does not correspond to the open winning result (step S3202: NO), the fluctuation ends. Processing is executed (step S3203). In the variation end processing, if the display mode of the fourth general figure display section 134 is a stop result corresponding to a missed result, that state is maintained, and if the display mode is not a stop result corresponding to a missed result, it is changed to the stop result corresponding to the missed result. shall be. In addition, in the fluctuation end processing, the fourth timer counter is cleared to "0". As a result, the current display continuation on the fourth general figure display section 134 is ended midway with the stop result corresponding to the missed result being displayed. It should be noted that the stop result corresponding to the miss result corresponds to the information on the stop mode of the picture for the miss result that is read out to the main side RAM 74 in step S3005 of the fourth normal figure variation start process (FIG. 48). Thereafter, the value of the fourth general electric power counter is cleared to "0" (step S3204). As a result, the process to be executed in the next processing time of the fourth general-purpose figure general-purpose electric power control process becomes the fourth general-purpose figure fluctuation start process (step S2907).

If the current display continuation time corresponds to the open winning result (step S3202: YES), a fluctuation stop process is executed (step S3205). In the fluctuation stop processing, the display continuation on the fourth general map display section 134 is temporarily stopped in the current display mode of the fourth general map display section 134, and the update of the fourth timer counter is once stopped. Further, in the fluctuation stop processing, the fourth stop flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1".

In the fourth general electric power control process, if a negative determination is made in step S2901 and the fourth stopped flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2902: YES), the corresponding 4 Clear the stopped flag to "0" (step S2903). As a result, if the fourth general figure display section 134 has been temporarily stopped during the continuous display period, the continuous display period is restarted and the updating of the fourth timer counter is restarted.

As described above, in the 4th general power grid control process, if the first general power device 121, the second general power device 122, or the third general power device 123 is in the opening execution state, the fourth general power grid that does not correspond to the opening winning result If it is the display continuation time of the display unit 134, the display continuation time is ended midway. As a result, in order to suppress the firing operation of the game ball so as to flow down the right side area PA3 in a situation where it is not a jackpot state, the display duration of the display duration of the fourth normal picture display section 134 corresponding to a missed result is determined. In a configuration in which the period is set for a long period of time, in the jackpot state, when the first general power device 121, the second general power device 122, or the third general power device 123 enters the open execution state, the It becomes possible to end the continuous display of the 4-general figure display section 134 midway through. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the display continuation of the fourth general figure display unit 134 corresponding to a missed result in a jackpot state from continuing meaninglessly, and as a result, in a jackpot condition, the display of the fourth general figure display unit 161 can be prevented from continuing meaninglessly. This makes it possible to increase the possibility that the system will be in an open execution state.

On the other hand, in the fourth general power grid control process, if the first general power device 121, the second general power device 122, or the third general power device 123 is in the opening execution state, the fourth general power grid display corresponding to the opening winning result is displayed. A process for temporarily stopping the display continuation of section 134 is executed. As a result, when the first general power device 121, the second general power device 122, or the third general power device 123 is in the open execution state, the display continuation time of the fourth general power map display section 134 corresponding to the open winning result It is possible to prevent this from proceeding. Therefore, while preventing the fourth general power device 161 from invalidating the right to enter the open execution state, the first general power device 121, the second general power device 122, or the third general power device 123 can be placed in the open execution state. In this case, it is possible to prevent the fourth general power device 161 from entering the open execution state redundantly.

<Jackpot condition>
Next, the jackpot state will be explained with reference to the time chart of FIG. 51. FIG. 51(a) shows a period in which the display continuation times in the first general-purpose figure display section 131 is executed, and FIG. 51(b) shows a period in which the first general-purpose power device 121 is in the open execution state, FIG. 51(c) shows the timing at which the second general map side reservation information is acquired, and FIG. e) shows the period during which the second general power device 122 is in the open execution state, FIG. 51(f) shows the timing when the third general power device side reservation information is acquired, and FIG. 51(h) shows a period in which the third general power device 123 is in the open execution state, and FIG. 51(j) shows a period during which the display continuation times in the ordinary figure display section 134 are executed, and FIG. 51(j) shows a period during which the fourth ordinary electric power device 161 is in the open execution state.

As shown in FIG. 51(a), the continuous display on the first general figure display section 131 is performed from timing t1 to timing t2. This display continuation time corresponds to the first general electricity opening winning, so after the display continuation time ends, the first general electric power device 121 is displayed from timing t2 to timing t7 as shown in FIG. 51(b). is in the open execution state. With the first power supply device 121 in the open execution state, the player changes the firing operation that had been performed so far so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2 to a firing operation that causes the game ball to flow down the right area PA3. do. This makes it possible to win a prize in the first general electricity device 121. Then, at timing t3, timing t4, timing t5, and timing t6, which are in the middle of the release execution state, as shown in FIG. be done. Note that in the open execution state of the first general power device 121, the display continuation time in the second general purpose figure display section 132 is not started, so even if the second general purpose figure side pending information is held and stored, the second general purpose figure display section The display continuation cycle at 132 is not started.

Thereafter, the opening execution state of the first power supply device 121 ends at the timing t7, and the display continuation time on the second power supply diagram display section 132 is started at the timing t7, as shown in FIG. 51(d). , the display continuation times are executed until timing t9. In addition, at the timing t7, as shown in FIG. 51(a), the display continuation time in the first general figure display section 131 is also started. In addition, in this situation, since the firing operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the right side area PA3, a winning occurs in the second through winning section 162, and as shown in FIG. 51(i), at the timing t8. The display continuation time in the fourth general figure display section 134 is started. The open winning result is not determined in the open determination process for the display continuation time.

After that, as shown in FIG. 51(d) at timing t9, the continuous display on the second general-purpose figure display section 132 is completed, and as a result, the opening of the second general-purpose electric device 122 is executed as shown in FIG. 51(e). state. In this case, the continuous display on the fourth general figure display section 134 that does not correspond to the open winning result is terminated midway at timing t9, as shown in FIG. 51(i). Further, at the timing t9, the continuous display on the first general figure display section 131 is temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 51(a).

The opening execution state of the second general power supply device 122 started at timing t9 is executed until timing t14, as shown in FIG. 51(e). Then, as shown in FIG. 51(f), at timing t10, t11, t12, and t13, which are in the middle of the release execution state, the third general map side hold information is acquired and stored in the hold memory. be done. In addition, since the display continuation time in the third general purpose figure display section 133 is not started in the open execution state of the second general purpose power supply device 122, even if the third general purpose figure side reservation information is held and stored, the third general purpose figure display section The display continuation cycle at 133 is not started.

Thereafter, the opening execution state of the second general purpose power device 122 ends at timing t14, and the display continuation on the first general purpose figure display section 131 is restarted at the timing t14, as shown in FIG. 51(a). , as shown in FIG. 51(d), the display continuation time in the second general figure display section 132 is started, and as shown in FIG. 51(g), the display continuation time in the third general figure display section 133 is started. Then, at the timing t15, as shown in FIG. 51(g), the display continuation time in the third general-purpose electric device 133 ends first, so that the third general-purpose electric device 123 as shown in FIG. 51(h) It becomes an open execution state. In this case, at the timing t15, as shown in FIG. 51(a), the display continuation in the first general figure display section 131 is temporarily stopped, and as shown in FIG. 51(d), the second general figure display section The display continuation times at 132 are temporarily stopped.

The opening execution state of the third general power device 123, which started at timing t15, ends at timing t16, as shown in FIG. 51(h). As a result, at the timing t16, the continuous display on the first general figure display section 131 is restarted as shown in FIG. 51(a), and the display on the second general figure display section 132 is restarted as shown in FIG. The continuation time is restarted, and as shown in FIG. 51(g), the continuation time of display on the third general figure display section 133 is started. Then, at the timing t17, as shown in FIG. 51(g), the display continuation time in the third general-purpose figure display section 133 ends first, so that the third general-purpose figure display unit 123 as shown in FIG. 51(h) It becomes an open execution state. In this case, at the timing t17, as shown in FIG. 51(a), the display continuation in the first general figure display section 131 is temporarily stopped, and as shown in FIG. 51(d), the second general figure display section The display continuation times at 132 are temporarily stopped.

After that, as the above operation is repeated, the jackpot state progresses and the number of pending information on the second general figure side becomes 0, from timing t18 to timing t19, as shown in FIG. 51(g). As shown in FIG. 51(i), the display continuation time in the third general figure display section 133 is started, and the display continuation time in the fourth general figure display section 134 is started as shown in FIG. 51(i). Note that the display continuation times on the fourth general map display section 134 correspond to the open winning result. Then, at the timing t19, as shown in FIG. 51(g), the display continuation time in the third general-purpose symbol display section 133 ends, and at the timing t19, the third general-purpose symbol displays as shown in FIG. 51(h). The device 123 enters the open execution state. In this case, at the timing t19, as shown in FIG. 51(i), the display continuation on the fourth common symbol display section 134 corresponding to the open winning result is temporarily stopped.

Thereafter, the opening execution state of the third general power device 123 ends at timing t20. As a result, at the timing t20, as shown in FIG. 51(i), the display continuation on the fourth common symbol display section 134 corresponding to the open winning result is restarted. Then, as the display continuation time in the fourth general-purpose figure display section 134 ends at the timing t21, the display of the fourth general-purpose figure display unit 161 ends from the timing t21 to the timing t26, as shown in FIG. 51(j). It becomes an open execution state. Then, at each of timing t22, timing t23, timing t24, and timing t25, which are in the middle of the release execution state, as shown in FIG. be done. As a result, the second general power device 122 is given another chance to enter the open execution state.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

If the opening execution state of any of the first general power device 121 to third general power device 123 is started during the display continuation time on the fourth general purpose figure display section 134, the display continuation time is If it corresponds to the fact that the open execution state of the electric device 161 does not occur, the display continuation time is ended as is. As a result, the display continuation of the fourth general purpose figure display section 134 that is not connected to the occurrence of the opening execution state of the fourth general power device 161 is the opening execution state of any of the first general power device 121 to the third general power device 123. It is possible to terminate the display when the state occurs, and the number of times the display of the fourth general purpose figure display section 134 is continued is completed while giving priority to the occurrence of the opening execution state of any of the first general purpose power device 121 to the third general power device 123. It becomes possible to increase efficiency. On the other hand, if the number of display continuations corresponds to the subsequent generation of the open execution state of the fourth general power device 161, the timing of occurrence of the open execution state of the fourth general power device 161 is delayed. As a result, while giving priority to the generation of the open execution state of any of the first general power equipment 121 to the third general power equipment 123, the benefit of the generation of the open execution state of the fourth general power equipment 161 is not lost. It becomes possible to do so.

In the middle of the display continuation of the fourth general purpose figure display section 134 corresponding to the occurrence of the open execution state of the fourth general power device 161, the open execution state of any of the first general power device 121 to the third general power device 123 is changed. If started, the progress of the display continuation is stopped, and when the open execution state of the first general power device 121 to the third general power device 123 is ended thereafter, the progress of the display continuation is restarted. It is the composition. As a result, the excellent effects described above can be achieved simply by temporarily stopping and canceling the continuous display of the fourth general figure display section 134.

Even if a prize is won in the second through winning section 162 in a situation where it is not possible to start the display continuation of the fourth common symbol display section 134, the fourth common symbol side pending information is not acquired. In other words, the fourth general map side pending information is not stored pending storage. As a result, any one of the first general power device 121 to the third general power device 123 is opened in a situation where the display continuation of the fourth general figure display section 134 is not executed, and furthermore, the second through prize is won. Even if a prize is won in section 162, it is only necessary not to acquire the 4th general drawing side pending information for the winning, and it is necessary to perform processing such as erasing the 4th general drawing side pending information once acquired. does not occur.

The display continuation period of the display continuation time of the fourth general purpose figure display section 134 corresponding to the occurrence of the open execution state of the fourth general power device 161 is the same as that of the fourth general purpose power device 161 that does not correspond to the occurrence of the open execution state of the fourth general power device 161. This is shorter than the display continuation period of the display continuation times of the diagram display section 134. This makes it possible to shorten the period required from the start of the display continuation of the fourth general figure display section 134 until the opening execution state of the fourth general electric power device 161 is started. In this case, the display continuation time of the fourth general purpose figure display section 134 that does not correspond to the occurrence of the opening execution state of the fourth general power device 161 is the opening execution state of any of the first general power device 121 to the third general power device 123. Terminated if a condition occurs. Thereby, it becomes possible to improve the efficiency of display of the fourth general figure display section 134 for the number of times the display is continued.

The second through prize winning section 162 and the fourth general power device 161 are provided in the right area PA3 together with the first general power device 121 to the third general power device 123, but even if the state is not a jackpot state, the second through power device 161 is If it is possible to win a prize in the winning section 162 and a prize is won in the second through winning section 162, an open execution state of the fourth power supply device 161 may occur. On the other hand, the display continuation period of the display continuation times of the fourth general purpose map display section 134 that does not correspond to the occurrence of the open execution state of the fourth general power device 161 is set to be long. This makes it possible to reduce the gaming efficiency when aiming to win in the second through winning section 162 in a state that is not a jackpot state. In this case, the display continuation time of the fourth general purpose figure display section 134 that does not correspond to the occurrence of the opening execution state of the fourth general power device 161 is the opening execution state of any of the first general power device 121 to the third general power device 123. Terminated if a condition occurs. As a result, in the jackpot state, it is possible to improve the efficiency of displaying the fourth common symbol display section 134 for a continuous number of times.

If the first general electricity release lottery process executed based on the winning result in the first through winning section 160 results in the first general electricity release winning, the first general electricity equipment 121 enters the release execution state, and On the basis of the winning to the device 121, the second general power supply device 122 is triggered to enter the open execution state, and the second general power drawing side pending information is acquired, whereas the second general power supply device 122 is executed based on the winning to the second through winning section 162. By winning the 4th general electric power opening lottery in the 4th general electric power opening lottery process, the 4th general electric power device 161 enters the release execution state, and based on the winning of the 4th general electric power device 161, the 2nd general electric power device side is put on hold. Information is obtained. As a result, the player expects that the fourth power supply device 161 will be in the open execution state.

<Another form of the eleventh embodiment>
(1) When a game ball is launched so as to flow down the right side area PA3 in a situation where the game ball is not in a jackpot state, a corresponding notification may be provided. Specifically, when a game ball enters the second through winning section 162 in a jackpot state, at least one of the symbol display device 51, the display light emitting section 63, and the speaker section 64 is used to move the game ball to the right side area. To enable a player to recognize that the firing of game balls toward PA3 is to be stopped. This makes it possible to deter the player from aiming to enter the game ball into the second through winning section 162 in a gaming state that is not a jackpot state.

(2) The display continuation period of the display continuation times of the fourth general purpose figure display section 134 corresponding to the fourth general purpose power supply device 161 being in the open execution state is determined according to the number of pending items of the second general purpose figure side reservation information. It is also possible to have a configuration in which Specifically, a configuration may be adopted in which a shorter display duration is selected as the display duration as the number of pieces of the second general figure side pending information is smaller. More specifically, in this configuration, in a situation where the number of pending items in the second general-purpose figure side reservation information is four, the fourth general-purpose figure display unit 134 corresponds to the fourth general-purpose power device 161 being in the open execution state. In a situation where a period required to digest four pieces of second general map side pending information is selected as the display duration of the display continuation times of As the display continuation period of the display continuation time of the fourth general purpose map display section 134 corresponding to the fourth general purpose power device 161 being in the open execution state, the duration required to digest the three pieces of second general purpose power side pending information is In a situation where the period is selected and the number of pending items of the second general purpose map side reservation information is two, the display continuation number of the fourth general purpose map display section 134 corresponding to the fourth general purpose power device 161 being in the open execution state. The display duration is selected to be the period required to digest two pieces of 2nd general public network pending information, and in a situation where the number of pending information on the 2nd public network is 1, the 4th public network A period of time required to digest one piece of second general map side pending information is selected as the display continuation period of the display continuation times of the fourth general map display section 134 corresponding to the device 161 entering the open execution state. so that As a result, in a situation where the number of pending information on the second general purpose map side obtained by winning a prize in the first general power device 121 is reduced, the release execution state of the fourth general power device 161 is started and the second general power device 161 is held. It becomes possible to newly acquire the general figure side pending information, and it becomes possible to increase the number of second general figure side pending information that is digested in one jackpot state.

Further, the display continuation period of the display continuation times of the fourth general purpose figure display unit 134 corresponding to the fourth general purpose power supply device 161 being in the open execution state is determined by referring to the number of pending items in the second general purpose figure side reservation information. Instead, the configuration may be performed by referring to the number of reservations in the second general-purpose figure side reservation information and the number of reservations in the third general-purpose figure side reservation information. In this case, not only will a shorter display duration be selected as the number of items on hold in the 2nd general equipment side storage information is smaller, but also a shorter display duration will be selected when the 2nd standard equipment side reservation information has the same number of items on hold. By configuring a structure in which a shorter display duration is selected as the number of pieces of figure side pending information is smaller, the number of second and third general figure side pending information that are consumed in one jackpot state It becomes possible to increase the number of

(3) The display continuation period of the display continuation times of the fourth general purpose figure display unit 134 corresponding to the fourth general purpose power device 161 being in the open execution state is not fixed but multiple types are set, and the display continuation of the setting target is set. The period may be determined by lottery. Thereby, it becomes possible to diversify the period required from the start of the display continuation of the fourth general figure display section 134 until the fourth general electric power device 161 enters the open execution state.

(4) Although the configuration has been described in which the 4th general map side reservation information is not stored on hold, a configuration may be adopted in which the 4th general map side reservation information is stored on hold. In this case, when the timing for extinguishing the fourth general purpose power unit side hold information is reached in a situation where any of the first general power unit 121 to the third general power unit 123 is in the open execution state, the fourth general power unit side hold information is invalidated if it does not correspond to the release execution state of the fourth general power device 161, and if the fourth general purpose power side reservation information corresponds to the release execution state of the fourth general power device 161, it is invalidated. It may be configured such that setting as a target for starting the display continuation of the fourth general purpose figure display section 134 is waited until the open execution state of the first general purpose power device 121 to the third general purpose power device 123 is completed. Thereby, it is possible to improve the efficiency of digesting the fourth general power supply side pending information while preventing the benefit of the fourth general power supply device 161 being in the open execution state from disappearing.

(5) In the right area PA3, the fourth general power device 161 is provided downstream of the first general power device 121, the second general power device 122, and the third general power device 123, but this The present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured such that the fourth general power device 161 is provided upstream of the first general power device 121, the second general power device 122, and the third general power device 123 in the right area PA3. good. This makes it possible to easily win a prize in the fourth general power device 161.

(6) In the middle of continuous display on the ordinary figure display parts 131, 132, 133, 134, the predetermined devices 121, 122, 123, 161 that do not correspond to the ordinary figure display parts 131, 132, 133, 134 are in the open execution state In this case, the display is temporarily stopped during the execution, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the period during which the predetermined devices 121, 122, 123, and 161 are in the open execution state is adopted. The display continuation period of the display continuation times may be extended by the same amount. In this case, during the period when the predetermined device 121, 122, 123, 124 is in the open execution state, the fluctuating display of the picture is displayed on the regular figure display section 131, 132, 133, 134 corresponding to the display continuation time in the middle of execution. The configuration may be continued.

(7) While the display continuation of the fourth general figure display section 134 is being executed, any of the first general power device 121, the second general power device 122, and the third general power device 123 enters the open execution state. In this case, if the display continuation time corresponds to the occurrence of the open execution state of the fourth general power device 161, the display continuation time is ended and invalidated, and the display continuation time corresponds to the occurrence of the open execution state of the fourth general power device 161. If it does not correspond to the occurrence of the open execution state of 161, the display continuation may be temporarily stopped and then resumed.

(8) While the display continuation of the fourth general figure display section 134 is being executed, one of the first general power device 121, the second general power device 122, and the third general power device 123 enters the open execution state. In this case, if the display continuation time corresponds to the occurrence of the opening execution state of the fourth general power device 161, the display continuation time is shortened, and the display continuation time corresponds to the occurrence of the opening execution state of the fourth general power device 161. If it does not correspond to the occurrence of the condition, the display continuation period may be terminated and invalidated.

(9) While the display continuation of the fourth general figure display section 134 is being executed, any of the first general power device 121, the second general power device 122, and the third general power device 123 enters the open execution state. In this case, if the display continuation time corresponds to the occurrence of the opening execution state of the fourth general power device 161, the display continuation time is extended, and the display continuation time corresponds to the occurrence of the opening execution state of the fourth general power device 161. If the occurrence of the condition is not supported, the number of times the display is continued may be shortened.

<Twelfth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the configuration of the gaming area PA is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be described, and descriptions of the same configurations as the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

FIG. 52 is a front view of the game board 24 in this embodiment. The game area PA is divided into an upper area PA1, a left area PA2, a right area PA3, and a lower area PA4 by the variable display unit 37, as in the first embodiment. In the lower area PA4, a predetermined through prize winning section 171 is provided in place of the first operating section 32 in the first embodiment. The predetermined through winning section 171 is activated when the firing operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left side area PA2, and when the firing operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the right side area PA3. It is placed in a position where you can win any prize. However, in the variable display unit 37, an introduction port 37b that allows the game balls to flow into the stage 37a is provided at the upper left of the variable display unit 37, and the game balls supplied to the stage 37a are allowed to flow into the stage 37a. When the ball decelerates sufficiently near the center in the lateral direction and flows downward, it is easy for the ball to enter the predetermined through winning portion 171. Therefore, when the firing operation is performed so that the game ball flows down toward the left side area PA2, which is to the right of the left end of the variable display unit 37 in the upper area PA1, it is easier to play the game ball toward the right side area PA3. The ball enters the predetermined through prize winning section 171 more easily than when the firing operation is performed so that the ball flows down.

The predetermined through winning section 171 has a through hole that penetrates in the vertical direction, and when a game ball passes through this through hole and is detected by the predetermined through detection sensor 171a, the main side MPU 72 selects the predetermined through winning section. The occurrence of winning in 171 is specified. In addition, when winning the predetermined through-winning portion 171, the game ball only passes through the through hole in the vertical direction, so the game ball that has won the predetermined through-winning portion 171 continues to flow down the gaming area PA. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game ball that enters the predetermined through winning section 171 may be discharged to the back side of the game board 24. In addition, when a prize is won in the predetermined through-winning section 171, three game balls are paid out for each game ball that enters, but even if the number of balls paid out is other than three, It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the payout of game balls is not often executed. In the left side area PA2, no ball entering section is provided including the through winning section 34 and the special winning device 35 in the first embodiment.

A predetermined general power device 172, a first non-electric device 173, a second non-electric device 177, and a third non-electric device 179 are provided in the right area PA3. These predetermined non-electric device 172, first non-electric device 173, second non-electric device 177, and third non-electric device 179 cannot win if the firing operation is performed so that they flow down the left area PA2. If the firing operation is performed so as to flow down the right area PA3, it is possible to win a prize. The predetermined general electric device 172, the first non-electric device 173, the second non-electric device 177, and the third non-electric device 179 are arranged in the order of the predetermined general electric device 172 → the first non-electric device 173 → the second non-electric device from the upstream side in the right area PA3. The non-electrical devices 177 are arranged in the vertical direction with a predetermined interval therebetween so that the third non-electrical device 179 is arranged.

The predetermined general electric power device 172 is provided with a predetermined general electric utility accessory 172a as a guide piece consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the predetermined general purpose electric accessory 172a is in a closed state, the game ball cannot win a prize in the predetermined general electric power device 172, and when the predetermined general electric utility object 172a is in an open state, it becomes possible to win a prize in the predetermined general electric power device 172. A predetermined general power drive unit 172b for opening and closing the predetermined general power accessory 172a and a predetermined general power detection sensor 172c for detecting winning game balls in the predetermined general power device 172 are both electrically connected to the main controller 70. ing. When a drive signal is transmitted from the main side MPU 72 to the predetermined general electric power drive section 172b, the predetermined general electric utility object 172a becomes in an open state, and when the transmission of the drive signal is stopped, the predetermined general electric power accessory 172a is in a closed state. to return to. Further, the main side MPU 72 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the predetermined general power device 172 based on the detection result of the predetermined general power detection sensor 172c. When a winning occurs in the predetermined general electricity device 172, 15 game balls are paid out for each game ball entered, but the number of paid out balls may be other than 15.

The first non-electrical device 173 is provided with a first guide piece 173a consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the first guide piece 173a is in the closed state, the game ball cannot win in the first non-electric device 173, and when the first guide piece 173a is in the open state, it becomes possible to win in the first non-electric device 173. A driving section for opening and closing the first guide piece 173a is not provided. Instead, the game ball that has won a prize in the predetermined general electric device 172 comes into contact with the first opening mechanism 173b provided in the first non-electric device 173 through the first guide path 174, and the first opening mechanism 173b is displaced. As a result, the first guide piece 173a becomes open, and the winning game ball in the first non-electric device 173 is installed in the first non-electric device 173 in the process of heading towards the second non-electric device 177 through the second guide path 175. The first guide piece 173a enters the closed state by coming into contact with the first closing mechanism 173c and displacing the first closing mechanism 173c.

In addition, the game ball that won a prize in the predetermined power supply device 172 and was guided to the first opening mechanism 173b by the first guiding path 174 and came into contact with the first opening mechanism 173b is transferred to the second non-electromagnetic device by the ejection path 176. It is discharged to a side different from the device 177 side. Further, when the first guide piece 173a is opened by the first opening mechanism 173b, the first closing mechanism 173c returns to the initial position, and the first closing mechanism 173c closes the first guide piece 173a. In this case, the first opening mechanism 173b returns to its initial position. Further, even if a game ball enters the predetermined general electric device 172 and comes into contact with the first opening mechanism 173b in a situation where the first guide piece 173a is already in the open state, the first guide piece 173a is already in the open state. The open state of the first guide piece 173a is maintained.

The game ball won in the first non-electrical device 173 flows down toward the second non-electrical device 177 through the second guiding path 175 as described above, but the upstream part of the second guiding path 175 has no The first non-electric device 173 is provided with a first non-electric detection sensor 173d for detecting a winning game ball. The first non-electric detection sensor 173d is electrically connected to the main control device 70, and the main MPU 72 controls the input of the game ball to the first non-electric device 173 based on the detection result of the first non-electric detection sensor 173d. Understand the presence or absence of a ball. When a winning occurs in the first non-electrical device 173, 15 game balls are paid out for each game ball entered, but the number of paid out balls may be other than 15. . In addition, the game ball which wins the predetermined non-electricity device 172, passes through the first guide path 174, and is ejected by the ejection path 176 is not detected by the first non-electricity detection sensor 173d.

The second non-electrical device 177 is provided with a second guide piece 177a made up of a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the second guide piece 177a is in the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the second non-electric device 177, and when the second guide piece 177a is in the open state, the game ball can enter the second non-electric device 177. A driving section for opening and closing the second guide piece 177a is not provided. Instead, the winning game ball in the first non-electrical device 173 comes into contact with the second opening mechanism 177b provided in the second non-electrical device 177 through the second guide path 175, and the second opening mechanism 177b is activated. Due to the displacement, the second guide piece 177a becomes open, and the winning game ball in the second non-electric device 177 heads toward the third non-electric device 179 through the third guide path 178. The second guide piece 177a enters the closed state by coming into contact with the second closing mechanism 177c and displacing the second closing mechanism 177c.

In addition, the game ball that won the first non-electrical device 173 and was guided to the second opening mechanism 177b by the second guiding path 175 and came into contact with the second opening mechanism 177b is transferred to the third non-electrical device by the ejection path 176. It is discharged to a side different from the electric device 179 side. Further, when the second guide piece 177a is opened by the second opening mechanism 177b, the second closing mechanism 177c returns to the initial position, and the second closing mechanism 177c closes the second guide piece 177a. In this case, the second opening mechanism 177b returns to its initial position. In addition, when two or more game balls enter the first non-electrical device 173 at the same time, the game balls come into contact with the second opening mechanism 177b in a situation where the second guide piece 177a is already in the open state. Even if this happens, the open state of the second guide piece 177a is maintained.

The game ball that won the second non-electrical device 177 will flow down toward the third non-electrical device 179 through the third guiding path 178 as described above, but the upstream part of the third guiding path 178 is The second non-electric device 177 is provided with a second non-electric detection sensor 177d for detecting a winning game ball. The second non-electric detection sensor 177d is electrically connected to the main controller 70, and the main MPU 72 controls the input of the game ball to the second non-electric device 177 based on the detection result of the second non-electric detection sensor 177d. Understand the presence or absence of a ball. When a winning occurs in the second non-electrical device 177, 15 game balls are paid out for each game ball entered, but the number of paid out balls may be other than 15. . It should be noted that the game ball that enters the first non-electric device 173, passes through the second guide path 175, and is ejected through the ejection path 176 is not detected by the second non-electric detection sensor 177d.

The third non-electrical device 179 is provided with a third guide piece 179a consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the third guide piece 179a is in the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the third non-electric device 179, and when the third guide piece 179a is in the open state, the game ball can enter the third non-electric device 179. A driving section for opening and closing the third guide piece 179a is not provided. Instead, the winning game ball in the second non-electrical device 177 comes into contact with the third opening mechanism 179b provided in the third non-electrical device 179 through the third guide path 178, and the third opening mechanism 179b is activated. By displacing the third guide piece 179a, the third guide piece 179a becomes open, and as the winning game ball of the third non-electric device 179 heads downward through the downstream discharge passage 181, the third guide piece 179a provided in the third non-electric device 179 The third guide piece 179a enters the closed state by coming into contact with the closing mechanism 179c and displacing the third closing mechanism 179c.

In addition, the game ball that won the second non-electrical device 177 and was guided to the third opening mechanism 179b by the third guiding passage 178 and came into contact with the third opening mechanism 179b is discharged to the downstream side by the discharge passage 176. It is discharged to a side different from the use passage 181 side. Further, when the third guide piece 179a is opened by the third opening mechanism 179b, the third closing mechanism 179c returns to the initial position, and the third closing mechanism 179c closes the third guide piece 179a. When this occurs, the third opening mechanism 179b returns to its initial position. Furthermore, when two or more game balls enter the second non-electrical device 177 at the same time, the game balls come into contact with the third opening mechanism 179b in a situation where the third guide piece 179a is already in the open state. Even if this happens, the open state of the third guide piece 179a is maintained.

The winning game ball in the third non-electric device 179 flows downward through the downstream discharge passage 181 as described above, but the third non-electric device The device 179 is provided with a third non-electric detection sensor 179d for detecting winning game balls. The third non-electric detection sensor 179d is electrically connected to the main controller 70, and the main MPU 72 controls the input of the game ball to the third non-electric device 179 based on the detection result of the third non-electric detection sensor 179d. Understand the presence or absence of a ball. When a winning occurs in the third non-electrical device 179, 15 game balls are paid out for each game ball entered, but the number of paid out balls may be other than 15. . It should be noted that the game ball that enters the second non-electric device 177, passes through the third guide path 178, and is ejected by the ejection path 176 is not detected by the third non-electric detection sensor 179d.

A predetermined common figure display section 182 and a predetermined common figure pending display section 183 are provided in the lower right side of the gaming area PA in an area through which the game ball does not pass. The predetermined general figure display section 182 is constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner. In this case, although it is not possible to perform a complicated display like the symbol display device 51 in the predetermined common symbol display section 182, it is possible to reduce the processing load for controlling the display of the predetermined common symbol display section 182. Become. However, the display device is not limited to this, and may be configured by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix display. In addition, the picture displayed in the predetermined general figure display section 182 may include a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, or a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed. A configuration in which colors are displayed may be considered. Further, the display range of the predetermined general symbol display section 182 is narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 51. Furthermore, the display ranges of both the predetermined common symbol display section 182 and the predetermined common symbol pending display section 183 are also narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 51. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the symbol display device 51 rather than the predetermined normal symbol display section 182 and the predetermined common symbol pending display section 183.

Based on the game ball entering the predetermined through-winning portion 171, a display continuation including a fluctuating display of symbols is performed in the predetermined common figure display portion 182. Further, the predetermined common map reservation display section 183 is provided at a position adjacent to the predetermined common map display section 182. Information corresponding to the number of game balls that have won in the predetermined through-winning portion 171 is reserved as predetermined general figure side reservation information up to a maximum of 4, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting the predetermined general figure reservation display section 183. It has become. Although not shown in the drawings, the main side RAM 74 is provided with a predetermined general map reservation area as an area for storing predetermined general map side reservation information. The configuration of the predetermined general purpose map reservation area is the same as the first general purpose map reservation area 141 in the fourth embodiment, and the numerical information of the general purpose power random number counter C11 is stored as the predetermined general purpose map side reservation information, and furthermore, the predetermined general purpose map reservation area 141 is In the display continuation time of the display unit 182, up to four pieces of predetermined general map side reservation information that are not subject to execution in the display continuation time are stored in abeyance.

<Game flow>
Next, the flow of the game in this embodiment will be explained with reference to the time chart of FIG. 53. 53(a) shows a period in which the display continuation times are executed in the predetermined general power display unit 182, FIG. 53(b) shows a period in which the predetermined general power device 172 is in an open state, and FIG. c) shows the timing when winning occurs in the predetermined non-electrical device 172, FIG. 53(d) shows the period when the first non-electrical device 173 is in the open state, and FIG. 53(f) shows the period when the second non-electrical device 177 is in the open state, and FIG. 53(g) shows the timing at which winning occurs to the electrical device 173. 53(h) shows the period during which the third non-electrical device 179 is in an open state, and FIG. 53(i) shows the timing when a winning occurs in the third non-electrical device 179. shows.

When a prize is won in the predetermined through-winning portion 171, the display is continued for a number of times in the predetermined general figure display portion 182 from the timing of t1 to the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 53(a). Since this display continuation time corresponds to the occurrence of the opening execution state of the predetermined general power device 172, after the display continuation time ends, the predetermined display continues from timing t2 to timing t4 as shown in FIG. 53(b). The general power device 172 is placed in an open state. By opening the predetermined power supply device 172, the player changes the firing operation that had been performed so far so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2 to a firing operation that causes the game ball to flow down the right area PA3. This makes it possible to win a prize in the predetermined common electricity device 172.

At timing t3 in the middle of the situation where the predetermined general power device 172 is in the open state, a winning occurs in the predetermined general power device 172 as shown in FIG. 53(c). When a winning occurs in the predetermined non-electrical device 172, the first non-electrical device 173 becomes open as shown in FIG. 53(d) at the timing t3. Then, at timing t5, a winning occurs in the first non-electrical device 173 as shown in FIG. 53(e). When a winning occurs in the first non-electric device 173, at the timing t5, the first non-electric device 173 changes from the open state to the closed state as shown in FIG. 53(d), and at the same time as shown in FIG. 53(f). As shown in FIG. 3, the second non-electrical device 177 changes from the closed state to the open state.

At timing t6 when the second non-electric device 177 is in an open state, a winning occurs in the second non-electric device 177 as shown in FIG. 53(g). When a winning occurs in the second non-electrical device 177, at the timing t6, the second non-electrical device 177 changes from the open state to the closed state as shown in FIG. 53(f), and at the same time as shown in FIG. 53(h). As shown in FIG. 3, the third non-electrical device 179 changes from the closed state to the open state.

At the timing t7 when the third non-electric device 179 is in an open state, a winning occurs in the third non-electric device 179 as shown in FIG. 53(i). When a winning occurs in the third non-electrical device 179, the third non-electrical device 179 changes from the open state to the closed state at the timing t7, as shown in FIG. 53(h).

As described above, when one game ball enters the predetermined general electric device 172, not only is the payout of 15 game balls performed, but the first non-electric device 173 is brought into an open state. Furthermore, when one game ball enters the first non-electric device 173 which is in the open state, not only is the payout of 15 game balls executed, but also the first non-electric device 173 is brought into the closed state. At the same time, the second non-electrical device 177 becomes open. Furthermore, when one game ball enters the second non-electrical device 177 that is in the open state, not only is the payout of 15 game balls executed, but also the second non-electrical device 177 is brought into the closed state. At the same time, the third non-electrical device 179 becomes open. Further, when one game ball enters the third non-electrical device 179 which is in the open state, payout of 15 game balls is executed, and the third non-electrical device 179 is further brought into the closed state. After one game ball is inserted into the predetermined general electric device 172 in this way, the game ball is inserted into each of the first non-electric device 173 → second non-electric device 177 → third non-electric device 179 in this order. By letting the balls roll, at least 60 game balls are paid out. When the firing operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the right side area PA3, the predetermined general power device 172, the first non-electric device 173, the second non-electric device 177, and the third non-electric device 179 are activated. There is a high probability that a game ball will be won in a device that is in an open state. Therefore, by performing the above-mentioned one cycle, it becomes possible to increase the number of game balls owned by the player.

When the predetermined general power device 172 enters the open state, the details will be described later, but the predetermined general power device 172 enters the open state multiple times with a predetermined closed duration period in between. Therefore, from the timing t8 to the timing t10, the predetermined general power device 172 becomes open again as shown in FIG. 53(b). Then, at the timing t9 in the middle of the situation where the predetermined general power device 172 is in the open state, a winning to the predetermined general power device 172 occurs as shown in FIG. 53(c). When a winning occurs in the predetermined non-electric device 172, the first non-electric device 173 becomes open as shown in FIG. 53(d) at the timing t9. In this case, the occurrence of winning in the first non-electric device 173 is delayed due to the ball clogging of the game balls in the upper tray 65a, and as shown in FIG. A winning to the non-electrical device 173 occurs.

When a winning occurs in the first non-electrical device 173, at the timing t11, the first non-electrical device 173 changes from the open state to the closed state as shown in FIG. 53(d), and at the same time as shown in FIG. 53(f). As shown in FIG. 3, the second non-electrical device 177 changes from the closed state to the open state. In this case, the occurrence of winnings in the second non-electric device 177 will be delayed due to the ball jamming of the game balls in the upper tray 65a occurring again. Then, at timing t12 when the second non-electrical device 177 is still in the open state, the next opening cycle of the predetermined non-electrical device 172 is started as shown in FIG. 53(b). That is, in this situation, both the predetermined general electrical device 172 and the second non-electrical device 177 are in an open state. Since the predetermined general power device 172 is provided upstream of the second non-electric device 177 in the right area PA3, winnings are more likely to occur in the predetermined general power device 172 than in the second non-electric device 177. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 53(c), at the timing t13, a winning occurs in the predetermined general electric device 172 before the second non-electric device 177.

When a winning occurs in the predetermined non-electrical device 172, the first non-electrical device 173 becomes open as shown in FIG. 53(d) at the timing t13. That is, in this situation, each of the predetermined general power device 172, the first non-electric device 173, and the second non-electric device 177 is in an open state. Thereafter, at timing t14, the predetermined general power device 172 enters the closed state as shown in FIG. 53(b). In this situation, both the first non-electrical device 173 and the second non-electrical device 177 are in an open state. Since the first non-electric device 173 is provided upstream of the second non-electric device 177 in the right area PA3, winnings are more likely to occur in the first non-electric device 173 than in the second non-electric device 177. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 53(e), at timing t15, winning occurs in the first non-electrical device 173 before the second non-electrical device 177.

When a winning occurs in the first non-electrical device 173, the first non-electrical device 173 enters the closed state at the timing t15 as shown in FIG. 53(d). However, since the second non-electric device 177 is already in the open state, even if a winning occurs in the first non-electric device 173, the open state of the second non-electric device 177 is maintained.

Thereafter, at timing t16, a winning occurs in the second non-electric device 177 as shown in FIG. 53(g). When a winning occurs in the second non-electrical device 177, at the timing of t16, the second non-electrical device 177 changes from the open state to the closed state as shown in FIG. 53(f), and at the same time as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 3, the third non-electrical device 179 changes from the closed state to the open state. Then, at timing t17, a winning occurs in the third non-electric device 179 as shown in FIG. 53(i). When a winning occurs in the third non-electrical device 179, the third non-electrical device 179 changes from the open state to the closed state at the timing t17, as shown in FIG. 53(h).

As described above, before one cycle of entering the game ball from the predetermined general power device 172 → first non-electric device 173 → second non-electric device 177 → third non-electric device 179 is completed, the input to the predetermined general power device 172 is completed. When a new prize is won, one cycle being executed will essentially end midway. In this case, the number of game balls given to the player will be reduced accordingly. In this embodiment, a configuration is adopted to suppress the occurrence of such inconvenience. The configuration will be explained later.

<General purpose electric power control process>
Next, a description will be given of the general electric power control process executed by the main MPU 72. In the general purpose electric power control process, execution control of the display continuation times in the predetermined general purpose electric power display section 182 and execution control of the open execution state of the predetermined general electric power device 172 are performed. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the general electric power control process in this embodiment.

If a prize has been won in the predetermined through-winning section 171 (step S3301: YES), the number of predetermined common symbol side reservation information stored in the predetermined common symbol reservation area is less than the upper limit of four pieces. Under the condition (step S3302: NO), storage processing in a predetermined general map holding area is executed (step S3303). The processing contents of the storage process are the same as the storage process (step S1103) in the first general purpose card holding area in the first general purpose electric power control process (FIG. 24) in the fourth embodiment.

If a negative determination is made in step S3301, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3302, or if the process of step S3303 is executed, the general purpose electricity address table stored in the main side ROM 73 is read out (step S3304). . The start address of a program for executing a process corresponding to the numerical information of the standard, standard, and general electricity counter is set in the standard, standard, and general electricity address table. The regular/universal electricity counter is a counter for specifying the processing content to be executed in the ordinary/universal electricity control process by the main side MPU 72.

The general electricity counter can take values from "0" to "4", and each value from "0" to "4" corresponds to the start address NA0 to NA4 of each process (step S3307 to step S3311). are doing. Specifically, when the value of the general-purpose figure and general-purpose electric power counter is "0," a general-purpose figure variation start process (step S3307), which is a process for starting the display continuation times in the predetermined general-purpose figure display section 182, is executed. If the value of the general map and general electricity counter is "1", the general map fluctuation process (step S3308), which is a process for advancing the display continuation times in the predetermined general map display section 182, becomes the execution target. , when the value of the general-purpose figure and general-purpose electricity counter is "2," the general-purpose figure confirmation process (step S3309), which is a process for ending the display continuation times in the predetermined general-purpose figure display section 182, is to be executed. When the value of the general power counter is "3", the general power disconnection process (step S3310), which is a process for controlling the open state of the predetermined general power device 172, is executed, and the general power counter If the value is "4", the general power shutting process (step S3311), which is a process for controlling the closed state of the predetermined general power device 172, is to be executed.

In the general-purpose electricity control process, after reading the general-purpose electricity address table (step S3304), the start address corresponding to the information of the general-purpose electricity counter is acquired from the general-purpose electricity address table (step S3305). , jumps to the process indicated by the acquired start address (step S3306). Each process from step S3307 to step S3311 will be individually explained below.

<Public figure fluctuation start process>
First, the normal pattern fluctuation start process in step S3307 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 55.

In the ordinary figure fluctuation start process, data setting processing is executed on the condition that the predetermined ordinary figure side reservation information is stored (step S3401: YES) (step S3402). The processing contents of the data setting process are the same as the data setting process (step S702) of the normal pattern fluctuation start process (FIG. 16) in the first embodiment. As a result, the predetermined general purpose figure side reservation information stored in the first area of the predetermined general purpose figure holding area is shifted to the general purpose figure execution area in the predetermined general purpose figure holding area.

After executing the data setting process, open determination process is executed (step S3403). In the release determination process, the release determination table is read from the main side ROM 73, and based on the read release determination table, the general power random number counter C11 in the predetermined general purpose map side reservation information that is the target of execution of the current release determination process is determined. Verify numerical information. In this case, there will be an open winning result with a probability of 1/100.

If the result of the open decision process is an open winning result (step S3404: YES), a stop result setting process for the open winning result is executed (step S3405). Specifically, information on the stop mode of the open winning result pattern to be finally stopped and displayed in the current continuous display on the predetermined regular symbol display section 182 is read from the main side ROM 73 and stored in the main side RAM 74. Note that one type of pattern stopping mode may be set for the open winning result, or a plurality of types of pattern stopping modes may be set for the open winning result.

If the result of the open determination process is not an open winning result (step S3404: NO), a stop result setting process for a losing result is executed (step S3406). Specifically, information on the stop mode of the winning result picture that is to be finally stopped and displayed on the predetermined general figure display section 182 in the current display continuation is read from the main side ROM 73 and stored in the main side RAM 74. The information on the pattern of the pattern selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern of the pattern selected in the case of an open winning result.

After any one of the stop result setting processes is executed, a process for specifying a regular figure fluctuation period is executed (step S3407). In the specific processing, first, it is determined whether the current display continuation time corresponds to the occurrence of a reach effect. Specifically, if the current display continuation time corresponds to the open winning result, it is determined that the reach effect occurs. In addition, even if the current display continuation does not correspond to the open winning result, the value of the reach random number counter C12 (see Figure 23) is acquired, and the value of the acquired reach random number counter C12 is used as the result of the reach occurrence. If the numerical information corresponds, it is determined that a reach effect will occur. When it is determined that a reach effect will occur, the reach generation table is read from the main side ROM 73, and the current numerical information of the fluctuation type counter C14 (see FIG. 23) is compared against the read out reach generation table. A display duration period is determined, and information about the determined display duration period is set in a timer counter provided in the main side RAM 74. In addition, when it is determined that a reach effect does not occur, the reach non-occurrence table is read from the main side ROM 73, and the current numerical information of the fluctuation type counter C14 (see FIG. 23) is read out from the read reach non-occurrence table. The display continuation period is determined by comparing the combination of the number of pieces of predetermined general map side hold information and the current number of pieces of predetermined general map side pending information, and information on the determined display continuation period is set in a timer counter provided in the main side RAM 74. When the table for reach occurrence is referred to, the display duration corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter C14 is selected regardless of the number of pieces of predetermined general figure side pending information, whereas the table for reach non-occurrence is referred to. In this case, a shorter display duration period is selected as the number of pieces of predetermined general map side hold information increases. The numerical information set in the timer counter is updated in the timer update process of step S210 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11). Incidentally, the display continuation period that can be selected when the predetermined general figure side hold information becomes a trigger for starting the display continuation time is 1 second to 180 seconds.

Thereafter, a fluctuation start command corresponding to the result of the open-release determination process and information on the determined display duration period is read from the main side ROM 73 and transmitted to the audio/light side MPU 92 (step S3408). The sound and light side MPU 92 executes control to cause the symbol display device 51, the display light emitting section 63, and the speaker section 64 to execute the display continuation repetition effect corresponding to the received variation start command. It should be noted that the symbol display device 51 performs the same effect as the effect for the game cycle in the first embodiment as the effect for the display continuation cycle.

Thereafter, the variable display of the pattern on the predetermined ordinary figure display section 182 is started (step S3409). A variable display table for regular symbols is stored in advance in the main ROM 73 as a table referred to by the main MPU 72 when the predetermined regular symbol display section 182 displays a variable pattern. When variable display of symbols is executed in the predetermined common figure display section 182, the same variable display table is used regardless of the result of the open determination process. When a fluctuating display of a picture is performed in the predetermined ordinary figure display section 182, the fluctuating display of a picture according to a predetermined pattern is repeated, but the fluctuating display of a picture according to the predetermined pattern is displayed in the fluctuating display table for a common figure. Control data for one round in is set. Therefore, when a variable display of a symbol is performed in the predetermined ordinary figure display section 182, the variable display table for ordinary figures is repeatedly used until immediately before final display is performed.

Thereafter, 1 is added to the value of the general electricity counter (step S3410). Since the value of the general/universal/universal power counter when the general/universal/universal figure fluctuation start process is executed is "0", by adding 1, the value of the general/universal/universal electric power counter is changed to the normal/universal/universal electricity counter during the process of general/universal/universal variation (step S3308). The corresponding "1" is obtained.

<Processing during normal map fluctuation>
Next, the process during normal map fluctuation in step S3308 in the general map general electricity control process (FIG. 54) will be explained.

In the regular figure fluctuation processing, it is determined whether the timing is during the display continuation cycle and before the final display. Specifically, when the value of the timer counter that measures the display duration of the current display duration is 0.4 seconds remaining, it is determined that the timing is before final display. If the display is not yet finalized, a process for regularly changing the display mode of the picture in the predetermined ordinary figure display section 182 is executed. This regular change continues until it is time to start final display. Further, this regular change is performed in a fixed manner regardless of whether or not the opening determination process is performed. Furthermore, when the timing for final display has come, the display mode of the picture in the predetermined general figure display section 182 is set to the display mode corresponding to the determination result of the current open-release determination process. Then, by adding 1 to the value of the general map and general power counter, the value of the counter is updated from the value corresponding to the general map changing process to the one corresponding to the general map determining process (step S3309).

<Public map confirmation process>
Next, the regular map confirmation process in step S3309 in the regular map and general electric power control process (FIG. 54) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 56.

By determining whether or not the value of the timer counter that measures the display duration of the current display duration is "0", the final display period of the current display duration (specifically, 0. 4 seconds) have elapsed (step S3501). If the confirmed display period has elapsed (step S3501: YES), it is determined whether the result of the open decision process in the current display continuation is an open winning result (step S3502). If it is not an open winning result (step S3502: NO), after clearing the value of the general map general electricity counter to "0" (step S3503), the present general public map confirmation process is ended. As a result, in the next general-purpose pattern/universal electric power control process (FIG. 54), the general-purpose pattern variation start process (step S3307) is to be executed.

If it is an open winning result (step S3502: YES), "20" is set in the general power release counter provided in the main side RAM 74 as information on the number of times the predetermined general power device 172 is opened and closed (step S3504). Further, "10" is set in the general power winning counter provided in the main side RAM 74 as information on the upper limit number of winnings to the predetermined general power device 172 in the current open execution state (step S3505). Further, information corresponding to 0.3 seconds is set in the timer counter as information on the open duration period of the predetermined general power device 172 (step S3506). In addition, since the firing cycle of the game ball is 0.6 seconds, the number of game balls that can be won in the predetermined general power device 172 in one opening of the predetermined general power device 172 is about one.

Furthermore, by starting to output a drive signal to the predetermined general power drive section 172b, the predetermined general power device 172 is brought into an open state (step S3507). Further, a general power start command indicating that the opening execution state of the predetermined general power device 172 has been started is transmitted to the audio/light side MPU 92 (step S3508). By receiving the general power supply start command, the sound and light side MPU 92 performs an effect that allows the player to recognize that the opening execution state of the predetermined general power supply device 172 has started. The process is started by the speaker unit 64.

Thereafter, add 1 to the general electricity counter. In this case, the value of the general purpose electricity counter when the general electricity supply map determination process is executed is "2", so after adding 1, it becomes "3" corresponding to the general electricity release process (step S3310). .

<Processing during power outage>
Next, the general electric power opening process in step S3310 in the general electric power control process (FIG. 54) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 57.

If a winning has occurred in the predetermined general electricity device 172 (step S3601: YES), a value corresponding to the number of winnings is subtracted from the value of the general electricity winning counter in the main side RAM 74 (step S3602). It should be noted that when the value of the general electricity award counter becomes "0", no further subtraction is performed. Further, a general electricity winning command in which information corresponding to the current number of winnings to the predetermined general electricity equipment 172 is set is transmitted to the audio/light side MPU 92 (step S3603). By receiving the general power winning command, the sound/light side MPU 92 grasps the current number of winnings to the predetermined general power device 172, and provides the corresponding effect to the symbol display device 51, display light emitting section 63, and speaker section 64. so that it is executed.

If the value of the general power winning counter after the subtraction is "0" (step S3604: YES), the predetermined general power device 172 is brought into a closed state by stopping the output of the drive signal to the predetermined general power driving unit 172b. (Step S3605). Thereafter, the value of the normal power release counter in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S3606). Further, the value of the general electric power counter is cleared to "0" (step S3607). As a result, in the next general-purpose pattern/universal electric power control process (FIG. 54), the general-purpose pattern variation start process (step S3307) is to be executed. Thereafter, a general electricity termination command is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 92 (step S3608). By receiving the general power end command, the sound and light side MPU 92 performs an effect that allows the player to recognize that the open execution state of the predetermined general power device 172 has ended. 64.

If a negative determination is made in step S3601 or if a negative determination is made in step S3604, by determining whether the value of the timer counter in the main side RAM 74 is "0", It is determined whether the opening continuation period in the opening cycle of the device 172 has elapsed (step S3609). If an affirmative determination is made in step S3609, the predetermined general power device 172 is brought into a closed state by stopping the output of the drive signal to the predetermined general power drive unit 172b (step S3610).

Thereafter, the value of the general power release counter in the main side RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 (step S3611), and it is determined whether the value of the general power release counter after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S3612). If an affirmative determination is made in step S3612, the value of the general power winning counter in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S3613). Further, the value of the general electric power counter is cleared to "0" (step S3614). As a result, in the next general-purpose pattern and general-purpose electric power control process (FIG. 54), the general-purpose pattern variation start process (step S3307) is to be executed. Thereafter, a general electricity termination command is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 92 (step S3615). When the sound/light side MPU 92 receives the general power end command, the symbol display device 51, the display light emitting unit 63, and the speaker perform an effect that allows the player to recognize that the open execution state of the predetermined general power device 172 has ended. 64.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S3612, information corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the timer counter of the main side RAM 74 as information on the closing duration period of the predetermined power supply device 172 (step S3616). The closing duration period of 2 seconds is longer than three times the firing cycle of the game ball. When the shooting operation of the game ball is continued so as to flow down the right side area PA3, after a winning occurs in the predetermined non-electrical device 172, the first non-electrical device 173 becomes an open state, and the first non-electrical device 173 When a winning occurs, the second non-electrical device 177 becomes an open state, and when a winning occurs on the second non-electrical device 177, the third non-electrical device 179 becomes an open state, and the third non-electrical device 179 becomes an open state. This period is slightly longer than the expected minimum period required until a winning occurs in the device 179. Therefore, in the opening execution state of the predetermined general power device 172, the first non-electric power device 172 is opened after one opening of the predetermined general power device 172 is completed and before the next opening of the predetermined general power device 172 is started. There are cases in which winnings are completed in the order of device 173 → second non-electric device 177 → third non-electric device 179, and cases in which they are not completed.

Thereafter, 1 is added to the value of the general electricity counter (step S3617). As a result, in the next general electric power control process (FIG. 54), the general electric power closed processing (step S3311) is to be executed. After that, a general electricity closing command is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 92 (step S3618). By receiving the general electric power closing command, the sound and optical side MPU 92 understands that the closing continuation period of the predetermined electric power device 172 has started, and the corresponding effect is displayed on the symbol display device 51, the display light emitting unit 63, and the speaker. 64.

<Processing during power outage>
Next, the general electric power closed processing in step S3311 in the general electric power electric utility control process (FIG. 54) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 58.

If a winning has occurred in the specified general electric power device 172 immediately before the specified general electric power device 172 is in the closed state, it is specified that a winning has occurred in the predetermined general electric power device 172 during the general electric power closing process. It will be done. Therefore, if a winning has occurred in the predetermined general electricity device 172 (step S3701: YES), a value corresponding to the number of winnings is subtracted from the value of the general electricity winning counter in the main side RAM 74 (step S3702). It should be noted that when the value of the general electricity award counter becomes "0", no further subtraction is performed. In addition, a general electricity winning command in which information corresponding to the current number of winnings to the predetermined general electricity equipment 172 is set is transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 92 (step S3703). By receiving the general power winning command, the sound/light side MPU 92 grasps the current number of winnings to the predetermined general power device 172, and provides the corresponding effect to the symbol display device 51, display light emitting section 63, and speaker section 64. so that it is executed.

If the value of the general electricity winning counter after the subtraction is "0" (step S3704: YES), the value of the general electricity release counter in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S3705). Further, the value of the general electric power counter is cleared to "0" (step S3706). As a result, in the next general-purpose pattern and general-purpose electric power control process (FIG. 54), the general-purpose pattern variation start process (step S3307) is to be executed. Thereafter, a general electricity termination command is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 92 (step S3707). When the sound/light side MPU 92 receives the general power end command, the symbol display device 51, the display light emitting unit 63, and the speaker perform an effect that allows the player to recognize that the open execution state of the predetermined general power device 172 has ended. 64.

If a negative determination is made in step S3701 or if a negative determination is made in step S3704, by determining whether the value of the timer counter in the main side RAM 74 is "0", It is determined whether the closing duration period in the closing cycle of the device 172 has elapsed (step S3708). When an affirmative determination is made in step S3708, information corresponding to 0.3 seconds is set in the timer counter of the main side RAM 74 as information on the open duration period of the predetermined power supply device 172 (step S3709). Then, by starting to output a drive signal to the predetermined general power drive section 172b, the predetermined general power device 172 is brought into an open state (step S3710).

Thereafter, the general electric power counter is subtracted by 1 (step S3711). In this case, the value of the general utility counter when the utility power is closed processing is executed is "4", so after subtracting 1, it becomes "3" corresponding to the utility power opening processing (step S3310). . Thereafter, a general power release command is transmitted to the audio-optical side MPU 92 (step S3712). By receiving the general power release command, the sound and light side MPU 92 understands that a new opening cycle of the predetermined general power device 172 has started, and the corresponding effects are performed on the symbol display device 51, display light emitting unit 63, and This is executed by the speaker unit 64.

<Public telegraph notification processing>
Next, the general telegraph notification process executed by the audio-optical side MPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 59. Note that the general telegraph notification process is repeatedly activated in the audio/light side MPU 92 at relatively short intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds).

If a general power transmission start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S3801: YES), a general power transmission start process is executed (step S3802). In the process of starting the general electricity notification, the symbol display device 51, the display light emitting unit 63, and the speaker unit 64 perform an effect that allows the player to recognize that the opening execution state of the predetermined general electricity device 172 is starting. Execute the process to make it happen.

In this case, the audio/light side MPU 92 transmits a general power start command to the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. By receiving the general power start command, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 determines the upper limit number of winnings to the predetermined general power device 172, which is a condition for ending the current open execution state, and ends the current open execution state. The symbol display device 51 displays an image that allows the player to recognize the upper limit of the number of openings of the predetermined general power device 172, which is the condition for opening the predetermined power supply device 172.

FIG. 60(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the image. As shown in FIG. 60(a), the symbol display device 51 includes an image G1 showing that the predetermined general power device 172 is in the opening execution state, and an image G2 showing the remaining number of prizes for the predetermined general power device 172. , and an image G3 showing the remaining number of openings of the predetermined general power device 172. As a result, the player not only recognizes that the predetermined general power device 172 is in the release execution state, but also the remaining number of prizes for the predetermined general power device 172 in the current release execution state and the number of the predetermined general power device 172. It becomes possible to clearly recognize the remaining number of openings. Note that when the opening execution state of the predetermined general power device 172 is started, the first opening of the predetermined general power device 172 is started, so the image G3 showing the remaining number of times the predetermined general power device 172 is opened is , an image corresponding to "19" instead of "20" is displayed. Note that in the opening execution state of the predetermined general power device 172, an opening effect may be performed over an opening period before the first opening of the predetermined general power device 172 is started. In this case, during the opening period, "20" is displayed as the image G3 indicating the remaining number of openings of the predetermined general power device 172, and when the first opening of the predetermined general power device 172 has started, the image G3 is "20". 19" may be displayed.

Returning to the description of the regular telecom notification process (FIG. 59), if the general telecom winning command is received from the main side MPU 72 (step S3803: YES), an update process for notification of the number of remaining winnings is executed (step S3804). In the update process, a value subtracted by a number corresponding to the number of winnings to the predetermined general power device 172 is displayed as an image G2 indicating the remaining number of winnings to the predetermined general power device 172.

When the utility power closing command has been received from the main side MPU 72 (step S3805: YES), processing to start notification of the closing period is executed (step S3806). In the closing period notification start process, the audio and optical side MPU 92 transmits a general electricity closing command to the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. Upon receiving the general power closing command, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 displays on the symbol display device 51 an image that allows the player to recognize the remaining closing period of the predetermined general power device 172 in the current closing cycle. let

FIG. 60(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the image. As shown in FIG. 60(b), the symbol display device 51 includes an image G1 showing that the predetermined general power device 172 is in the opening execution state, an image G2 showing the remaining number of winnings to the predetermined general power device 172, and Not only the image G3 showing the remaining number of openings of the predetermined power supply device 172 but also the image G4 showing the remaining closing duration of the current closing time are displayed. As the image G4 indicating the remaining closure period, a meter display is performed in which the length of the band display relative to the frame display becomes shorter as time passes, but the invention is not limited to this, and for example, a time countdown display is performed. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a time is counted up or a time count-up display is performed.

Returning to the explanation of the general telegraph notification process (FIG. 59), in the situation where the image G4 indicating the closure continuation period is displayed (step S3807: YES), it is determined whether it is time to update the image G4 indicating the closure continuation period. It is determined whether or not (step S3808). Specifically, the update timing is every 0.1 seconds. If it is the update timing (step S3808: YES), the closing period notification update process is executed (step S3809). In the update process, an update command is sent to the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. Upon receiving the update command, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 updates the display content of the image G4 indicating the remaining closed duration period on the symbol display device 51 to the display content corresponding to the elapse of 0.1 seconds. .

When the general power release command is received from the main side MPU 72 (step S3810: YES), update processing of the remaining number of release times notification is executed (step S3811). In the update process, the value subtracted by 1 is displayed as an image G3 indicating the remaining number of openings of the predetermined general power device 172. In addition, processing for terminating the closure period notification is executed (step S3812). As a result, the display of the image G4 indicating the remaining closed continuation period on the symbol display device 51 is ended.

If a general power line termination command has been received from the main side MPU 72 (step S3813: YES), a general electric power notification termination process is executed (step S3814). In the end processing of the general power telegraph notification, the symbol display device 51, the display light emitting section 63, and the speaker section 64 perform an effect that allows the player to recognize that the open execution state of the predetermined general power device 172 has ended. Execute processing to make it. In this case, the audio/light side MPU 92 transmits a general power end command to the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. Upon receiving the general power end command, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 ends the display of each of the images G1 to G3 corresponding to the opening execution state of the predetermined general power device 172, and returns to the normal gaming state. The display of the corresponding image is restarted on the symbol display device 51.

<Effects due to execution of general telegraph>
Next, an explanation will be given of the effect caused by executing the general telegram notification on the symbol display device 51 with reference to the time chart of FIG. 61. 61(a) shows a period in which the display continuation times are executed in the predetermined general power display section 182, FIG. 61(b) shows a period in which the predetermined general power device 172 is in an open state, and FIG. c) shows the timing when winning occurs in the predetermined non-electrical device 172, FIG. 61(d) shows the period when the first non-electrical device 173 is in the open state, and FIG. 61(f) shows the period when the second non-electrical device 177 is in the open state, and FIG. 61(g) shows the timing when winning to the electric device 173 occurs. 61(h) shows the period during which the third non-electrical device 179 is in an open state, and FIG. 61(i) shows the timing when a winning occurs in the third non-electrical device 179. shows.

When a prize is won in the predetermined through-winning portion 171, as shown in FIG. 61(a), the display is continued in the predetermined general figure display portion 182 from the timing of t1 to the timing of t2. This display continuation time corresponds to the occurrence of the opening execution state of the predetermined general power device 172, so after the display continuation time ends, the predetermined display continues from timing t2 to timing t4 as shown in FIG. 61(b). The general power device 172 is placed in an open state. By opening the predetermined power supply device 172, the player changes the firing operation that had been performed so far so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2 to a firing operation that causes the game ball to flow down the right area PA3. This makes it possible to win a prize in the predetermined common electricity device 172. Further, at the timing t2, the symbol display device 51 displays an image G1 showing that the predetermined general power device 172 is in the open execution state, an image G2 showing the remaining number of winnings to the predetermined general power device 172, and a predetermined general power device 172. The display of image G3 (see FIG. 60(a)) indicating the remaining number of openings starts.

At timing t3 in the middle of the situation where the predetermined general power device 172 is in the open state, a winning occurs in the predetermined general power device 172 as shown in FIG. 61(c). When a winning occurs in the predetermined non-electrical device 172, the first non-electrical device 173 becomes open as shown in FIG. 61(d) at the timing t3. Thereafter, at timing t4, the predetermined general power device 172 enters the closed state as shown in FIG. 61(b). In this case, the symbol display device 51 starts displaying an image G4 (see FIG. 60(b)) indicating the remaining closing duration period in the current closing round. This allows the player to grasp the remaining period until the predetermined general power device 172 is next opened.

After that, the occurrence of winning in the first non-electrical device 173 is delayed due to the ball clogging of the game balls in the upper tray 65a, and the first non-electrical winning device is finally displayed at timing t5 as shown in FIG. 61(e). A winning to the device 173 occurs. When a winning occurs in the first non-electrical device 173, at the timing t5, the first non-electrical device 173 changes from the open state to the closed state as shown in FIG. 61(d), and at the same time as shown in FIG. 61(f). As shown in FIG. 3, the second non-electrical device 177 changes from the closed state to the open state. On the other hand, since the ball jamming of the game balls in the upper tray 65a occurs again, the occurrence of winning in the second non-electric device 177 is delayed. Then, at timing t6 when the second non-electrical device 177 is still in the open state, the next opening cycle of the predetermined non-electrical device 172 is started as shown in FIG. 61(b).

Here, the release execution state of the predetermined general power device 172 is such that the number of prizes in the predetermined general power device 172, which is the end condition of the release execution state, is higher than the upper limit of the number of winnings to the predetermined general power device 172, which is the end condition of the release execution state. The upper limit number of times the device 172 can be opened is set to be a larger number. Therefore, in a situation where the remaining number of openings of the predetermined general power device 172 is greater than the remaining number of winnings to the predetermined general power device 172, the number of winnings to the predetermined general power device 172 is greater than the remaining number of winnings to the predetermined general power device 172. Even if a prize does not occur, it is possible to cause the predetermined normal electric device 172 to generate a prize of the upper limit number of game balls in the open execution state. In this case, in the opening execution state of the predetermined general power device 172, the symbol display device 51 displays an image G2 showing the remaining number of winnings to the predetermined general power device 172 and the remaining number of openings of the predetermined general power device 172. Since the image G3 is displayed, the player can grasp whether or not it is necessary to cause the predetermined general power device 172 to win a game ball in the predetermined open cycle of the predetermined general power device 172. Further, during the closed period of the predetermined general power device 172, an image G4 indicating the remaining closed period is displayed on the symbol display device 51. Therefore, the player can stop the firing of game balls toward the predetermined general power device 172 in advance before a new opening of the predetermined general power device 172 starts. This prevents game balls from entering the predetermined non-electrical device 172 during the cycle of winning game balls in the order of the first non-electrical device 173 → second non-electrical device 177 → third non-electrical device 179. It becomes possible to do so.

Specifically, in the case of FIG. 61, the predetermined power supply voltage is set as shown in FIG. Although the device 172 is in the open state, no winnings are made to the predetermined general power device 172 during the opening period. This makes it possible to prevent a game ball from entering the predetermined power supply device 172 during the cycle.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 61(g), a winning occurs in the second non-electric device 177 at timing t8. When a winning occurs in the second non-electrical device 177, at the timing t8, the second non-electrical device 177 enters the closed state as shown in FIG. 61(f), and as shown in FIG. 61(h). , the third non-electrical device 179 becomes open. Then, at timing t9, a winning occurs in the third non-electric device 179 as shown in FIG. 61(i). When a winning occurs in the third non-electrical device 179, the third non-electrical device 179 changes from the open state to the closed state at the timing t9, as shown in FIG. 53(h).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 61(b), a new opening cycle of the predetermined general power device 172 is performed from timing t10 to timing t12, and at timing t11, the predetermined general power device 172 is opened again as shown in FIG. 61(c). A winning to the electronic device 172 occurs. With this. One new cycle is started as shown after timing t12.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

The release execution state of the predetermined general power device 172 is such that the number of prizes of the predetermined general power device 172, which is the termination condition of the release execution state, is higher than the upper limit of the number of winnings to the predetermined general power device 172, which is the termination condition of the release execution state. The upper limit number of times of opening is higher. As a result, even if one or more game balls are not entered into the predetermined general power device 172 each time the predetermined general power device 172 is in the open state, the upper limit number of game balls can be reached in the open execution state of the predetermined general power device 172. It becomes possible to enter the game ball into the predetermined general purpose electric device 172. In this case, in the opening execution state of the predetermined general power device 172, the player pays attention to the number of times the predetermined general power device 172 is in the open state to determine whether or not the upper limit number of game balls enter the predetermined general power device 172. As a result, predictions can be made while making predictions, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Since the opening duration in one opening of the predetermined general power device 172 is set to 0.3 seconds, a game in which prizes can be won for the predetermined general power device 172 in one opening of the predetermined general power device 172. The number of balls is about one, and it is possible that no game ball enters the predetermined general power device 172 in one opening of the predetermined general power device 172. In this case, since the upper limit number of balls is larger than the upper limit number as described above, the player can transfer the upper limit number of game balls to the predetermined general power device 172 in the opening execution state of the predetermined general power device 172. It is possible to predict whether or not the ball will enter while paying attention to the number of times the predetermined power supply device 172 is in the open state, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the opening execution state of the predetermined general power device 172, an image G2 showing the remaining number of winnings to the predetermined general power device 172 and an image G3 showing the remaining number of openings of the predetermined general power device 172 are displayed on the symbol display device 51. Is displayed. Thereby, the player can grasp whether or not it is necessary to cause the predetermined general power device 172 to win a game ball in the predetermined open cycle of the predetermined general power device 172. By performing this understanding, game balls are placed in the predetermined non-electrical device 172 in the middle of the cycle of winning game balls in the order of the first non-electrical device 173 → the second non-electrical device 177 → the third non-electrical device 179. This makes it possible to prevent the ball from entering the ball.

During the closed period of the predetermined general power device 172 in the opening execution state of the predetermined general power device 172, an image G4 indicating the remaining closed continuation period is displayed on the symbol display device 51. Therefore, the player can stop the firing of game balls toward the predetermined general power device 172 in advance before a new opening of the predetermined general power device 172 starts.

<Another form of the twelfth embodiment>
(1) A plurality of types are used so that the relationship between the upper limit of the number of winning game balls to the predetermined power supply device 172 and the upper limit of the number of times the predetermined power supply device 172 is in the open state in the case of a jackpot state is different. It may also be configured such that a jackpot state is set. In this case, the upper limit number is greater than the upper limit number in any jackpot state, but the difference may be different depending on the type of jackpot state, and the upper limit number and upper limit number The difference may be the same, but the values of the upper limit number and the upper limit number of times may be different depending on the type of jackpot state. In addition, in the first jackpot state, the upper limit number of pieces is higher than the upper limit number, in the second jackpot state, the upper limit number and the upper limit number of times are the same, and in the third jackpot state, the upper limit number of pieces is higher than the upper limit number. It is also possible to have a configuration with less. This makes it possible to vary the player's advantage depending on the type of jackpot state.

(2) In the opening execution state of the predetermined general power device 172, a notification indicating the remaining number of winnings to the predetermined general power device 172, a notification indicating the remaining number of openings of the predetermined general power device 172, and a notification indicating the remaining number of openings of the predetermined general power device 172, 172 indicating the remaining closure continuation period are all performed by the symbol display device 51, but a structure may be adopted in which some of these notifications are performed by a device other than the symbol display device 51, and each A configuration may be adopted in which each notification is performed on a dedicated display section.

(3) At least one of the first non-electric device 173, the second non-electric device 177, and the third non-electric device 179 may be configured to be electrically driven to switch between the open state and the closed state. good. For example, in a configuration in which the first non-electrical device 173 is electrically driven, when one game ball enters the predetermined general electric device 172, the first non-electrical device 173 is in an open state and the first non-electrical device 173 is in an open state. When one game ball enters the non-electrical device 173, the first non-electrical device 173 is controlled to be in a closed state. Further, in a configuration in which the second non-electric device 177 is electrically driven, when one game ball enters the first non-electric device 173, the second non-electric device 177 is in an open state and the corresponding second non-electric device 177 is in an open state. When one game ball enters the second non-electric device 177, the second non-electric device 177 is controlled to be in a closed state. Further, in a configuration in which the third non-electric device 179 is electrically driven, when one game ball enters the second non-electric device 177, the third non-electric device 179 is in an open state and the third non-electric device 179 is in an open state. When one game ball enters the third non-electrical device 179, the third non-electrical device 179 is controlled to be in the closed state.

(4) The number of game balls that can be won in the predetermined general power device 172 in one open state of the predetermined general power device 172 is not limited to about one, but in one open state A configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of game balls can enter the predetermined general electric power device 172. Even with this configuration, the first non-electric device 173 becomes open when one game ball enters the predetermined general electric device 172, and the game ball enters the first non-electric device 173. Since the first non-electric device 173 is configured to be in a closed state, it is preferable that only one game ball is placed in the predetermined general electric device 172 in one open state of the predetermined general electric device 172. .

<Other embodiments>
Note that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in the embodiments described above, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, the following changes may be made. Incidentally, the configurations of the following alternative embodiments may be applied individually or in combination with the configurations of the above embodiments, and may be applied to embodiments different from the illustrated embodiments. Good too.

(1) The special winning device 35 has a configuration in which it is impossible to win in the non-accepting state and it is possible to win in the accepting state, but instead of this, the special winning device 35 has a low probability even in the non-accepting state. Although a winning game ball may occur in this case, it may be configured such that winning a game ball becomes more likely to occur by entering the acceptance state. In addition, the configuration is the first general power device 121, the second general power device 122, the third general power device 123, the fourth general power device 161, the predetermined general power device 172, the first non-power device 173, the second non-power device. It may be applied to the device 177 and the third non-electric device 179.

(2) If the first display duration period is set as the display duration period of the general figure display sections 39a, 134 corresponding to the special winning device 35, it is ensured that winnings to the special winning device 35 are not possible. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which a winning in the special winning device 35 can occur with a predetermined probability, although the probability is lower than in the case where the third display duration period is set.

(3) In the first to tenth embodiments described above, a plurality of types of first display continuation periods are set in the display continuation times of the general figure display sections 39a, 134, and in the situation where the first display continuation period is set, which A configuration may be adopted in which whether to set the first display duration period is determined by lottery. In this case, it is preferable to adopt a configuration in which no matter which first display duration period is set, it is impossible to win a prize in the special winning device 35 or it is difficult to win a prize.

(4) In the first to tenth embodiments described above, a plurality of types of third display duration periods are set in the display durations of the general figure display sections 39a and 134, and in the situation where the third display duration period is set, which one A configuration may be adopted in which whether to set the third display duration period is determined by lottery. In this case, it is preferable to adopt a configuration in which winnings to the special winning device 35 occur at a predetermined frequency no matter which third display duration period is set. Further, in this configuration, the frequency of winnings to the special winning device 35 may be different depending on the type of third display duration period selected.

(5) In the first to tenth embodiments described above, the special winning device 35 is not limited to a configuration in which there is only one type of opening execution state, and the special winning device 35 can be expected in one opening execution state. A configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of types of open execution states are set so that the number of prizes won to 35 is different.

(6) In the first to tenth embodiments described above, the game ball that won the through prize winning section 34 was configured to surely reach the position where it could be won in the special winning device 35, but instead of this, A game ball that has won a prize in the through winning section 34 may be configured to reach a position where it can win a prize in the special winning device 35 with approximately 100% probability. It may be configured such that a predetermined rate of winnings, such as 1 out of 10, does not reach a position where a prize can be won.

(7) In the first to tenth embodiments, the predetermined suspension information that triggers the start of continuous display times is suspended and stored, thereby creating an advantageous situation for the player regarding the frequency of winnings in the special winning device 35. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if a predetermined number or more of predetermined pending information that triggers the start of a display continuation is stored in a predetermined number, it is determined whether or not an advantageous profit will be generated for the player. A configuration may be adopted in which the winning probability of the lottery process is increased, and when predetermined pending information that triggers the start of continuous display times is held and stored, the game ball is paid out when the game ball enters a predetermined ball entry section. A configuration may be adopted in which the number of game balls is increased. In this case, the predetermined number may be one or two or more.

(8) In the sixth embodiment described above, in a situation where the display continuation times on the third general figure display section 133 are executed, the situation is advantageous for the player regarding the frequency of winnings in the special winning device 35. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the winning probability of the lottery process that determines whether or not an advantageous profit will be generated for the player increases when a predetermined number of display continuations is executed. A configuration may be adopted in which, when a predetermined number of display continuations are executed, the number of game balls that are paid out increases when a game ball enters a predetermined ball entry section.

(9) In the first embodiment, a plurality of through prize winning sections 34 may be provided instead of one, such as two, three, four, or five or more. In this case, these plural through winning parts 34 correspond to the opportunity winning means in the first embodiment. Further, in the fourth embodiment, a plurality of specific actuation units 124, such as two, three, four, or five or more, may be provided instead of one. In this case, these plurality of specific actuation units 124 correspond to the opportunity ball entering means in the fourth embodiment. Further, in the tenth embodiment, a plurality of first general electric power devices 121, such as two, three, four, or five or more, may be provided instead of one. In this case, these plurality of first general electric power devices 121 correspond to the opportunity ball entry means in the tenth embodiment.

(10) The configurations of the above embodiments may be mutually applied in any combination, and the configurations of the above embodiments may be mutually applied in any combination and then described in <Other embodiments>. Any combination of configurations may be applied.

(11) It is not possible for the player to replenish the pachinko machine 10 with game balls, and the game balls circulate within the pachinko machine 10, and information on the number of game balls available to the player is stored and retained. The configurations of each of the above embodiments may be applied to a configuration in which game balls can be fired within the range of the stored information on the number of usable game balls.

(12) Instead of the configuration in which the display control device 100 is controlled by the audio emission control device 90 based on the command sent from the main control device 70, the display control device 100 is controlled based on the command sent from the main control device 70. A configuration may be adopted in which the device 100 controls the audio emission control device 90. Further, instead of the configuration in which the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 are provided separately, a configuration in which both control devices are provided as one control device may be used, and the function of one of the two control devices may be may be integrated into the main control device 70, or both functions of these two control devices may be integrated into the main control device 70. Furthermore, the structure of the commands transmitted from the main control device 70 to the sound emission control device 90 and the structure of the commands sent from the sound emission control device 90 to the display control device 100 are also arbitrary.

(13) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as pachinko machines in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball that opens a game ball in a specific area of a special device. The present invention can also be applied to game machines such as a pachinko machine in which a jackpot is generated when a ball is entered, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arranged ball machine, and a mahjong ball machine.

In addition, non-pinball type game machines, for example, are equipped with multiple reels with multiple types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, and rotation of the reels is started by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. After the reels have stopped after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, if a specific symbol or a specific symbol combination is established on the active line that can be seen from the display window, the player is given benefits such as a payout of medals, etc. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

In addition, the game machine main body, which is supported by the outer frame in an openable and closable manner, is equipped with a storage section and a retrieval device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage section are retrieved by the retrieval device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, which starts the rotation of the reels by doing so.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from each of the embodiments described above will be explained, showing effects etc. as necessary. In addition, in the following, in order to facilitate understanding, structures corresponding to each of the above embodiments are indicated in parentheses, etc., as appropriate; however, the present invention is not limited to the specific structures shown in parentheses, etc. .

<Characteristics Group A>
Feature A1. A first state (acceptance state) in which a game ball can enter the predetermined ball entry section (discharge passage 42) or entry is likely to occur, and a first state (acceptance state) in which a game ball cannot enter the predetermined ball entry section (discharge passage 42). a predetermined ball entry means (special winning device 35) that is capable of switching to a second state (non-accepting state) in which the ball enters the ball or enters the ball in a second state (non-accepting state);
A predetermined control means (in the first embodiment, the process of step S907 in the main MPU 72 is executed function, in the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1409 in the main side MPU 72, and in the tenth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2406 in the main side MPU 72),
During the predetermined period, in a situation where the game ball is flowing down the game area in a predetermined manner, the game ball is placed in a position where the ball can enter the predetermined ball entry section in a situation where the predetermined ball entry means is in the first state. A first setting means (in the first embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S806 in the main MPU 72 , in the second embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1008 in the main side MPU 72, in the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1605 in the main side MPU 72, and in the sixth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1605 in the main side MPU 72 a function of executing the process of step S1705, a function of executing the process of step S2006 in the main side MPU 72 in the ninth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S2503 in the main side MPU 72 in the tenth embodiment),
As the predetermined period, in a situation where the game ball is flowing down the game area in the predetermined manner, a position where the ball can enter the predetermined ball entry section in a situation where the predetermined ball entry means is in the first state. A second setting means (in the first embodiment, the main MPU 72 executes the process of step S804) for setting a second period (first display duration period) in which the game ball is not allowed or difficult to reach In the second embodiment, the function to execute the process in step S1004 in the main MPU 72, in the fourth embodiment, the function to execute the process in step S1604 in the main MPU 72, in the sixth embodiment, the function to execute the process in step S1604 in the main MPU 72 (in the ninth embodiment, the main MPU 72 executes the process in step S2005; in the tenth embodiment, the main MPU 72 executes the process in step S2502);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature A1, since the predetermined ball entering means enters the first state when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after a predetermined trigger occurs, it is possible to predict in advance that the predetermined ball entering means will enter the first state. It becomes possible. In this case, if the first period is set as the predetermined period, it becomes possible for the game ball to enter the predetermined ball entry section or the entry of the ball becomes more likely to occur, whereas the predetermined period is If the second period is set, it becomes impossible for the game ball to enter the predetermined ball entry section, or it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the predetermined ball entry section. As a result, the player expects that the first period will be set as the predetermined period, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, by adjusting the predetermined period, it is possible to cause the above-mentioned situation, so the above-mentioned situation can be achieved without complicating the control for switching the predetermined ball entry means between the first state and the second state. It is possible to achieve such excellent effects.

Feature A2. The predetermined control means causes the predetermined ball entering means to be in the first state in the same manner whether the first period is set as the predetermined period or the second period is set as the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to feature A1.

According to feature A2, it is possible to simplify the control for switching the predetermined ball entering means between the first state and the second state, while achieving the excellent effects described above.

Feature A3. The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, wherein the second period is shorter than the first period.

According to feature A3, when the second period is set as the predetermined period, the game ball cannot enter the predetermined ball entry section, or in a configuration where the ball entry is difficult to occur, the second period is set relative to the predetermined period. By setting the period to a short period of time, it is possible to prevent a situation in which it is impossible for a game ball to enter the designated ball entry area or where it is difficult for the ball to enter the designated ball entry area to continue excessively. becomes.

Feature A4. According to any one of features A1 to A3, the first period is longer than the shortest supply cycle of game balls to the gaming area, and the second period is shorter than the shortest supply cycle. Game machine.

According to feature A4, in a situation where the first period is set as the predetermined period, it is possible to expect one or more game balls to be supplied to the position of the predetermined ball entry means, etc. It becomes possible to suppress wasteful consumption of game balls in a situation where the second period is set as the period.

Feature A5. comprising an opportunity ball entry means (through winning section 34) that allows a game ball flowing down the gaming area to enter;
The predetermined opportunity is configured such that the predetermined opportunity occurs based on the game ball entering the opportunity ball entry means,
The opportunity ball entry means is provided upstream of the predetermined ball entry means in the downstream direction of the game ball, and the game ball that has entered the opportunity ball entry means is located at a position where the ball can enter the predetermined ball entry section. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, characterized in that the gaming machine can reach the following.

According to feature A5, since the predetermined opportunity occurs based on the game ball entering the opportunity ball entry means, the occurrence of the predetermined opportunity becomes clear to the player. In this case, the opportunity ball entry means is provided upstream of the predetermined ball entry means, and is configured such that the game ball that enters the opportunity ball entry means can reach a position where the ball can enter the predetermined ball entry section. This makes it possible for one game ball to cause both the ball to enter the opportunity ball entry means and the ball to enter the predetermined ball entry section.

Feature A6. The gaming machine according to feature A5, wherein the game ball that enters the opportunity ball entry means reliably reaches a position where the ball can enter the predetermined ball entry section.

According to feature A6, since it becomes easier to specify the timing at which the game ball reaches a position where the ball can enter the predetermined ball entry section with respect to the timing at which the predetermined opportunity occurs, the timing at which the game ball reaches the predetermined ball entry section for the setting of the predetermined period This makes it easier to adjust the ease of ball entry.

Feature A7. Feature A5 characterized in that the second period is a period shorter than the minimum period required for a game ball that has entered the opportunity ball entry means to reach a position where the ball can enter the predetermined ball entry section. Or the gaming machine described in A6.

According to feature A7, when the second period is set as the predetermined period, a game ball that enters the opportunity ball entry means and generates a predetermined opportunity is prevented from entering the predetermined ball entry section. becomes possible.

Feature A8. In the second period, when the measurement of the second period is started with the entry of a predetermined game ball into the trigger ball entry means, the firing order for the predetermined game ball is one previous. The gaming machine according to feature A7, characterized in that the period is a period that elapses after the game ball passes through a position where the ball can enter the predetermined ball entry section.

According to feature A8, when the second period is set as the predetermined period, one game ball enters the opportunity ball entry means and generates a predetermined opportunity, and one game ball for the predetermined game ball. It is possible to prevent both of the game balls in the previous firing order from entering the predetermined ball entry section of the predetermined ball entry means that is in the first state in response to the occurrence of a predetermined trigger by the predetermined game ball. becomes. Thereby, when the second period is set as the predetermined period, it becomes possible to prevent the game ball from entering the predetermined ball entry section or to make it difficult for the game ball to enter the predetermined ball entry section.

Feature A9. When the predetermined period is set to the first period, the game ball is configured to enter the predetermined ball entry portion with a specific probability,
The specific probability is 1/X (X is an integer of 1 or more),
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A8, characterized in that when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry section, X game balls are given to the player.

According to feature A9, when the predetermined period is set to the first period, a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry section at a rate of one out of every X balls, whereas a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry section. If a ball lands, X game balls will be given to the player, so if the predetermined period is set to the first period, the number of game balls owned by the player will be increased or decreased. It becomes possible to aim the game ball to enter the predetermined ball entry part while preventing the game ball from entering the predetermined ball entry area.

Feature A10. comprising an opportunity ball entry means (through winning section 34) that allows a game ball flowing down the gaming area to enter;
The predetermined opportunity is configured such that the predetermined opportunity occurs based on the game ball entering the opportunity ball entry means,
This gaming machine is
When a game ball enters the opportunity ball entry means in a situation where measurement for the predetermined period cannot be started, an information acquisition means (in the main side MPU 72 function to execute the process of step S603);
Measuring means for starting the measurement for the predetermined period when the trigger information is acquired and it becomes possible to start the measurement for the predetermined period (execution of general pattern fluctuation start processing in the main MPU 72) function) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A9, characterized by comprising:

According to feature A10, since the predetermined opportunity occurs based on the game ball entering the opportunity ball entry means, the occurrence of the predetermined opportunity becomes clear to the player. In addition, if a game ball enters the trigger ball entry means in a situation where measurement for a predetermined period cannot be started, trigger information is acquired, and if trigger information has been acquired, Measurement starts anew. This makes it possible to provide many opportunities to perform measurements for a predetermined period of time.

Feature A11. The gaming machine according to feature A10, wherein the second period is a period in which acquisition of the trigger information is prohibited or difficult to acquire.

According to feature A11, when the second period is set as the predetermined period, trigger information is not acquired or is difficult to acquire. As a result, if the second period is set as the predetermined period, the measurement of the predetermined period will start at the timing when the game ball enters the trigger ball entry means, so the second period is set. In such a situation, it becomes possible to make it difficult for the game ball to enter the predetermined ball entry section.

Feature A12. The gaming machine according to feature A10 or A11, wherein the first period is a period in which acquisition of the trigger information is possible or a period in which acquisition is likely to occur.

According to feature A12, when the first period is set as the predetermined period, the trigger information is acquired or easily acquired. As a result, when the first period is set as the predetermined period, the measurement of the predetermined period is likely to be started at a timing different from the timing when the game ball enters the triggered ball entry means, so that the first period is set as the predetermined period. In the set situation, it becomes possible to cause the game ball to enter the predetermined ball entry area irregularly.

Feature A13. Feature A10 characterized in that the second setting means sets the second period as the predetermined period when measurement for the predetermined period is started in a situation where a predetermined number or more of the trigger information is not acquired. The gaming machine according to any one of A12 to A12.

According to feature A13, when measurement for a predetermined period is started in a situation where a predetermined number or more of trigger information is not acquired, the second period is set as the predetermined period. This makes it easier to design the predetermined ball entry means to be in the first state at a timing that makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the predetermined ball entry portion in a certain situation.

Feature A14. Feature A10 characterized in that the first setting means sets the first period as the predetermined period when measurement of the predetermined period is started in a situation where a predetermined number or more of the trigger information is acquired. The gaming machine according to any one of A13 to A13.

According to feature A14, when measurement for a predetermined period is started in a situation where a predetermined number or more of trigger information is acquired, the first period is set as the predetermined period, so the first period is set. Players who expect this will pay attention to whether or not a predetermined number or more of trigger information is acquired.

Feature A15. The gaming machine according to feature A14, wherein the first period is a period in which acquisition of the trigger information is possible or a period in which acquisition is likely to occur.

According to feature A15, when the first period is set as the predetermined period, the trigger information is acquired or is easily acquired. As a result, it is possible to maintain a situation in which the first period is set as the predetermined period when a predetermined number or more of trigger information is once acquired by continuously inputting game balls into the trigger ball input means. It becomes possible.

Feature A16. The gaming machine according to feature A14 or A15, wherein the predetermined number is a plurality of numbers.

According to feature A16, since the first period is set as the predetermined period in a situation where multiple pieces of trigger information are acquired, trigger information may be accidentally acquired in a situation where the second period is set as the predetermined period. However, the first period is not set as the predetermined period after that. This makes it possible to make it difficult for a situation in which the first period is set as the predetermined period to occur.

Feature A17. The first setting means sets the first period as the predetermined period when measurement for the predetermined period is started in a situation where a predetermined number or more of the trigger information is acquired;
The second setting means sets the second period as the predetermined period when measurement for the predetermined period is started in a situation where a predetermined number or more of the trigger information is not acquired;
This gaming machine includes a third setting means (main side MPU 72 The gaming machine according to any one of features A10 to A16, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the process of step S805 in .

According to feature A17, when measurement for a predetermined period is started in a situation where a predetermined number or more of trigger information is acquired, the first period is set as the predetermined period. Players who expect this will pay attention to whether or not a predetermined number or more of trigger information is acquired. In addition, when measurement for a predetermined period is started in a situation where a predetermined number or more of trigger information has not been acquired, the second period is set as the predetermined period. It becomes easier to design a predetermined ball entry means to be in the first state at a timing that makes it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the ball entry part.

In this case, even in a situation where a predetermined number or more of trigger information is not acquired, the first period or a period in which trigger information can be acquired may be set as the predetermined period. As a result, even if the second period is set as the predetermined period, it is possible to create a situation in which the first period is subsequently set as the predetermined period. Further, it is possible to realize the trigger for switching the predetermined period by setting the predetermined period.

Feature A18. The gaming machine according to feature A17, wherein the predetermined period set by the third setting means is a period that allows acquisition of a larger number of trigger information than the predetermined number.

According to feature A18, when a predetermined period is set by the third setting means, it is possible to obtain trigger information in a number exceeding a predetermined number. Thereby, when the predetermined period is set by the third setting means, it is possible to continue the situation in which the first period is subsequently set as the predetermined period for a long time.

Feature A19. The first setting means is configured to operate under a predetermined situation (in the first embodiment, a situation in which a reference number or more of the general map side pending information is stored on hold, and in the fourth embodiment, one or more pieces of third general computer side pending information is stored on hold). The stored situation, in the sixth embodiment, is a situation where one or more pieces of the third general purpose figure side pending information is held pending storage, or a situation where the display continuation time is being executed in the third general purpose figure display section 133, the ninth In the embodiment, the situation is such that one or more pieces of 3rd general map side pending information is held and stored, or the situation where one or more pieces of 4th general plan side pending information is held and stored, and in the 10th embodiment, the second general drawing side pending information is held and stored. setting the first period as the predetermined period when measurement of the predetermined period is started in a situation where one or more pieces of side hold information are held and stored;
According to any one of features A1 to A18, the second setting means sets the second period as the predetermined period when measurement of the predetermined period is started in a situation other than the predetermined situation. The game machine described.

According to feature A19, the first period is selected as the predetermined period due to a predetermined situation, and the game ball can enter the predetermined ball entry section or the ball entry becomes more likely to occur. As a result, the player plays the game while expecting a predetermined situation.

Feature A20. Equipped with a specific ball entry means (specific operating unit 124 in the fourth embodiment, first general electric device 121 in the tenth embodiment) that allows a game ball flowing down the gaming area to enter,
The gaming machine according to feature A19, wherein the predetermined situation occurs based on a game ball entering the specific ball entering means.

According to feature A20, since the predetermined situation occurs based on the game ball entering the specified ball entering means, a player who expects the first period to be selected as the predetermined period may place the game ball into the specific ball entering means. The player pays attention to whether or not the ball hits the ball, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Feature A21. The gaming machine according to feature A20, wherein the predetermined opportunity does not occur even if a game ball enters the specific ball entry means.

According to feature A21, since the player plays the game while expecting both the occurrence of a predetermined opportunity and the game ball entering the specific ball entry means, the target of the player's attention is It is possible to diversify the game and improve the interest of the game.

Feature A22. A configuration in which a specific period of time is measured based on the game ball entering the specific ball entering means,
The gaming machine according to feature A21, wherein the predetermined situation is a situation in which the measurement of the specific period is being performed or a situation that occurs in a situation in which the measurement of the specific period is being performed.

According to feature A22, a predetermined situation occurs when a specific period of time is measured based on a game ball entering the specific ball entry means, and in the predetermined situation, the first period is the predetermined period. By being set, it becomes possible for the game ball to enter the predetermined ball entry section, or the entry of the game ball becomes more likely to occur. In this case, the longer the specific period continues, the longer the period during which it is possible for the game ball to enter the predetermined ball entry section or the ball entry is likely to occur becomes more likely to continue. Therefore, it is possible to draw the attention of players during a specific period, and a situation is created in which a situation where it is possible for a game ball to enter a predetermined ball entry area or where such entry is likely to occur continues for a long time. becomes possible.

Feature A23. The gaming machine according to any one of features A19 to A22, wherein the predetermined situation occurs when a special gaming state (jackpot state) that is advantageous to the player occurs.

According to feature A23, when a special game state advantageous to the player occurs, not only that, but also a first period is set as the predetermined period, so that the game ball can enter the predetermined ball entry section. or the ball entering the field becomes more likely to occur. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of the special gaming state occurring.

Feature A24. Equipped with a specific ball entry means (first general electric device 121 in the tenth embodiment) that allows the entry of game balls when the special gaming state is entered,
The predetermined ball entering means is provided at a position where the ball can enter when the game ball is supplied to the gaming area so that the game ball flows down toward the specific ball entering means. The gaming machine according to feature A23.

According to feature A24, when the special game state is entered, not only is it possible to enter the game ball into the specific ball entry means, but also it is possible to enter the game ball into the predetermined ball entry section. Such incoming balls are more likely to occur. Furthermore, in the special game state, by supplying game balls to the game area in a predetermined manner, it is possible to control both the entry of game balls into the specific ball entry means and the entry of game balls into the predetermined ball entry means. It is possible to aim. Therefore, it is possible to increase the advantage of the special gaming state occurring while suppressing the complexity of gaming operations in the special gaming state.

Feature A25. The situation in which the first period is set by the first setting means as the predetermined period can be terminated when a transition to a special gaming state (jackpot state) advantageous to the player occurs. The gaming machine according to any one of A1 to A24.

According to feature A25, the situation in which the first period is set as the predetermined period can end upon transition to the special gaming state, so the situation in which the first period is set as the predetermined period continues excessively. It is possible to prevent this from occurring.

Note that for the configuration of features A1 to A25, any one of features A1 to A25, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F12, and features G1 to G6 One or more configurations may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristics Group B>
Feature B1. A trigger ball entry means (through prize part 34 in the first embodiment, specific actuating part 124 in the fourth embodiment, first general electricity device in the tenth embodiment) that allows a game ball flowing down the gaming area to enter. 121) and
Based on the fact that a game ball enters the opportunity ball entry means, trigger information (in the first embodiment, the general game side reservation information, in the fourth embodiment, the third general game side reservation information, in the tenth embodiment In this case, the information acquisition means (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S603 in the main side MPU 72, and in the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1303 in the main side MPU 72) a function to execute, in the tenth embodiment, a function to execute the process of step S2203 in the main MPU 72),
At least one condition is that the trigger information is acquired, and the player is given a predetermined profit (in the first embodiment, the special winning device 35 is in the acceptance execution state, and in the fourth embodiment, the third general power device 123 is in the opening state). state, in the tenth embodiment, the opening execution state of the second general power device 122) (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S610 in the main side MPU 72, the fourth embodiment) In the embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S1310 in the main side MPU 72, and a function of executing the process of step S2213 in the main side MPU 72 in the tenth embodiment),
A measurement means that performs measurement for a predetermined period based on the acquisition of the trigger information (in the first embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S607 to S609 in the main MPU 72, in the fourth embodiment, a measurement means on the main side) A function of executing the processing of steps S1307 to S1309 in the MPU 72, a function of executing the processing of steps S2210 to S2212 in the main MPU 72 in the tenth embodiment),
Information storage for storing the trigger information acquired by the information acquiring means when a game ball enters the trigger ball entering means in a situation where at least the measuring means measures the predetermined period of time. Means (in the first embodiment, the common picture holding area 116, in the fourth embodiment, the third common picture holding area 143, in the tenth embodiment, the second common picture holding area 142),
Equipped with
The measuring means starts measuring the predetermined period when the situation where the trigger information is acquired makes it possible to start measuring the predetermined period;
The present gaming machine enables a specific profit (winning in the special winning device 35) to be awarded to the player in a situation where a predetermined number or more of the trigger information is stored in the information storage means, or a predetermined number or more. In a situation where the above-mentioned trigger information of Specific profit granting means (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S806 in the main side MPU 72, in the second embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1008 in the main side MPU 72, In the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1605 in the main side MPU 72, in the sixth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1705 in the main side MPU 72, and in the ninth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2006 in the main side MPU 72. A gaming machine characterized by having a function of executing a process (in the tenth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S2503 in the main MPU 72).

According to feature B1, trigger information is acquired based on the game ball entering the trigger ball entry means, and a predetermined profit is granted to the player with at least one condition that the trigger information is acquired. Therefore, the player expects the game ball to enter the opportunity ball entry means. In this case, in a situation where a predetermined number or more of trigger information is stored in the information storage means, a specific profit can be awarded or is likely to be awarded. As a result, not only a predetermined profit but also a specific profit can be given based on letting the game ball enter the opportunity ball entry means, so the advantage of letting the game ball enter the opportunity ball entry means It becomes possible to increase the Therefore, the player pays attention to whether or not the game ball enters the opportunity ball entry means, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature B2. A situation in which a predetermined number or more of the trigger information is stored in the information storage means is better than a situation in which a predetermined number or more of the trigger information is not stored in the information storage means. The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the trigger information is easily stored.

According to feature B2, in a situation where a predetermined number or more of trigger information is stored in the information storage means, not only can a specific profit be granted or is more likely to be granted, but also the trigger information is more likely to be stored in the information storage means. . As a result, once a predetermined number or more of trigger information is stored in the information storage means, the situation becomes easier to continue, thereby increasing the advantage of storing a predetermined number or more of trigger information in the information storage means. becomes possible.

Feature B3. The predetermined period is longer in a situation where the predetermined number or more of the trigger information is stored in the information storage means than in a situation where the predetermined number or more of the trigger information is not stored in the information storage means. The gaming machine according to feature B1 or B2, characterized in that the game machine is configured to be selected or to be selected easily.

According to feature B3, in a situation where a predetermined number or more of trigger information is stored in the information storage means, a long period is selected or is likely to be selected as the predetermined period, so that the predetermined number or more of trigger information is stored in the information storage. In a situation where the information is stored in the means, it is not only possible or more likely that a specific profit will be given, but also that the trigger information will be more likely to be stored in the information storage means. As a result, once a predetermined number or more of trigger information is stored in the information storage means, the situation becomes easier to continue, thereby increasing the advantage of storing a predetermined number or more of trigger information in the information storage means. becomes possible.

Feature B4. In a situation where a predetermined number or more of the trigger information is stored in the information storage means, the trigger entering means is used as the predetermined period before a situation where it becomes possible to perform a new measurement for the predetermined period. It is a configuration set in the first period that allows the game ball to enter the ball or makes it easier for the ball to enter the ball,
This gaming machine is
In a situation where the predetermined number or more of the trigger information is not stored in the information storage means, the trigger entering means is used as the predetermined period before the situation becomes such that a new measurement for the predetermined period can be performed. a second setting means (a function of executing the process of step S804 in the main MPU 72) for setting a second period for disabling the entry of a game ball into the game ball or making it difficult for the ball to enter the game ball;
In a situation where the predetermined number or more of the trigger information is not acquired, a third setting means (step S805 in the main MPU 72) sets the first period or a period during which the trigger information can be acquired as the predetermined period. function) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, characterized by comprising:

According to feature B4, in a situation where a predetermined number or more of trigger information is stored in the information storage means, the first period is set as the predetermined period, and in a situation where a predetermined number or more of trigger information is not stored in the information storage means. By setting the second period as the predetermined period, in a situation where a predetermined number or more of trigger information is stored in the information storage means, not only can a specific profit be granted or is easily granted, but also the information storage Trigger information is more likely to be stored in the means. As a result, once a predetermined number or more of trigger information is stored in the information storage means, the situation becomes easier to continue, thereby increasing the advantage of storing a predetermined number or more of trigger information in the information storage means. becomes possible. In this case, even in a situation where a predetermined number or more of trigger information is not acquired, the first period or a period in which trigger information can be acquired may be set as the predetermined period. As a result, even if the second period is set as the predetermined period, it is possible to create a situation in which the first period is subsequently set as the predetermined period. Further, it is possible to realize the trigger for switching the predetermined period by setting the predetermined period.

Feature B5. The gaming machine according to feature B4, wherein the predetermined period set by the third setting means is a period that allows acquisition of a larger number of trigger information than the predetermined number.

According to feature B5, when the predetermined period is set by the third setting means, it is possible to store trigger information exceeding the predetermined number in the information storage means. Thereby, when the predetermined period is set by the third setting means, it is possible to continue the situation in which the first period is subsequently set as the predetermined period for a long time.

Feature B6. The specific profit granting means creates a situation in which it is possible to enter a game ball into a predetermined ball entry means (special prize winning device 35) as the provision of the specific profit,
This gaming machine has means (in the first embodiment, means for shifting the gaming state to a special gaming state advantageous to the player based on at least one condition that a game ball has entered the predetermined ball entering means) (in the first embodiment, the main side MPU 72 Any one of features B1 to B5 characterized by having a function of executing the processes from step S308 to step S311 (in the fourth embodiment, a function of executing the processes of step S1114 and step S1115 in the main MPU 72) 1. The gaming machine described in 1.

According to feature B6, by storing a predetermined number or more of trigger information in the information storage means, the game ball can enter the predetermined ball entry means, and the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means. Shifts to special gaming state based on . As a result, a player who expects to transition to a special gaming state expects that a predetermined number or more of trigger information will be stored in the information storage means, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature B7. A separate ball entry means (first actuating unit 32) is provided that allows the entry of game balls regardless of whether or not the predetermined number or more of the trigger information is stored in the information storage means;
Means for shifting the gaming state to the special gaming state using at least one condition that a game ball enters the separate ball entering means (in the first embodiment, executing the processing of steps S308 to S311 in the main side MPU 72 The gaming machine according to feature B6, characterized in that the gaming machine has a function of executing the processing of step S1114 and step S1115 in the main MPU 72 in the fourth embodiment.

According to feature B7, the transition to the special game state can occur even when a game ball enters the separate ball entry means, but if a predetermined number or more of trigger information is stored in the information storage means, A shift to a special game state may occur based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means. As a result, players who expect to transition to the special gaming state not only expect the game ball to enter the separate ball entry means, but also expect the game ball to enter the opportunity ball entry means, and the game It becomes possible to improve the interest of

Feature B8. The opportunity ball entry means, the predetermined ball entry means, and the separate ball entry means are provided at positions that can be reached when game balls are supplied to the gaming area in a predetermined manner. The gaming machine described in feature B7.

According to feature B8, by supplying game balls to the gaming area in a predetermined manner, it is possible to aim for game balls to enter each of the triggered ball entry means, the predetermined ball entry means, and the separate ball entry means. becomes possible. This makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while suppressing the complexity of game operations.

Feature B9. In the special game state, the game ball is supplied to the game area in a specific manner so that a profit can be given to the player,
The game machine according to any one of features B6 to B8, characterized in that when game balls are supplied in the specific manner, the game ball does not enter the opportunity ball entry means or hardly occurs. .

According to feature B9, based on the transition to the special gaming state, the game ball does not enter the opportunity ball entry means, and because the game ball does not enter the opportunity ball entry means. A situation arises in which a predetermined number or more of trigger information is not stored in the information storage means. Therefore, the transition to the special game state can be used as an opportunity to end the situation in which the game ball can enter the predetermined ball entry means.

Feature B10. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B9, characterized in that a game ball can be entered into the opportunity ball entry means when a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player occurs.

According to feature B10, in the special game state, it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the opportunity ball entry means, resulting in a situation where a predetermined number or more of the trigger information is stored in the information storage means, and the predetermined number or more of the trigger information is stored in the information storage means. By storing the information in the information storage means, a specific profit can be provided or a specific profit can be easily provided. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of transitioning to the special gaming state.

Note that for the configuration of features B1 to B10, any one of features A1 to A25, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F12, and features G1 to G6 One or more configurations may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. An opportunity ball entry means (specific operating unit 124) that allows a game ball flowing down the gaming area to enter;
Information acquisition means (executes the process of step S1303 in the main side MPU 72) that acquires trigger information (third general game side reservation information in the fourth embodiment) based on the game ball entering the trigger ball entry means. function) and
A predetermined profit granting means (a step in the main MPU 72) for granting a predetermined profit to the player (the opening execution state of the third power supply device 123 in the fourth embodiment) with at least one condition that the trigger information is acquired. function to execute the process of S1310);
a measuring means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1307 to S1309 in the main MPU 72) that measures a predetermined period of time based on the acquisition of the trigger information;
A specific profit (winning in the special winning device 35) can be awarded to a player in a situation where the predetermined period is measured, or when the predetermined period is measured in a situation where the predetermined period is measured. A specific profit giving means (in the fourth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S1605 in the main MPU 72, a sixth A gaming machine characterized by having a function of executing the process of step S1705 in the main side MPU 72 in the embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S2006 in the main side MPU 72 in the ninth embodiment.

According to feature C1, trigger information is acquired based on the game ball entering the trigger ball entry means, and a predetermined profit is granted to the player with at least one condition that the trigger information is acquired. Therefore, the player expects the game ball to enter the opportunity ball entry means. In this case, in a situation where a predetermined period of time is measured, a specific profit can be granted or is likely to be granted. As a result, not only a predetermined profit but also a specific profit can be given based on letting the game ball enter the opportunity ball entry means, so the advantage of letting the game ball enter the opportunity ball entry means It becomes possible to increase the Therefore, the player pays attention to whether or not the game ball enters the opportunity ball entry means, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature C2. The specific profit granting means creates a situation in which it is possible to enter a game ball into a predetermined ball entry means (special prize winning device 35) as the provision of the specific profit,
This gaming machine has means (in the first embodiment, means for shifting the gaming state to a special gaming state advantageous to the player based on at least one condition that a game ball has entered the predetermined ball entering means) (in the first embodiment, the main side MPU 72 The gaming machine according to feature C1, characterized in that it is equipped with a function of executing the processes of steps S308 to S311, and in the fourth embodiment, a function of executing the processes of steps S1114 and S1115 in the main MPU 72. .

According to feature C2, when a predetermined period of time is measured, it becomes possible for a game ball to enter the predetermined ball entry means, and a special game is executed based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means. transition to state. As a result, a player who expects a transition to a special gaming state will expect that a predetermined period of time will be measured, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature C3. A separate ball entry means (first actuating unit 32) is provided that allows the entry of game balls regardless of whether or not the predetermined period is measured;
Means for shifting the gaming state to the special gaming state using at least one condition that a game ball enters the separate ball entering means (in the first embodiment, executing the processing of steps S308 to S311 in the main side MPU 72 The gaming machine according to feature C2, characterized in that the gaming machine has a function of executing the processing of step S1114 and step S1115 in the main MPU 72 in the fourth embodiment.

According to feature C3, a shift to the special game state can occur even when a game ball enters the separate ball entry means, but in a situation where a predetermined period of time is measured, the game further enters the predetermined ball entry means. A shift to a special gaming state may occur based on the ball entering the ball. As a result, players who expect to transition to the special gaming state not only expect the game ball to enter the separate ball entry means, but also expect the game ball to enter the opportunity ball entry means, and the game It becomes possible to improve the interest of

Feature C4. The opportunity ball entry means, the predetermined ball entry means, and the separate ball entry means are provided at positions that can be reached when game balls are supplied to the gaming area in a predetermined manner. The gaming machine described in feature C3.

According to feature C4, by supplying game balls to the gaming area in a predetermined manner, it is possible to aim for game balls to enter each of the opportunity ball entry means, the predetermined ball entry means, and the separate ball entry means. becomes possible. This makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while suppressing the complexity of game operations.

Feature C5. In the special game state, the game ball is supplied to the game area in a specific manner so that a profit can be given to the player,
The game machine according to any one of features C2 to C4, characterized in that when game balls are supplied in the specific manner, the game ball does not enter the opportunity ball entry means or hardly occurs. .

According to feature C5, based on the transition to the special gaming state, the game ball does not enter the opportunity ball entry means, and the game ball does not enter the opportunity ball entry means. This results in a situation where the predetermined period is not measured. Therefore, the transition to the special game state can be used as an opportunity to end the situation in which the game ball can enter the predetermined ball entry means.

Feature C6. The gaming machine according to any one of features C2 to C4, wherein the measuring means continues measuring the predetermined period even in the special gaming state.

According to feature C6, measurement for a predetermined period is completed in a situation where a special gaming state is being executed. This makes it possible to terminate the situation in which a game ball can enter the predetermined ball entry means using the transition to the special gaming state as an opportunity.

Feature C7. The gaming machine according to feature C6, wherein the predetermined period is shorter than the minimum period required to complete the special gaming state.

According to feature C7, when a shift to a special gaming state occurs, it is possible to ensure that the measurement for the predetermined period is completed before the special gaming state ends.

Note that for the configuration of features C1 to C7, any one of features A1 to A25, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F12, and features G1 to G6 One or more configurations may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. A specific ball entry means (first general electric device 121 in the tenth embodiment) into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Specific control means (main side MPU 72) that allows a game ball to enter the specified ball entry means or makes it easier to enter the ball when a special game state (jackpot state) that is advantageous to the player occurs. function of executing the processing of step S2114 and step S2115);
a predetermined ball entry means (special winning device 35) that allows or facilitates the entry of game balls flowing down the gaming area in the special gaming state;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature D1, when the special game state is entered, not only can the game ball enter the specific ball entering means or it becomes easier to enter the ball, but also the game ball can enter the predetermined ball entering means. It becomes easier to hit the ball. This makes it possible to increase the degree of advantage in the special gaming state, and it becomes possible to increase the player's attention to the special gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature D2. Based on the game ball entering the specific ball entering means, a special ball entering means (second in the tenth embodiment) that enables or facilitates the entry of a game ball flowing down the gaming area. A general electric power device 122) is provided,
The gaming machine according to feature D1, characterized in that based on the game ball entering the specific ball entering means, the game ball can enter the predetermined ball entering means or becomes easier to enter the predetermined ball entering means.

According to feature D2, when the special game state is entered, the game ball can enter the specific ball entry means or becomes easier to enter the ball. When the game ball enters the specific ball entry means, the game ball can enter the special ball entry means and the predetermined ball entry means or becomes easier to enter the ball. This not only makes it possible to increase the advantage in the special game state, but also makes it possible to diversify the means of ball entry that can be made or easier to enter in the special game state.

Feature D3. By supplying the game ball to the game area in a specific manner, the game ball can reach a position where the ball can enter the specific ball entry means,
The predetermined ball entering means is provided on the downstream side of the specific ball entering means in the flowing direction of the game ball,
When game balls are supplied to the gaming area in the specific manner, game balls that have not entered the specific ball entry means can reach a position where they can enter the predetermined ball entry means. The gaming machine according to feature D1 or D2.

According to feature D3, game balls that have not entered the specific ball entry means in the special game state can enter the predetermined ball entry means. This makes it possible to suppress the number of game balls wasted in the special game state.

Feature D4. an opportunity ball entry means (through prize part 34) that allows a game ball flowing down the gaming area to enter;
Even if a game ball enters the opportunity ball entry means in a situation where the game ball is not in the special game state, it is prohibited or difficult to enter the game ball into the prescribed ball entry means, and the situation is in the special game state. A predetermined control means (step S2501 in the main MPU 72 to function to execute the process of step S2503);
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, characterized by comprising:

According to feature D4, based on the game ball entering the opportunity ball entry means, it becomes possible or easier for the game ball to enter the predetermined ball entry means, so the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means. It becomes possible to make the process of letting the ball enter the ball in stages. In this case, in a situation that is not a special game state, even if the game ball enters the trigger ball entry means, it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the prescribed ball entry means, and the situation is a special game state. When the game ball enters the trigger ball entry means in the game, it becomes possible or more likely that the game ball will enter the predetermined ball entry means. This makes it possible to generate a situation in which a game ball can enter or easily enters the predetermined ball entry means, limited to the special game state.

Feature D5. The predetermined ball entry means has a first state (acceptance state) in which the game ball can enter the predetermined ball entry portion (ejection passage 42) or entry of the ball is likely to occur, and a game ball entry state into the predetermined ball entry portion (ejection passage 42). It is provided so that it can be switched to a second state (non-accepting state) in which it is impossible for a ball to enter the ball or it is difficult for the ball to enter the ball,
This gaming machine includes a measuring means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2404 to S2406 in the main MPU 72) that measures a predetermined period of time based on the game ball entering the opportunity ball entering means,
The predetermined control means sets the predetermined ball entering means to the first state after the measuring means completes measurement for the predetermined period,
This gaming machine is
In the case of the special game state, the predetermined ball entering means is in the first state and the game ball is flowing down the game area in a predetermined manner for the predetermined period. A first setting means (in the tenth embodiment, the main side a function of executing the process of step S2503 in the MPU 72);
When the special game state is not, the game ball is flowing down the game area in the predetermined manner for the predetermined period, and the predetermined entry means is in the first state. A second setting means (in the tenth embodiment, the main setting means) sets a second period (first display duration period) for making it impossible or difficult for the game ball to reach a position where the ball can enter the ball means. a function of executing the process of step S2502 in the side MPU 72);
The gaming machine according to feature D4, comprising:

According to feature D5, the predetermined ball entering means enters the first state when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the game ball entered the trigger ball entering means, so that the predetermined ball entering means becomes the first state. It becomes possible to predict in advance. In this case, if the first period is set as the predetermined period, it becomes possible for the game ball to enter the predetermined ball entry section or the entry of the ball becomes more likely to occur, whereas the predetermined period is If the second period is set, it becomes impossible for the game ball to enter the predetermined ball entry section, or it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the predetermined ball entry section. This makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects already described simply by adjusting the predetermined period.

Feature D6. The predetermined control means causes the predetermined ball entering means to be in the first state in the same manner whether the first period is set as the predetermined period or the second period is set as the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to feature D5.

According to feature D6, it is possible to simplify the control for switching the predetermined ball entering means between the first state and the second state, while achieving the excellent effects described above.

Feature D7. The gaming machine according to feature D5 or D6, wherein the second period is shorter than the first period.

According to feature D7, when the second period is set as the predetermined period, the game ball is not allowed to enter the predetermined ball entry section, or in a configuration where the ball entry is difficult to occur, the second period is relatively By setting the period to a short period of time, it is possible to prevent a situation in which it is impossible for a game ball to enter the designated ball entry area or where it is difficult for the ball to enter the designated ball entry area to continue excessively. becomes.

Feature D8. According to any one of features D5 to D7, the first period is longer than the shortest supply cycle of game balls to the gaming area, and the second period is shorter than the shortest supply cycle. Game machine.

According to feature D8, in a situation where the first period is set as the predetermined period, it is possible to expect one or more game balls to be supplied to the position of the predetermined ball entry means, etc. It becomes possible to suppress wasteful consumption of game balls in a situation where the second period is set as the period.

Feature D9. The opportunity ball entry means is provided upstream of the predetermined ball entry means in the downstream direction of the game ball, and the game ball that has entered the opportunity ball entry means is located at a position where the ball can enter the predetermined ball entry section. It is a configuration that can reach
Feature D5 characterized in that the second period is a period shorter than the minimum period required for the game ball that has entered the opportunity ball entry means to reach a position where the ball can enter the predetermined ball entry section. The gaming machine according to any one of D8 to D8.

According to feature D9, the opportunity ball entry means is provided upstream of the predetermined ball entry means, and the game ball that has entered the opportunity ball entry means can reach a position where the ball can enter the predetermined ball entry section. With this configuration, it is possible to cause both the ball entering the opportunity ball entering means and the ball entering the predetermined ball entering portion with one game ball. In this case, the second period is shorter than the minimum period required for the game ball that has entered the trigger ball entry means to reach a position where the ball can enter the predetermined ball entry section. As a result, when the second period is set as the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the game ball that entered the triggered ball entry means and started measurement for the predetermined period from entering the predetermined ball entry section. It becomes possible.

Feature D10. In the second period, when the measurement of the second period is started with the entry of a predetermined game ball into the trigger ball entry means, the firing order for the predetermined game ball is one previous. The gaming machine according to feature D9, characterized in that the period is a period that elapses after the game ball passes through a position where the ball can enter the predetermined ball entry section.

According to feature D10, when the second period is set as the predetermined period, one game ball enters the opportunity ball entry means and generates a predetermined opportunity, and one game ball for the predetermined game ball. It is possible to prevent both of the game balls in the previous firing order from entering the predetermined ball entry section of the predetermined ball entry means that is in the first state in response to the occurrence of a predetermined trigger by the predetermined game ball. becomes. Thereby, when the second period is set as the predetermined period, it becomes possible to prevent the game ball from entering the predetermined ball entry section or to make it difficult for the game ball to enter the predetermined ball entry section.

Note that for the configuration of features D1 to D10, any one of features A1 to A25, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F12, and features G1 to G6 One or more configurations may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1. a first ball entry means (first general electric device 121) into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
After a first predetermined trigger occurs, a first control means (in the fourth embodiment, the main side A function of executing the process of step S1114 and step S1115 in the MPU 72, a function of executing the process of step S2114 and step S2115 in the main MPU 72 in the tenth embodiment),
a second ball entry means (second general electric device 122) into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
After a second predetermined trigger occurs, a second control means (in the fourth embodiment, the main side A function of executing the processing of step S1213 and step S1214 in the MPU 72, a function of executing the processing of step S2213 and step S2214 in the main MPU 72 in the tenth embodiment),
A third ball entry means (the third general electric device 123 in the fourth embodiment, the special winning device 35 in the tenth embodiment) into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
After a third predetermined trigger occurs, a third control means (in the fourth embodiment, the main side A function of executing the process of step S1310 in the MPU 72, a function of executing the process of step S2407 in the main MPU 72 in the tenth embodiment),
Even if the second predetermined trigger occurs, the second predetermined state is prevented from occurring in a situation where the first predetermined state occurs, and even in a situation where the first predetermined state occurs. A special execution means for enabling the third predetermined state to occur (in the fourth embodiment, a function of executing the processes of step S1204 and step S1215 in the main MPU 72, in the tenth embodiment, a function of executing step S2204 in the main MPU 72) and a function of executing the process of step S2215),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature E1, by providing the first ball entry means, the second ball entry means, and the third ball entry means, the objects in which the player expects the game ball to enter are diversified. In this case, even if the second predetermined trigger occurs, the second predetermined state of the second ball entering means is prevented from occurring in a situation where the first predetermined state of the first ball entering means is occurring, and the second predetermined state of the second ball entering means is prevented from occurring. Even in a situation where the first predetermined state is occurring, the third predetermined state may occur. This makes it possible to diversify the manner in which game balls enter the game in a configuration including a plurality of ball entry means, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature E2. The game according to feature E1, wherein the special execution means prevents the first predetermined state from occurring in a situation where the second predetermined state occurs even if the first predetermined trigger occurs. Machine.

According to feature E2, it is possible to prevent the first predetermined state of the first ball entering means and the second predetermined state of the second ball entering means from occurring overlappingly. As a result, even if both the first predetermined state occurrence condition and the second predetermined state occurrence condition are satisfied, the player cannot enter the game ball into the first ball entry means and play the game ball into the second ball entry means. It becomes possible to aim for the ball's entry in stages.

Feature E3. The gaming machine according to feature E1 or E2, wherein the special execution means allows the first predetermined state to occur even in a situation where the third predetermined state is occurring.

According to feature E3, the first predetermined state of the first ball entering means and the third predetermined state of the third ball entering means may overlap. As a result, the player can expect the occurrence of the other situation in one of the situations where the first ball entry means is in the first predetermined state and the situation where the third ball entry means is in the third predetermined state. .

Feature E4. The second predetermined trigger occurs based on a game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the third predetermined trigger does not occur even if a game ball enters the first ball entering means. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3.

According to feature E4, in a configuration in which the second ball entering means enters the second predetermined state based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, even if the second predetermined opportunity occurs, the first ball entering means The second predetermined state of the second ball entering means does not occur in a situation where the first predetermined state of the means occurs. This allows the player to aim for the game ball to enter the first ball entry means and the game ball to enter the second ball entry means in stages. On the other hand, in a configuration in which the third predetermined state of the third ball entry means occurs regardless of the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry means, the first predetermined state of the first ball entry means occurs. Under the circumstances, a third predetermined state of the third ball entry means occurs. This makes it possible to create a situation in which it is possible to aim the game ball to enter the first ball entry means and the game ball to enter the third ball entry means at the same time.

Feature E5. The third predetermined trigger is configured such that it does not occur even if a game ball enters the second ball entry means,
The special execution means allows the first predetermined state to occur even in a situation where the third predetermined state occurs, and allows the first predetermined state to occur even in a situation where the second predetermined state occurs. The gaming machine according to feature E4, characterized in that the third predetermined state can occur, and the second predetermined state can occur even in a situation where the third predetermined state is occurring.

According to feature E5, in the configuration in which the third ball entering means is in the third predetermined state regardless of whether the game ball enters the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means, the third ball entering means is in the third predetermined state. The three predetermined states may overlap with both the first predetermined state of the first ball entering means and the second predetermined state of the second ball entering means. This makes it possible to increase the arbitrariness of the timing at which the third ball entering means enters the third predetermined state.

Feature E6. The third ball entering means is provided at a position where the ball can enter when the game ball is supplied to the gaming area so that the game ball flows down toward the first ball entering means. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5.

According to feature E6, in a configuration in which the first predetermined state of the first ball entering means and the third predetermined state of the third ball entering means may overlap, supply of game balls to the gaming area is performed in a predetermined manner. By doing so, it becomes possible to aim at both the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry means and the entry of the game ball into the third ball entry means.

Feature E7. The special execution means prevents the second predetermined state from occurring in a situation where the first predetermined state occurs even if the second predetermined trigger corresponding to the occurrence of the second predetermined state occurs. , means for starting the second predetermined state after the first predetermined state ends (in the fourth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S1205 and step S1206 in the main MPU 72, the tenth embodiment) The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the processing of step S2205 and step S2206 in the main MPU 72.

According to feature E7, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the second predetermined trigger corresponding to the occurrence of the second predetermined state from being invalidated by the occurrence of the first predetermined state.

Feature E8. The second control means causes the second ball entry means to enter the second predetermined state after a second predetermined period has elapsed based on the occurrence of the second predetermined trigger,
When the first predetermined state occurs during the second predetermined period, the special execution means stops the measurement of the second predetermined period or extends the second predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E7, characterized in that the second predetermined state is prevented from occurring in a situation where the first predetermined state is occurring even if a trigger occurs.

According to feature E8, by simply adjusting the second predetermined period, the second predetermined state of the second ball entering means can be prevented from occurring in a situation where the first predetermined state of the first ball entering means is occurring. becomes possible.

Feature E9. If the measurement of the second predetermined period is stopped due to the occurrence of the first predetermined state in a situation where the second predetermined period is being measured, the special execution means is configured to perform a process after the first predetermined state ends. Means for restarting the stopped measurement for the second predetermined period (in the fourth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S1205 and S1206 in the main MPU 72, and in the tenth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S2205 in the main MPU 72) and a function of executing the process of step S2206).

According to feature E9, by simply temporarily stopping the measurement for the second predetermined period and canceling it, the second predetermined state of the second ball entering means can be adjusted in a situation where the first predetermined state of the first ball entering means is occurring. It is possible to prevent the situation from occurring.

Feature E10. Although the third predetermined trigger does not occur even if a game ball enters the first ball entry means, the game ball enters the third ball entry means based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E9, characterized in that a ball can enter the game or a ball can easily enter the game machine.

According to feature E10, even if the first ball entering means does not contribute to the occurrence of the third predetermined opportunity, the ease with which a game ball enters the third ball entering means is determined by the first ball entering means. It becomes possible to associate.

Feature E11. a first ball entry means (first general electric device 121) into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Based on the occurrence of a first predetermined opportunity, after a first predetermined period has elapsed, a first predetermined state is generated in which a game ball can enter the first ball entry means or can easily enter the ball. 1 control means (in the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1114 and step S1115 in the main side MPU 72, and in the tenth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2114 and step S2115 in the main side MPU 72),
a second ball entry means (second general electric device 122) into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Based on the occurrence of a second predetermined opportunity, after the second predetermined period has elapsed, a second predetermined state is generated in which the game ball can enter the second ball entry means or becomes easy to enter the ball. A second control means (in the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1213 and step S1214 in the main side MPU 72, and in the tenth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2213 and step S2214 in the main side MPU 72); ,
a third ball entry means into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter (the third general electric device 123 in the fourth embodiment, the special winning device 35 in the tenth embodiment);
Based on the occurrence of a third predetermined opportunity, after the third predetermined period has elapsed, a third predetermined state is generated in which the game ball can enter the third ball entry means or becomes easy to enter the ball. A third control means (in the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1310 in the main side MPU 72, in the tenth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2407 in the main side MPU 72),
If the first predetermined state occurs in the middle of the second predetermined period, the measurement of the second predetermined period is stopped or the second predetermined period is extended, and the first predetermined state occurs in the middle of the third predetermined period. A special execution means that does not change the third predetermined period even if a predetermined state occurs (in the fourth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S1204 and step S1215 in the main MPU 72, in the tenth embodiment, the main MPU 72 function of executing the processing of step S2204 and step S2215);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature E11, the first ball entering means, the second ball entering means, and the third ball entering means all enter the corresponding predetermined state after the corresponding predetermined period has elapsed when the corresponding predetermined trigger occurs. This makes it possible or easier to enter the game ball. This makes it possible to predict in advance that each ball entering means will be in the corresponding predetermined state.

In this case, if the first predetermined state of the first ball entering means occurs in the middle of the second predetermined period, the measurement of the second predetermined period is stopped or the second predetermined period is extended; Even if the first predetermined state of the first ball entry means occurs in a situation where the third predetermined period is being measured, the measurement of the third predetermined period is not stopped. This prevents the second ball entering means from entering the second predetermined state in a situation where the first ball entering means is in the first predetermined state, while preventing the first ball entering means from entering the first predetermined state. It becomes possible to allow the third ball entering means to be in the third predetermined state in the situation where the third ball entering means is in the third predetermined state. Therefore, in a configuration including a plurality of ball entry means, it is possible to diversify the manner in which game balls enter the ball, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that for the configuration of features E1 to E11, any one of features A1 to A25, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F12, and features G1 to G6 One or more configurations may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the inventions related to the above feature A group, the above feature B group, the above feature C group, the above feature D group, and the above feature E group, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which a player is given a profit by shifting the gaming state to a special control state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined transition condition.

Specifically, pachinko machines have a configuration in which they enter a special control state when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, resulting in a winning result in an internal lottery, and A configuration is known in which a special control state is entered based on the arrival of a game ball into a game ball. When the state shifts to the special control state, for example, opening and closing of a ball entering device provided in the gaming area is started, and game balls are paid out based on the ball entering the ball entering device.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group F>
Feature F1. a first specific ball entry means (fourth electric field device 161) into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Based on the occurrence of a first specific opportunity, after a first specific period has elapsed, a first specific state is generated in which a game ball can enter the first specific ball entry means or can easily enter the ball. A first specific control means (a function of executing the processing of step S2910 and step S2911 in the main side MPU 72),
If a predetermined event occurs in the middle of the first specific period, if the first specific trigger that triggered the occurrence of the first specific period corresponds to the occurrence of the first specific state; an event response means (a function for executing adjustment processing in the main MPU 72) that handles the first specific period differently depending on when the occurrence of the specific state is not handled;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature F1, when the first specific opportunity occurs, the first specific ball entering means enters the first specific state after the first specific period has elapsed. This allows the player to predict in advance that the first specific ball entering means will be in the first specific state.

In this case, if the predetermined event occurs in the middle of the first specific period, if the first specific trigger that triggered the occurrence of the first specific period corresponds to the occurrence of the first specific state, The first specific period is handled differently depending on the case where the specific state does not occur. As a result, while the first specific period is handled in a manner suitable for whether the conditions for the occurrence of the first specific state are satisfied or not, a predetermined event occurs in the middle of the first specific period. When a predetermined event occurs, it becomes possible to change the progress mode of the first specific period in accordance with the occurrence of the predetermined event.

Feature F2. The event response means is configured such that when the predetermined event occurs during the first specific period, the first specific trigger that triggered the occurrence of the first specific period corresponds to the occurrence of the first specific state. If not, the first specific period is terminated, while if the first specific trigger that triggered the occurrence of the first specific period corresponds to the occurrence of the first specific state, the first specific period is terminated. The gaming machine according to feature F1, characterized in that the timing at which the first specific state occurs is varied.

According to feature F2, if a predetermined event occurs in the middle of a first specific period, and the first specific trigger that triggered the occurrence of the first specific period does not correspond to the occurrence of the first specific state, shall terminate the first specified period. This makes it possible to end the first specific period that does not lead to the occurrence of the first specific state with the occurrence of a predetermined event, and it becomes possible to improve the efficiency of digestion of the first specific period while giving priority to the predetermined event. On the other hand, when the first specific trigger that triggered the occurrence of the first specific period corresponds to the occurrence of the first specific state, the timing of occurrence of the first specific state is varied. This makes it possible to shorten or extend the progress of the first specific period in response to the occurrence of a predetermined event, while preventing the benefit of the occurrence of the first specific state from disappearing.

Feature F3. The event response means is configured such that when the predetermined event occurs during the first specific period, the first specific trigger that triggered the occurrence of the first specific period corresponds to the occurrence of the first specific state. If not, the first specific period is terminated, while if the first specific trigger that triggered the occurrence of the first specific period corresponds to the occurrence of the first specific state, the first specific period is terminated. The gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2, characterized in that the timing at which the first specific state occurs is delayed.

According to feature F3, if a predetermined event occurs in the middle of the first specific period, and the first specific trigger that triggered the occurrence of the first specific period does not correspond to the occurrence of the first specific state, shall terminate the first specified period. This makes it possible to end the first specific period that does not lead to the occurrence of the first specific state with the occurrence of a predetermined event, and it becomes possible to improve the efficiency of digestion of the first specific period while giving priority to the predetermined event. On the other hand, when the first specific trigger that triggered the occurrence of the first specific period corresponds to the occurrence of the first specific state, the timing of occurrence of the first specific state is delayed. This makes it possible to give priority to the predetermined event while preventing the benefit of the occurrence of the first specific state from being lost.

Feature F4. When the predetermined event occurs in the middle of the first specific period triggered by the first specific trigger corresponding to the occurrence of the first specific state, the event handling means measures the first specific period. The gaming machine according to feature F3, characterized in that the timing of occurrence of the first specific state is delayed by once stopping and then restarting the measurement of the first specific period.

According to feature F4, the excellent effects described above can be achieved simply by temporarily stopping and canceling the measurement for the first specific period.

Feature F5. The first specific period triggered by the first specific trigger corresponding to the occurrence of the first specific state is the first specific period triggered by the first specific trigger that does not correspond to the occurrence of the first specific state The gaming machine according to feature F3 or F4, characterized in that the gaming machine is shorter than .

According to feature F5, it is possible to shorten the period required from when the first specific trigger occurs until the first specific state starts. In this case, the first specific period, which has the configuration of feature F3 above and is triggered by the first specific trigger that does not correspond to the occurrence of the first specific state, is terminated when the predetermined event occurs. This makes it possible to increase the efficiency of digestion.

Feature F6. A configuration in which a predetermined profit can be given based on game balls being supplied to the game area in a predetermined manner in a special game state,
The gaming machine according to any one of features F3 to F5, wherein the first specific trigger can occur when game balls are supplied to the gaming area in the predetermined manner.

According to feature F6, not only a predetermined profit is given by supplying game balls in a predetermined manner to the game area in the special game state, but also the first specific ball entering means can enter the first specific state. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of the special gaming state.

Feature F7. An entrance provided at a position where a game ball can enter the game ball based on the game ball being supplied to the game area in a specific manner different from the predetermined manner or at a position where the game ball enters easily. Means for transitioning the gaming state to the special gaming state (executes the processing of step S2614 and step S2615 in the main side MPU 72, with at least one condition that a game ball enters the ball means (first through winning section 160) function),
The first specific period triggered by the first specific trigger that does not correspond to the occurrence of the first specific state is the first specific period triggered by the first specific trigger that corresponds to the occurrence of the first specific state The gaming machine according to feature F6, characterized in that the gaming machine is longer than .

According to feature F7, until the transition to the special game state, game balls are supplied to the game area in a specific manner with the aim of causing the game balls to enter the ball entering means, and the game ball is supplied to the game area in a specific manner until the transition to the special game state. After that, game balls are supplied to the game area in a predetermined manner so that a predetermined profit is awarded.

However, it is assumed that a game operation is performed so that game balls are supplied to the game area in a predetermined manner in a situation where the special game state has not been entered, and in this case, even though the special game state is not in progress. First, there is a risk that the first specific ball entering means will be in the first specific state. On the other hand, the first specific period triggered by the first specific state that does not correspond to the occurrence of the first specific state is longer than the first specific period triggered by the first specific trigger corresponding to the occurrence of the first specific state. Because of the long length, even if game balls are supplied to the game area in a predetermined manner so that the first specific ball entering means enters the first specific state even though the game is not in the special gaming state, the gaming efficiency is reduced. It is possible to lower the amount. On the other hand, since the first specific period, which has the configuration of feature F3 above and is triggered by the first specific opportunity that does not correspond to the occurrence of the first specific state, ends when a predetermined event occurs, in the special gaming state It becomes possible to increase gaming efficiency.

Feature F8. The gaming machine according to feature F7, wherein the predetermined event occurs in the special gaming state.

According to feature F8, a predetermined event occurs in the special gaming state, and when the predetermined event occurs, the first specific period triggered by the first specific opportunity that does not correspond to the occurrence of the first specific state ends. Even if the first specific period is set to a relatively long period, it is possible to improve the efficiency of consumption of the first specific period.

Feature F9. Feature F8 is characterized in that the shortest occurrence interval of the predetermined event in the special gaming state is shorter than the first specific period triggered by the first specific trigger that does not correspond to the occurrence of the first specific state. The game machine described.

According to feature F9, since the predetermined event occurs at relatively short intervals in the special gaming state, the first specific period triggered by the first specific opportunity that does not correspond to the occurrence of the first specific state is started early. It is possible to terminate it.

Feature F10. A means (a function of executing the process of step S2703 in the main MPU 72) that makes it possible to increase the advantage of the special gaming state based on the game ball entering the first specific ball entering means. The gaming machine according to any one of features F6 to F9.

According to feature F10, in the special game state, the player not only expects a predetermined profit to be given, but also expects the game ball to enter the first specific ball entry means, so that the game is improved. It becomes possible to improve interest.

Feature F11. a second specific ball entry means (the second general power device 122 or the third general power device 123 in the eleventh embodiment) into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Based on the occurrence of the second specific trigger, a second specific control means (main side MPU 72 (a function of executing steps S2713 to S2714 or steps S2813 to S2814);
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F10, wherein the predetermined event is that the second specific ball entry means enters the second specific state.

According to feature F11, it is possible to prevent the first specific ball entering means from being in the first specific state in a situation where the second specific ball entering device is in the second specific state. By using this configuration, it is possible to achieve excellent effects as already described.

Feature F12. a third specific ball entry means (second general electric device 122 in the eleventh embodiment) into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Based on the occurrence of a third specific opportunity, after a third specific period has elapsed, a third specific state is generated in which a game ball can enter the third specific ball entry means or can easily enter the ball. a third specific control means (a function for executing the processing of steps S2713 to S2714 in the main MPU 72);
When the predetermined event occurs in the middle of the third specific period, means for temporarily stopping the measurement of the third specific period and then restarting the measurement of the third specific period (steps S2705 to S2705 in the main MPU 72) function to execute the processing of S2706 and step S2715);
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F11, characterized by comprising:

According to feature F12, it is possible to prevent the third specific period from ending even if a predetermined event occurs.

Note that for the configuration of features F1 to F12, any one of features A1 to A25, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F12, and features G1 to G6 One or more configurations may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the above feature group F, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which a player is given a profit by shifting the gaming state to a special control state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined transition condition.

Specifically, pachinko machines have a configuration in which they enter a special control state when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, resulting in a winning result in an internal lottery, and A configuration is known in which a special control state is entered based on the arrival of a game ball into a game ball. When the state shifts to the special control state, for example, opening and closing of a ball entering device provided in the gaming area is started, and game balls are paid out based on the ball entering the ball entering device.

Here, innovative game contents are required for gaming machines such as those exemplified above, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature G group>
Feature G1. A variable ball entry means (a predetermined power supply device 172) that allows entry of game balls flowing down the gaming area and is provided to be switchable between an open state and a closed state;
Opening/closing control means (step S3507, step S3605, step S3610, and step S3710 in the main MPU 72) that executes opening/closing control to change the variable ball entry means to the open state and then to the closed state when a predetermined gaming state is entered. function to perform processing), and
A first terminating means for terminating the predetermined gaming state after the number of times the variable ball entry means has been in the open state in the predetermined gaming state reaches an upper limit number of times (executing the processes of steps S3613 to S3615 in the main MPU 72); function) and
A second ending means (steps S3605 to S3608 and steps S3705 to S3705 in the main MPU 72) that ends the predetermined gaming state after the number of game balls that have entered the variable ball entering means reaches the upper limit number in the predetermined gaming state. function to execute the process of step S3707);
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the upper limit number of times is greater than the upper limit number.

According to feature G1, the predetermined gaming state ends after the number of times the variable ball entry means is in the open state reaches the upper limit number of times, and the number of game balls that enter the variable ball entry means reaches the upper limit number. In a configuration in which the predetermined gaming state ends later, the upper limit number of times is larger than the upper limit number. As a result, even if one or more game balls are not entered into the variable ball entry means each time the variable ball entry means is in the open state, the upper limit number of game balls can be transferred to the variable ball entry means in the predetermined gaming state. It becomes possible to let the ball enter the ball. In this case, in a predetermined gaming state, the player predicts whether or not the upper limit number of game balls will enter the variable ball entry means while paying attention to the number of times the variable ball entry means is in the open state. It becomes possible to improve the interest of

Feature G2. The gaming machine according to feature G1, characterized in that the period from when the variable ball entry means enters the open state until it enters the closed state is equal to or less than the shortest cycle for supplying game balls to the gaming area. .

According to feature G2, even if only one game ball enters the variable ball entry means in one execution of the open state of the variable ball entry means, there will also be execution times in which no ball enters the variable ball entry means. . In this case, with the configuration of feature G1 above, and the upper limit number of balls is larger than the upper limit number, the player can have the upper limit number of game balls enter the variable ball entry means in a predetermined gaming state. It is possible to predict whether or not the game will occur while paying attention to the number of times the variable ball entry means is in the open state, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature G3. A predetermined notification that allows the player to recognize the number of occurrences of the open state required to reach the upper limit number and the number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means required to reach the upper limit number. The gaming machine according to feature G1 or G2, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with a means for executing (a function of executing the processing of steps S3802, S3804, and S3811 in the audio-optical side MPU 92).

According to feature G3, it is possible to grasp the remaining number of occurrences of the open state of the variable ball entry means and the remaining number of game balls that can enter the variable ball entry means by checking the predetermined notification. Become. Thereby, the player can complete the predetermined game state while being aware of the situations in which the game ball should enter the variable ball entry means and the situations in which it is not necessary to enter the game ball.

Feature G4. A configuration in which a special profit can be given based on the entry of a game ball into the variable ball entry means, wherein the entry of the game ball into the variable ball entry means before the completion condition is satisfied. In the case where a new occurrence occurs, the degree of advantage of the special profit is lower than in the case where a game ball enters the variable ball entry means newly occurs after the completion condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G3.

According to feature G4, when a game ball is entered into the variable ball entry means, if the game ball is entered into the variable ball entry means again before the completion condition is satisfied, the advantage of special profit decreases. Resulting in. In this case, by having the configuration of feature G1 above and setting the upper limit number of balls to be larger than the upper limit number, the completion condition is met while ultimately causing the upper limit number of game balls to enter. In a situation where this is not the case, it is possible to choose not to allow the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means that is in the open state.

Feature G5. The variable ball entry means includes an auxiliary ball entry means (first non-electric device 173) that enters an open state based on the entry of a game ball into the variable ball entry means and enters a closed state based on the entry of a game ball into the variable ball entry means. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G4.

According to feature G5, based on the game ball entering the variable ball entry means, the auxiliary ball entry means becomes open, and based on the game ball entering the auxiliary ball entry means, the auxiliary ball entry means opens. In a configuration in which the means is in a closed state, if a game ball enters the variable ball entry means in a situation where the auxiliary ball entry means is open, the opportunity for the ball to enter the auxiliary ball entry means is reduced to 1. You will end up losing the dose. In this case, by having the configuration of feature G1 above and setting the upper limit number of times to be greater than the upper limit number, while ultimately causing the upper limit number of game balls to enter, In a situation where the means is in the open state, it becomes possible to choose not to allow a game ball to enter the variable ball entry means which is in the open state.

Feature G6. Allowing a player to recognize the period required from the end of one run in which the variable ball entry means enters the open state in the predetermined game state until the next time the variable ball entry means enters the open state. The gaming machine according to feature G4 or G5, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with means for executing specific notification (a function of executing the processing of steps S3806 to S3809 in the audio-light side MPU 92).

According to feature G6, by checking the specific notification, it is possible to grasp the timing when the variable ball entry means will be in the open state next time. This makes it possible to prevent the game ball from flowing down toward the variable ball entry means in advance when the situation is not such that the game ball should enter the variable ball entry means.

Note that for the configuration of features G1 to G6, any one of features A1 to A25, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D10, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F12, and features G1 to G6 One or more configurations may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to feature group G above, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which a player is given a profit by shifting the gaming state to a special control state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined transition condition.

Specifically, pachinko machines have a configuration in which they enter a special control state when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, resulting in a winning result in an internal lottery, and A configuration is known in which a special control state is entered based on the arrival of a game ball into a game ball. When the state shifts to the special control state, for example, opening and closing of a ball entering device provided in the gaming area is started, and game balls are paid out based on the ball entering the ball entering device.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

Below, the basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or is applied to each feature will be shown.

Pachinko game machine: an operating means operated by a player, a game ball firing means that fires a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball path that guides the fired game ball to a predetermined gaming area, A game machine comprising game parts arranged within a region, and giving a bonus to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage part of each game part.

A reel-type gaming machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a pattern display device that variably displays a plurality of symbols, the variable display of the plurality of symbols is started due to the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the plurality of symbols is started due to the operation of the stop operation means. A gaming machine in which variable display of the plurality of symbols is stopped after the display is stopped or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and a bonus is given to a player according to the symbols after the stoppage.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Pachinko machine, 32... First operation part, 34... Through winning part, 35... Special winning device, 42... Discharge path, 72... Main side MPU, 92... Sound and light side MPU, 116... General figure holding area, 121 ...First general power device, 122...Second general power device, 123...Third general power device, 124...Specific operation section, 142...Second general power reservation area, 143...Third general power reservation area, 160...No. 1-through winning section, 161... Fourth general power device, 172... Predetermined general power device, 173... First non-electric device.

Claims (1)

an opportunity ball entry means that allows a game ball flowing down the gaming area to enter;
information acquisition means for acquiring opportunity information based on the game ball entering the opportunity ball entry means;
information storage means for storing the trigger information acquired by the information acquisition means;
a predetermined profit granting means for granting a predetermined profit to a player with at least one condition being the acquisition of the trigger information;
a measuring means for measuring a predetermined period of time based on the acquired trigger information;
A specific profit may be given to the player in a situation where the predetermined period is measured, or a specific profit is granted to the player in a situation where the predetermined period is measured than in a situation where the predetermined period is not measured. a specific profit granting means that makes it easier to be granted;
Equipped with
The specific profit granting means creates a situation in which it is possible to enter a game ball into a predetermined ball entry means as a grant of the specific profit,
This gaming machine is
A specific ball entry means provided so that whether or not the predetermined period is measured does not affect the frequency of entry of game balls;
means for providing a separate profit based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means, and providing the separate profit based on the game ball entering the specific ball entry means;
means for shifting the gaming state to a special gaming state advantageous to the player, with at least one condition being that the game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means;
Equipped with
The frequency of entry of game balls into the opportunity ball entry means is not affected by whether or not the predetermined period is being measured;
A gaming machine characterized in that the measuring means is configured to measure the predetermined period even in the special gaming state .

Images